Toyota 2007 Tundra Owners Manual

2015-09-08

: Toyota Toyota-2007-Tundra-Owners-Manual-763178 toyota-2007-tundra-owners-manual-763178 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 629

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2007 Quick Reference Guide

Customer Experience Center 1-800-331-4331

This Quick Reference Guide and the iGuide are not full descriptions of Tundra operations.
Every Tundra owner should review the Owner’s Manual that accompanies this vehicle.
All information in this Quick Reference Guide is current at the time of printing.
Toyota reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice.

MN 00452-PRG07-TUN
Printed in USA 02/07

Interactive Owner’s Guide

Interactive Owner’s Guide
Have a question about the main features of your new Toyota? Find the answers
quickly and easily in this Quick Reference Guide, which includes highlights
from the Owner’s Manual. For more detailed information, and helpful
interactive demonstrations and tips, visit www.Toyotaiguide.com or use this
handy CD-ROM in your PC or Macintosh®.

This iGuide is designed to be played on
any computer—PC or Macintosh ®.
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
PC
WINDOWS ® 98
PENTIUM ® III 600MHZ
64MB OF RAM
800 X 600 MONITOR
16-BIT COLOR
CD-ROM DRIVE

MA CIN T OS H ®
SYSTEM 9.X,
OS X 10.2
POWERPC ®
64MB OF RAM
24-BIT COLOR
CD-ROM DRIVE

A word about safe vehicle operations !
Pay special attention to the boxed “
” information highlighted in this
reference guide and throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe
operating instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment malfunction.
This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car
because it is also designed for off-road use. It has a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for important rollover information.

2007 Tundra Quick Reference Guide

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Accessory meter
Air Conditioning/Heating
Audio
Auto LSD (Auto Limited Slip Differential)
Automatic Transmission
Bottle holders
Cruise control
Cup holders
Door locks
Four-wheel drive
Garage door opener (HomeLink®)3
Lights1 & turn signals
Mirrors-Power side view
Moonroof
Multi-information display2
Parking brake
Power outlets-12V DC
Power outlets-115V AC
Rear seat entertainment system
Seat adjustments-Front
Seat adjustments-Rear
Seats-Folding
Seat heaters
Seats-Head restraints

EMERGENCY FEATURES

25
20-21
22-23
27
9
27
25
26
10
10
21
16
10
12
18
26
17
17
24
12-13
13
14-15
20
14

Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
“TOW/HAUL” switch
Windows-Power
Windows-Rear
Windshield wiper & washer

11
11
19
19
15

Doors-Child safety locks
Seat belts
Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
Spare tire & tools
Tire Pressure Warning System reset

29
28
28
29
28

Visit your Toyota dealer for information on customizing this feature.
Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for instructions and
more information.

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

SAFETY AND

8
7
7
4-5
4
2-3
6
6

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Engine maintenance
Fuel tank door release and cap
Hood release
Indicator symbols
Instrument cluster
Instrument panel
Keyless entry1
Light control-Instrument panel

OVERVIEW

OVERVIEW
Instrument panel
Bench seat

OVERVIEW

Steering wheel
controls (if equipped)

Separate seat with
manual Air Conditioning
system

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

“TOW/HAUL” button1
Two-wheel/Four-wheel drive selector1
Tire Pressure Warning System reset
“VSC OFF” button
115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch1
Cruise control1
Ignition switch
Accessory meter
Theft deterrent system/Engine immobilizer indicator1
Intuitive parking assist indicator1
Front passenger airbag manual ON/OFF switch1 (in glove box)
Instrument panel light control
Interior light/Personal light main switch
“RSCA OFF” switch
Power back window switch
Cargo lamp switch
Power rear view mirror control
1
2

If equipped
For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”
3

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Steering wheel audio control1
Telephone control1
Voice command button1,2
Headlight and turn signal controls
Wiper and washer controls
Multi-information display/Accessory meter control buttons
Intuitive parking assist button1
Emergency flasher button
Audio system or navigation system-integrated audio system1,2
Outside rear view mirror/Back window defogger button1
Front passenger seat belt reminder
Front passenger occupant classification indicator or front passenger
airbag ON/OFF indicator1
Seat heater controls1
Air Conditioning controls
12V DC Power outlet
AUX audio jack
Cigarette lighter/12V DC Power outlet

OVERVIEW

Instrument cluster

Low engine oil pressure warning1

Without multi-information display

Engine oil replacement reminder1

OVERVIEW

Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1

Low fuel level warning1
Open door warning1
Airbag SRS warning1
Master warning1

With multi-information display

Automatic Transmission fluid temperature warning1
Low Tire Pressure Warning1
Low windshield washer fluid level warning1

Roll Sensing Curtain Airbags off indicator4

Tachometer
Service indicator and reminder
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Voltmeter
Oil pressure gauge
Engine coolant temperature
Trip meter reset knob
Odometer and two trip meters
Multi-information display
Automatic Transmission shift position indicator
Automatic Transmission shift range display
Automatic Transmission fluid temperature gauge

Headlight low/high beam indicator
Turn signal indicator
High/Low speed four-wheel drive indicator2
Slip indicator
Vehicle Stability Control “OFF” indicator/warning1
TOW/HAUL mode indicator
“AUTO LSD” indicator
Cruise control indicator3

Brake system warning1

Anti-lock Brake System warning1

Driver/Front passenger seat belt reminder1
(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)
When
brake
brake
pump

Charging system warning1
Front passenger occupant classification or front passenger airbag
ON/OFF indicator
For details, refer to “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers,” Section 1-6, 2007
Owner’s Manual.
2 If this light flashes, refer to “Four-wheel drive system,” Section 1-7, 2007 Owner’s Manual.

3
4

the anti-lock brake system (ABS) function is in action, you may feel the
pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti-lock
system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
the brake as this will result in reduced braking performance.

If this light flashes, refer to “Cruise control,” Section 1-7, 2007 Owner’s Manual.
If this light flashes, refer to “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch,” Section 1-3,
2007 Owner’s Manual.

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Indicator symbols

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Theft deterrent/Engine immobilizer system indicator

OVERVIEW

Keyless entry

Fuel tank door release and cap

Locking operation

Unlocking operation
OVERVIEW

Pull
Store
Push ONCE: Driver door
TWICE: All doors

NOTE: If a door is not opened within

NOTE: Tighten until one click is
heard. If the cap is not sealed
properly, Check Engine “ ”
indicator may illuminate.

30 seconds of unlocking, all doors
will relock for safety.

Push

Alarm operation

Turn

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Hood release

Push and hold

Light control-Instrument panel

Pull

Brightness
control
Pull up latch and
raise hood

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

OVERVIEW

Engine maintenance

Automatic Transmission

6 cylinder (1GR-FE) engine

Floor shift type
OVERVIEW

Park1
Reverse
Neutral

“D”

Drive
“S” mode
“S”

4.7L 8 cylinder (2UZ-FE) engine
Column shift type

+ (“S” mode)

Reverse
Neutral

- (“S” mode)

Drive

5.7L 8 cylinder (3UR-FE) engine

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Park1

“S” mode

The ignition switch must be ON and the brake pedal depressed to shift
from “Park.”

“S” (Sequential) mode
Shift the shift lever to “S” position from “D” position.

Note: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will
help extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance.
Please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet,”
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement.”
8

Floor shift type:
+: Upshift (Push and release)
-: Downshift (Pull and release)
Column shift type:
+: Upshift (Turn up and release)
-: Downshift (Turn down and release)
Downshifting increases power going uphill, or provides engine braking
downhill. For best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, always
drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.
9

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Windshield washer fluid tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil level dipstick
Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil filler cap

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Four-wheel drive (if equipped)

Tilt and telescopic (if equipped)
steering wheel
Tilt steering wheel

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

Angle
Turn

Angle
Length

Turn

Lock release lever

Hold wheel, push lever down, set angle and length, then return lever.

Push
and turn

OVERVIEW

Manual

Power

High speed (2WD)
High speed (4WD)
Turn to “4H” with speed below 62 mph.

Angle

For best fuel economy and performance under normal driving conditions,
keep in “2WD” position.

Mirrors-Power side view (if equipped)

Control switch

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Length

Low speed (4WD)
Shift to “N” position when stopped, then push and turn to “4L.”

Push the control switch, set angle and length.
Note: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion.

Select left or right

Fold mirrors in
Return mirrors to
original position

“TOW/HAUL” switch (if equipped)
Floor shift type

Column shift type

Adjust

Door locks (if equipped)
System ON/OFF
Unlock

Lock

Tow/Haul mode can be used when carrying heavy loads. As fuel economy
is reduced while in Tow/Haul mode, deactivating when driving without a
load is recommended.
Refer to the Owner‘s Manual for more details on this system before
attempting to use it.

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

System
ON/OFF

Key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Power seat

Moonroof (if equipped)
Sliding operation

Tilting operation
OVERVIEW

Tilt

Open
Close

Seat adjustments-Front
Manual seat
Separate seat
-Double cab and Crew Max models

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Separate seat
-Regular cab model

Position
Seatback angle
Seat cushion angle
Seat height
Lumbar support*
Seatback angle (side)
Seatback angle (center)
Leg support
Position, cushion angle and height
* If equipped

Seats adjustments-Rear

Bench seat
-Regular cab model

Bench seat
-Double cab and Crew Max models

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Position
Seatback angle and fold
12

FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Rear (double cab model)

Seats-Head restraints

OVERVIEW

Front (type B)
-Separate seat

Front (type A)
-Separate seat

(2)

(2)
(1) Stow
(1)
Lock release button

Lock release button
(3) Lift up

Front-Bench seat

Pull

Rear (double cab model)

Rear (Crew Max model)
FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Lock release button

Rear (Crew Max model)

(2)

(1) Stow

(3) Pull and
fold down

Lock release button

Seats-Folding
Windshield wiper & washer

Front (regular cab model)

With intermittent wiper
Single wipe

Single wipe

Interval wipe

(2) Pull

Slow

(1) Pull
Pull to wash
and wipe

Slow

Pull to wash
and wipe

Fast

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Adjust interval

Without intermittent wiper

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Lights & turn signals

Power outlets-12V DC (if equipped)

Headlights

Separate seats
Instrument panel

Inside of the center
console box

Back of the center
console box

Back of the center
console box
(Crew Max model only)

Headlights
Parking lights

OVERVIEW

Auto*

Headlights

Parking lights

High beam

Low beam

High beam flasher

* If equipped

Bench seat
Instrument panel

Under the seat cushion
of the front center seat

Back of the front
center seat

Back of the front
center seat
(Crew Max model only)

Front fog lights (if equipped)

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

-Daytime Running Light system (DRL)(if equipped) Automatically turns
on the turn signal lights at a reduced intensity.
-Automatic light cut off system Automatically turns lights off after a
delay of 30 seconds, or the lock switch on remote may be pushed.

Turn

Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.
Key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position to be used.
Right turn
Lane change

Power outlet-115V AC (if equipped)
ON/OFF switch

Back of the center
console box

Lane change
Left turn

Push

Back of the front
center seat

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Turn signals

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Multi-information display (if equipped)

Windows-Power (if equipped)
Regular cab model
Window
lock
switch

OVERVIEW

Driver side

Up
Down
Down

Double cab and Crew Max models
Driver side

Window
lock
switch

Automatic down operation (driver side only)
Push the switch completely down and release to fully open. To stop
window midway, lightly pull up on the switch.
Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver’s window
remains operable.

Window-Rear
Crew Max model
Close
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Push “SETUP US/M” to customize to the following settings:
(1) KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK
(2) KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER
(3) KEYLESS ENTRY ALL DOORS UNLOCK
(4) DOOR AUTO LOCKING
(5) DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING
(6) HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER
(7) COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER
(8) DEFAULT SETTING

Down

Open

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

bUp

Down

Push “INFO” to change information in the following:
(1) Zoom display of odometer and trip meter
(2) Average gas mileage
(3) Current gas mileage
(4) Miles left on remaining fuel
(5) Running time from engine start
(6) Average vehicle speed

FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Manual Air Conditioning

Seat heaters (if equipped)
Left front seat

Right front seat
OVERVIEW

Air Conditioning/Heating
Automatic Air Conditioning

* If equipped

Garage door opener (HomeLink®)*
(if equipped)

Garage door openers manufactured under license from HomeLink®* can
be programmed to operate garage doors, estate gates, security lighting, etc.
Refer to “Garage door opener,” Section 1-10 in the Owner’s Manual for
more details.
For programming assistance, contact the Toyota Customer Experience
Center at 1-800-331-4331, or visit http://www.homelink.com.
*HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Fan speed
Automatic climate control ON
Adjusting the temperature setting will cause the airflow vents, air
intake and fan to adjust automatically.
Temperature (driver side)
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
Airflow vent
In “
” mode, use fresh air (“
” indicator “OFF”) to reduce
window fogging.
Windshield airflow (fresh air only)
Temperature (front passenger side)
“DUAL” button
Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings for driver and
passenger.
Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature settings for driver and
passenger.
Outside rearview mirror/Back window defogger
Fresh or recirculated cabin air
Climate control OFF

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Fan speed
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
Fresh or recirculated cabin air
Outside rearview mirror/Back window defogger*
Temperature (front passenger side)
Synchronize with driver side temperature setting
Airflow vent selector
In “
” or “
” mode, use fresh air (“
” indicator “OFF”) to
reduce window fogging.
Temperature (driver side)
Use for quick cooling. MAX A/C changes air intake to recirculate. It is
not possible to change intake to fresh, or to turn A/C OFF in this mode.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Audio

To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset
button (1-6) until you hear a beep. Push desired preset button (1-6) to
select.
To scan stations Push and hold “SCAN” to scan preset stations. Push again
to hold selection.

Preset buttons - functions in other
modes indicated above number

Push to turn
ON/OFF
Eject CD

Seek
station/
CD track
select

OVERVIEW

Type 1

RADIO

Steering wheel switches (if equipped)

Push to skip
up/down
MP3 folder

Push to adjust
tone, balance
& ASL*
Mode

Type 2 additional functions

Station/CD
track scan

View CD
information

Type 3 (with JBL speakers)

View MP3
folder and/or
Satellite Radio
category type

“ + ”
Volume control
“MODE”
Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode. Push and hold to turn
the audio system “OFF.”
“
”
-In radio mode
Push to select a preset station; push and hold to seek the next strong
station.
-In CD mode
Push to skip up or down to the next/previous track.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Load CD(s)

AUX audio jack

CD PLAYER
To scan tracks on a disc Push and hold “SCAN.” Push again to hold
selection.
CD changer (Type 2 and 3 only)
-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.
-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until you hear a beep.
Insert one disc. Shutter will close and then re-open for next disc.
To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn “TUNE.FILE.”
To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push either side of “FOLDER.”
22

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX audio jack, you can listen to music
from a portable audio device through the vehicle’s speaker system.

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

* Automatic Sound Leveling

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Rear seat entertainment system
(if equipped)

Accessory meter (if equipped)
OVERVIEW

Separate seats
Bench seat

115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch
Front audio system
DVD player
DVD screen
Remote control
115V AC Power outlet
A/V input adapter

Refer to your Owner’s Manual for complete details on this system before
attempting to use it.

Cruise control (if equipped)
Turning system ON/OFF

Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)
(if equipped)

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Outside temperature/cruise information display
Clock
Hour set
Minute set
Change information (if equipped)
“SELECT RESET” button (if equipped)
“SETUP US/M” button (if equipped) to customize unit

System ON/OFF

Functions
Resume2/Increase speed

Set/Decrease speed

Bluetooth® technology allows you to place or receive calls without taking
your hands from the steering wheel or using a cable to connect the
telephone and the system.
Refer to “Hands-free telephone system,” Section 1-8 in the Owner’s
Manual for more details.
24

1
2

The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing the brake pedal.
The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph.
25

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Cancel1

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Parking brake

Bottle holders
Front door

Rear door

Rear door
(Crew Max model only)

OVERVIEW

Instrument panel

Set: Depress
Release: Depress again

Cup holders
Separate seat

Bench seat
Front center seat

Center console

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Auto LSD (Auto Limited Slip
Differential)

Back of the front center seatback
(double cab model)
Back of the center console box
(double cab model)

VSC OFF

Rear seat

Note: ONLY works in 2-wheel drive at speeds under 62 mph. Should
ONLY be used when wheel spinning occurs on slippery or
unpaved surfaces. Pushing and holding “VSC OFF” for three
seconds activates/deactivates VSC (Vehicle Stability Control).

Crew Max model

Refer to the Owner‘s Manual for more details on this system before
attempting to use it.

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Briefly pushing the “VSC OFF” switch activates/deactivates Auto LSD.

SAFETY AND
EMERGENCY FEATURES
Seat belts
Take up
slack
Too high
Ta b

B u c k le

Keep as low on
hips as possible

If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be reextended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature is
used to help hold child restraint systems securely.
To find more information about seat belts, and how to install a child
restraint system, refer to the Owner's Manual.

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
(double cab and Crew Max models)
Push up, or
squeeze lock
release to lower

Tire Pressure Warning System reset

System reset initialization
1. Push and hold “ SET” button
until the indicator blinks 3 times.
2. Wait about 7 minutes to allow
initialization to complete.

If tire pressure becomes critically low on any of the tires (excluding spare),
indicator comes on. Pushing “ SET” button should not turn off the light.
Correctly adjusting tire inflation will turn off the light after a few minutes.
After replacing/rotating tire or wheels, the system must be initialized.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Door-Child safety locks
(double cab and Crew Max only)
OVERVIEW

Rear door

Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to be opened only from
the outside.

Spare tire & tools
Tool location
Regular cab models
-behind the right seatback

Crew Max models
-behind the right rear seatback

Tool bag
Jack

Tool bag

Double cab models
-under the right rear seats
without storage box

Double cab models
-under the right rear seats
with storage box

Tool bag

Jack

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Jack

Removing the spare tire

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and jack positioning
procedures.
29

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Assemble the jack handle.
Insert the jack handle end into the lowering screw.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise.

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Steering switches and overhead console overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Instrument panel overview
"Bench seat (view A)
1. Side defroster outlet
2. Instrument panel vents (side vents)
3. Instrument cluster
4. Automatic transmission selector lever
5. Instrument panel vents (center vents)
6. Glove boxes
7. Power door lock switches
8. Power window switches
9. Auxiliary boxes
10. Bottle holders

XS11023a

11. Instrument panel light control dial
12. Interior light/personal light main switch
13. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)
14. Power back window switch
(Crew Max models)
15. Cargo lamp switch
16. Hood lock release lever
17. Parking brake pedal
18. Power rear view mirror control switch
19. Window lock switch

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

"Separate seat (view A)
1. Side defroster outlet
2. Instrument panel vents (side vents)
3. Instrument cluster
4. Instrument panel vents (center vents)
5. Glove boxes
6. Power door lock switches
7. Power window switches
8. Auxiliary boxes
9. A/V input adapter
(with rear seat entertainment system)

XS11018a

10. Power outlet
11. Rear vents (Crew Max models)
12. Center console box
13. Ashtray
14. Cup holders
15. Automatic transmission selector lever
16. Instrument panel light control dial
17. Interior light/personal light main switch
18. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)
19. Power back window switch
(Crew Max models)
20. Cargo lamp switch
21. Hood lock release lever
22. Parking brake pedal
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

23. Power rear view mirror control switch
24. Window lock switch
25. Driving position memory switch

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

"Bench seat (view B)
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Accessory meter control switch
4. Intuitive parking assist switch
5. Emergency flasher switch
6. Audio system or navigation system
including audio system
(For
the
navigation system, see the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
7. Air conditioning controls

XS11022

8. Outside rear view mirror defogger
switch/Back window and outside rear
view mirror defogger switch
9. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
10. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
11. Passenger airbag off switch
(Regular cab models)
12. AUX adapter
13. Ashtray
14. Power outlet
15. Cigarette lighter
16. Front drive control switch knob
(four−wheel drive models)
17. Tire pressure warning reset switch
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

18. “VSC OFF” switch
19. Power outlet main switch
(with rear seat entertainment system)
20. Cruise control switch
21. Ignition switch
22. Accessory meter
23. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent
system indicator light
24. Intuitive parking assist indicator lights

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

"Separate seat with manual air conditioning system (view B)
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Accessory meter control switches
4. Intuitive parking assist switch
5. Emergency flasher switch
6. Audio system or navigation system
including audio system
(For
the
navigation system, see the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
7. Air conditioning controls

XS11020

8. Outside rear view mirror defogger
switch/Back window and outside rear
view mirror defogger switch
9. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
10. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
11. Passenger airbag off switch
(Regular cab models)
12. Power outlet
13. AUX adapter
14. Cigarette lighter
15. “TOW/HAUL” switch
16. Front drive control switch knob
(four−wheel drive models)
17. Tire pressure warning reset switch
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

"Separate seat with automatic air conditioning system (view B)
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Multi−information display/accessory meter control switches
4. Intuitive parking assist switch
5. Emergency flasher switch
6. Audio system or navigation system
including audio system
(For
the
navigation system, see the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

XS11021

7. Outside rear view mirror defogger
switch/Back window and outside rear
view mirror defogger switch
8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
9. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
10. Seat heater dials
11. Air conditioning controls
12. Power outlet
13. AUX adapter
14. Cigarette lighter
15. “TOW/HAUL” switch
16. Front drive control switch knob
(four−wheel drive models)
17. Tire pressure warning reset switch
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Steering switches and
overhead console overview
"Steering switches

"Overhead console

XS10010a

XS11007a

24. Intuitive parking assist indicator lights

1. Audio remote control switches

Type A

2. Telephone switches
3. Talk switch

XS11024

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

1. Card holder
2. Interior light switch
3. Interior light
4. Sunglass holder
5. Microphone
6. Personal lights
7. Auxiliary boxes
8. Moon roof switches
(on some Crew Max models)

XS11009e

Type C

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Instrument cluster overview
"Type A

XS11002c

1. Tachometer

5. Voltmeter

2. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights

6. Oil pressure gauge

3. Speedometer

8. Trip meter reset knob

4. Fuel gauge

10. Automatic transmission shift position
indicator lights

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge
9. Odometer and two trip meters

11. Automatic transmission shift range
display
12. Automatic transmission fluid
temperature gauge

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

"Type B

XS11003c

1. Tachometer

5. Voltmeter

2. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights

6. Oil pressure gauge

3. Speedometer

8. Trip meter reset knob

4. Fuel gauge

10. Automatic transmission shift position
indicator lights

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge
9. Multi−information display

11. Automatic transmission shift range
display
12. Automatic transmission fluid
temperature gauge

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel
or

Master warning light∗1

Brake system warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1
or
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

light∗1
Open door warning light∗1

Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

SRS warning light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Tire pressure warning light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light∗1

Low fuel level warning light∗1

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent system
indicator light

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
indicator light∗4

Tow/haul mode indicator light

Headlight low beam indicator light

“AUTO LSD” indicator light

Tail light indicator light

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Headlight high beam indicator light

∗1 :

For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.

∗2 :

If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 259 in
Section 1−7.

∗3 :

If this light flashes, see “Four−wheel drive system” on page
239 in Section 1−7.

∗4 :

For details, see “—Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
switch” on page 113 in Section 1−3.

Turn signal indicator lights
High speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗3
(four−wheel drive models)
Low speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗3
(four−wheel drive models)

Slip indicator light

Vehicle stability control system off
indicator/warning light∗1

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 10

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment

Accessory meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intuitive parking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets (12 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlet (115 VAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pen holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tissue pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatback table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deck hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grocery bag/cargo net hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

398
402
407
411
412
414
416
416
420
421
422
423
425
425
426
428
429
430
431
432
432
433
433

397

07 04.26

Accessory meter—
1. Outside temperature and cruise information display or outside temperature
display
2. Clock
3. “H” button
4. “M” button
5. “INFO” button (with cruise information)
6. “SELECT RESET” button
(with cruise information)
7. “SETUP US/M” button

XS10001c

398

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Before using the accessory
meter
Operate the accessory meter with the
ignition switch on.
When the ignition switch is turned to
“ON”, the last previously used mode displayed just before the ignition switch is
turned off will appear.
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the display
will be reduced.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

—Outside temperature display
(without cruise information)
SELECTING UNIT
You can select the unit between English/U.S. customary system and metric
unit.
To select the unit A (English/U.S. customary system) or unit B (metric unit), push
“SETUP US/M” button.

XS10003b

The unit variations are as follows:
Information

Unit A

Unit B

Average fuel
consumption and
Instantaneous
fuel consumption

MPG

L/100 km

MILES

Driving range
Outside
temperature

The displayed temperature ranges from
−40_C (−40_F) up to 50_C (122_F).
The ignition switch must be in the “ON”
position.
If an abnormality exists in the connection
of the outside air temperature sensor,
“−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) will appear on the display. If “−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) appears on the
display, contact your Toyota dealer.
There may be a case that “−−−_C”
(“−−−_F”) appears momentarily when the
ignition switch is quickly turned to “ON”.
It is normal if it goes out soon.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

399

07 04.26

—Outside temperature and
cruise information display
The outside temperature display and
cruise information display indicates the
following information.
Every time you push the “INFO” button,
the display toggles through this information.
1. Outside temperature
2. Average fuel consumption
3. Instantaneous fuel consumption
4. Driving range
5. Display off

XS10004e

The displayed values in the cruise information display indicate general driving
conditions. Accuracy varies with driving
habits and road conditions.
To set the unit, push the “SETUP US/M”
button until the desired unit display appears.
When the ignition switch is on, the last
previously used mode displayed just before the ignition switch is off will appear.

1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE _F”
or “OUTSIDE _C”)
The outside temperature display indicates
the outside air temperature.
The displayed temperature ranges from
−40_C (−40_F) up to 50_C (122_F).
If an abnormality exists in the connection
of the outside air temperature sensor,
“−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) will appear on the display. If “−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) appears on the
display, contact your Toyota dealer.
There may be a case that “−−−_C”
(“−−−_F”) appears momentarily when the
ignition switch is quickly turned to the
“ON” position. It is normal if it goes out
soon.
2. Average fuel consumption
MPG” or “AVG L/100 km”)

(“AVG

Average fuel consumption is calculated
and displayed based on total driving
distance and total fuel consumption
with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated about every 10 seconds.
To reset the calculation, push the
“SELECT RESET” button about 2 second.

400

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Clock
3. Instantaneous
fuel
consumption
(“INST MPG” or “INST L/100 km”)

4. Driving range
“RANGE km”)

The instantaneous fuel consumption is
calculated and displayed based on distance and fuel consumption at 20 revolutions of the engine.

The distance the vehicle can travel with
the remaining fuel is calculated and
displayed based on the quantity of remaining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The displayed value is updated for a short
time.

The driving range display indicates the
approximate distance that you can drive
until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is
different from the actual distance traveled.

An accurate figure may not be shown if
the vehicle is driving down a long slope,
and engine brake is applied. (The display
will indicate the extremely low fuel consumption.)
When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, “−−, −MPG” will be shown
on the display.
The calculation is reset when the ignition
switch is turned off.

(“RANGE

MI”

The displayed value is updated every time
the fuel equivalent for 1 mile or 1 km is
consumed.
Every time you refuel the vehicle, the calculation is reset.
The actual driving range varies with driving habits and road conditions. If fuel consumption is good, the driving range will be
longer than indicated. If fuel consumption
is poor, the driving range will be shorter
than indicated.
If the low fuel level warning light comes
on, refuel the vehicle even if the display
indicates that the vehicle can be driven
further.

XS10002

Type A (with cruise information)

XS10074

Type B (without cruise information)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

401

07 04.26

Intuitive parking assist
To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.
To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

The intuitive parking assist is designed
to inform you of the approximate distance between your vehicle and an obstruction by indicator and buzzer when
parking the vehicle. This system uses
sensors to detect obstructions.

Vehicle with cruise information only—
For quicker adjustment of the clock, hold
down “M” or “H” button continuously. This
allows faster advancement of the minutes
and hours while setting.

This system works when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position and the
transmission is not in the “P” position.

The ignition switch must be in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the time indication will be reduced.

402

Rear and rear corner sensors work only
when the transmission is in the “R” position.

XS10061a

Front corner sensors works when:

D Transmission is in the “R” position.
D Transmission is not in the “P” or “R”
position and vehicle speed is approximate 10 km/h (6 mph) or less.

1: Rear sensors
2: Rear corner sensors
3: Front corner sensors
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

In the following cases, the buzzer will
sound several times and the indicator
will stay on to indicate that the system
is not working properly.

XS10062a

Rear sensors

D When the temperature is extremely low.
D When any of the sensors are malfunction.

If the indicator is continuously on, have
your Toyota dealer check the system.

Rear corner sensors

If the indicator remains blinking but
you do not hear the buzzer sound,
clean the sensors with soft cloth.
To turn on: Push the switch.
The indicator comes on and the buzzer
will sound.

XS10064a

To turn off: Push the switch again.
Front corner sensors

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

403

07 04.26

This system is designed to inform you of
the approximate distance between your
vehicle and an obstacle by indicator and
buzzer.
Rear sensors
Distance shown as A in
mm (in.)

Indicator and
buzzer

Approximately
1800—1150 (70.9—45.7)

Intermittent

Approximately
1150—850 (45.7—33.5)

Fast
intermittent

Approximately
850 (33.5) or less

Continuous

Distance shown as C in
mm (in.)

Indicator and
buzzer

Approximately
600—400 (23.6—15.7)

Intermittent

Approximately
400—250 (15.7—9.8)

Fast
intermittent

Approximately
250 (9.8) or less

Continuous

approximately 400 mm (15.7 in.) of the
front corner sensor or approximately
850 mm (33.5 in.) of the rear sensor
(buzzer is sounding continuously) and
another obstacle is detected in the
same way at the other end of the vehicle, the buzzer sounds 3 times intermittently then sounds continuously and
it continues to sound approximately every 0.5 seconds.

How the buzzer sounds when obstacles
are simultaneously detected at the front
and rear of the vehicle.
The buzzer sounds as described below:

Rear corner sensors

D When an obstacle is detected within

Distance shown as B in
mm (in.)

Indicator and
buzzer

Approximately
850—520 (33.5—20.5)

Intermittent

Approximately
520—400 (20.5—15.7)

Fast
intermittent

Approximately
400 (15.7) or less

Continuous

404

D When an obstacle is detected within

Front corner sensors

approximately 400 mm (15.7 in.) of the
front corner sensor or approximately
850 mm (33.5 in.) of the rear sensor
(buzzer is sounding continuously) and
another obstacle is detected at the other end of the vehicle, the buzzer
sounds 7 times intermittently then
sounds continuously and it continues to
sound approximately every 1.5 seconds.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Perceptible area
A: Approximately
B: Approximately
C: Approximately

1800 mm (70.9 in.)
850 mm (33.5 in.)
600 mm (23.6 in.)

Perceptible area is limited as shown in
the previous illustration. Check the area
around the vehicle before driving and start
driving slowly.

XS10066b

The maximum detection distance of the
sensor varies depending on the size of
the obstacle, the sensor can detect a
large obstacle such as a wall, up to 1800
mm (70.9 in.) away. However, the detection distance of a thin obstacle such as a
pole is less than 1800 mm (70.9 in.).

CAUTION

D The intuitive parking assist is in-

tended as an aid to assist you to
park and is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Make your
driving decisions based on your observations.

D Do not attach accessories or other

objects to the vehicle within the
sensor perceptible area. Doing so
may cause the system to malfunction, which might result in an accident.

D In certain situations, the system

will not function properly and when
the vehicle approaches certain objects, the system will not detect
those objects. Therefore, always observe the area around the vehicle
and do not rely solely on the system.

1: Front corner sensors
2: Rear corner sensors
3: Rear sensors
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

405

07 04.26

For vehicles sold in Canada
This
ISM device
Canadian ICES−001.

compiles

with

In the following cases, the system may
not work properly.

The system may not detect the following.

D When ice, snow, mud or other objects

D Thin objects such as a wire or rope
D Objects with a surface area too small

build up on the sensor

D When the vehicle is parked in extreme-

ly high or extremely low temperature
for a long period

D When driving on bumpy or graveled
roads or on grass

D When a device such as a horn from
another vehicle, motorcycle engine, or
an air brake sound from a heavy−duty
vehicle, issues ultrasonic waves, near
your vehicle

D When attaching a two−way radio antenna

D When rain or water splashes on the
sensor

D When operating the vehicle on an inclined surface

D When a radio antenna or fender pole
is mounted on your vehicle

D When a towing hitch is mounted on

to reflect ultrasonic waves
wire gauze or fence

D Sound wave absorbing objects or material such as cotton or snow

D A person near the vehicle (depending
on the type of clothes worn)

D Objects with a sharp edge
D Small or short objects
D Tall objects with an upper part projecting toward the vehicle

D Objects just under the bumper
D Objects very close to your vehicle
D When the bumper is damaged
In the following cases, have
Toyota dealer check the system.

your

D When the bumper is damaged
D When the indicator is continuously on

your vehicle

D When a towing eyelet is mounted on
your vehicle

406

such as

D When the tail−gate is opened
D When the bumper is damaged
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Compass
The compass indicates the direction
that the vehicle is heading. In the
above case, it shows that the vehicle is
heading north.

XS10005a

The direction is indicated on the inside
rear view mirror.
If the ignition switch was turned off with
the system on, the system will automatically turn back on when the ignition switch
is turned on.
Push the “

” switch to turn the com-

pass system on and off.

Displays

Directions

N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW

North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest

The compass may not show the correct
direction in the following conditions:

D The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

D The compass does not adjust while the
vehicle is stopped.

D The vehicle is in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).

D The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a
magnet or a metal object on or near
the inside rear view mirror.)

D The battery has been disconnected.
If your vehicle is out of the set zone,
refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”
below to set the zone number.
If the deviation is small, the compass
works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion.
For additional precision or for complete
calibrating,
see
“CALIBRATING
THE
COMPASS” below.

D The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.

D The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

407

07 04.26

XS10006

The compass sensor is in the inside
rear view mirror.

NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object
on or near the inside rear view mirror
of the vehicle. Doing this may cause
malfunction of the compass sensor.

XS10007a

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation
calibration)
The direction display on the compass
deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
angle of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,
then push and hold the “

” switch until

the zone number appears on the display.
Then push the “

” switch, referring to

the following map to select the number of
the zone where the vehicle is.

408

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Samoa: 5

Guam: 8

Saipan: 8

After calibration, leaving the system for
several seconds returns it to the compass
mode.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

XS10008

Zone number
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

409

07 04.26

Perform circling calibration just after
you have purchased your Toyota. And
then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, replaced or disconnected.

XS10009a

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling
calibration)
Sometimes the direction display on the
compass may not change after a turn. To
rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and
hold the “

” switch until “CAL” appears

on the display.
If “CAL” appears on the display because
of a drastic change in the magnetic field,
perform circling calibration.

D Do not perform circling calibration of

LS10039

the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5
mph) or less. If there is not enough space
to drive in a circle, drive around the
block.
After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above
method, calibration is completed when the
direction is shown on the display.
If calibration cannot be performed because
of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your
vehicle to Toyota dealer.

D During calibration, do not operate elec-

tric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with
the calibration.

CAUTION

D When doing the circling calibration,

be sure to secure a wide space,
and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while
performing circling calibration.

D Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

410

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Cigarette lighter and ashtray
ASHTRAY
Type A—
To use the ashtray, open the lid. The
ashtray can be removed and used outside the vehicle.

XS10016

XS10076a

When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching
fire. After using the ashtray, close the lid
completely.
To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the
front cup holder as shown in the illustration.

Type B (bench seats)

Type B—
CIGARETTE LIGHTER

To use the ashtray, pull it out.

To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.
After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use.

When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching
fire. After using the ashtray, push it back
completely.

If the engine is not running, the ignition
switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position to use the lighter.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in.

To remove the ashtray, press down on the
lock spring plate and pull out.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or
equivalent for replacement.
Type A (separate seats)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

411

07 04.26

Power outlets (12 VDC)
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, always completely close
the ashtray after use.

XS10033a

Type A (instrument panel)

XS10032a

Type B (instrument panel)

412

XS10038c

Type C (under the seat cushion of the
front center seat)

XS10039c

Type D (back of the front center seatback)
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

The power outlets (12 VDC) are designed for power supply for car accessories.

NOTICE

XS10034

Type E (inside of the center console box)

XS10035a

Type F (back of the center console box)

XS10093

z To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of
12V/120W.

Type G (back of the front center seatback)

z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
z Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug that fits the outlet,
or allowing any liquid to get into
the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

XS10095

Type H (back of the center console box)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

413

07 04.26

Power outlet (115 VAC)
This power outlet (115 VAC) is designed
for use as a power supply for electric
appliances in the vehicle.

INFORMATION
Depending on operating time and current consumption, the power outlets
may not be used due to the electrical
component protection function. Please
start engine and use the power outlets again after turn off the ignition in
this case.

The key must be in the “ON” position for
the power outlet to be used.

XS10092

Type A (back of the front center seatback)

The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

XS10094

Type B (back of the center console box)

414

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.

NOTICE

XS10079

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the main
switch on the instrument panel.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the power outlet is ready for use.
Push the main switch once again to turn
the power outlet off. When the power outlet is not in use, make sure that the main
switch is turned off.

z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
z Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
anything other than an appropriate
plug that fits the outlet may cause
electrical failure or short circuits.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even
though their power consumption is under 115 VAC/100W. These appliances
may not operate properly.

D Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.

D Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measuring instruments, etc.

D Other appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

415

07 04.26

Glove boxes

Garage door opener
Upper glove box—
To open the glove box, push the button.

Indicator light

Lower glove box—
Open by pulling the lever.

XS10020a

Lock by inserting the master key and turning it clockwise.
Unlock by inserting the master key and
turning it counterclockwise.
On some model—With the tail lights are
on, glove box light will come on when the
globe box is open.

Upper glove box

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.

XS10019a

XS10011
Buttons
R
The garage door opener (
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLinkR and can
be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.

NOTICE
Upper glove box: During hot weather,
the interior of the vehicle becomes
very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.

Lower glove box

416

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

(a) Programming the HomeLinkR
HomeLinkR

The HomeLinkR in your vehicle has 3
buttons and you can store one program
for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the
HomeLinkR, install a new battery in the
hand−held transmitter prior to programming.
The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLinkR during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
in
“Programming
an
entrance
gate/Programming all devices in the
Canadian market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLinkR buttons
you want to program.

XS10012

25 to
75 mm
(1 to
3 in.)

XS10013

Hand−held
garage
transmitter

2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
the surface of the HomeLinkR.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLinkR
in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the
hand−held garage transmitter button
along with the selected HomeLinkR button.
Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4. When the indicator light on the
HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

417

07 04.26

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLinkR button to program
another device.
Programming a rolling code system

XS10014

5. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by
pressing the newly programmed button.
If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens
and closes.
If the garage door does not operate,
identify if your garage transmitter is of the
“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed
HomeLinkR
button.
The
garage door has the rolling code feature if
the indicator light (on the HomeLinkR)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2
seconds. If your garage transmitter is the
“Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code
system”.

418

If your device is “Rolling Code”
equipped, it is necessary to follow
steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLinkR” before
proceeding with the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage
door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door
opener manufacturer for the location of
this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds
in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLinkR button twice. The
garage door may open. If the door
does open, the programming process is
complete. If the door does not open,
press and release the button a third
time. This third press and release will
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener
motor
should
now
recognize
the
HomeLinkR unit and be able activate the
garage door up/down.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLinkR button to program
another rolling code system.
Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLinkR buttons you want to program.
2. Place
your
hand−held gate/device
transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
away
from
the
surface
of
the
HomeLinkR.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLinkR
in view while programming.
3. Press
and
hold
HomeLinkR button.

the

selected

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)
the hand−held gate/device transmitter
button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a rapid
flash after 20 seconds, you can release
both buttons.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

6. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by
pressing the newly programmed button.
Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLinkR button to program
another device.
Programming other devices

Refer to HomeLinkR on the internet at:
WWW.HOMELINK.COM

CAUTION

D When programming the HomeLinkR

XS10015

Universal Transceiver, you may be
operating a garage door or other
device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.

To program other devices such as home
security systems, home door locks or
lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLinkR buttons cannot be
erased, however, to reprogram a single
button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLinkR”.
(b) Operating the HomeLinkR
To operate the HomeLinkR, press the
appropriate HomeLinkR button to activate
the programmed device. The HomeLinkR
indicator light should come on. The
HomeLinkR continues to send the signal
for up to 20 seconds as long as the
button is pressed.

D Do not use this HomeLinkR Univer(c) Erasing
the
entire
HomeLinkR
memory (all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes
at one time, press and hold down the 2
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLinkR
memory.
For additional programming assistance
with
your
HomeLinkR
Universal
Transceiver call the:

D Toyota Customer Experience Center at

sal Transceiver with any garage
door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards.
(This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury or
death.

1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)

D Toyota Canada Customer Interaction
Centre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

419

07 04.26

Auxiliary boxes
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been
tested and complies with FCC and IC
rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
device.

To use the auxiliary boxes, open the
lids as shown in the following illustrations.

CAUTION

D To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the auxiliary box
closed while driving.

XS10088

D Type A only—As these holders are
designed for holding a light object
such as an eyeglass, do not place
any heavy objects in them. Heavy
objects may cause the holder to
open and contents to fly out resulting in injuries.

Type A (overhead console)

NOTICE
Type A only—During hot weather, the
interior of the vehicle becomes very
hot. Do not leave anything flammable
or deformable such as a lighter,
glasses, etc. inside.

XS10029a

Type B (front door)

420

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Sunglass holder

XS10040b

Type C (under the seat cushion of the
front center seat)

XS10049a

XS12021b

Type E (back of the front center seatback)

To use the holder, open the lid as shown
in the illustration.

CAUTION

D To reduce the chance of injury in

XS10041a

Type D (back of the front center seatback)

case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the holder closed
while driving.

D As this holder is designed for hold-

ing a light object such as an eyeglass, do not place any heavy objects in them. Heavy objects may
cause the holder to open and contents to fly out resulting in injuries.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

421

07 04.26

Card holder
NOTICE
During hot weather, the interior of the
vehicle becomes very hot. Do not
leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc.
inside.

XS10022a

Type A (overhead console)

XS10082a

XS10057b

Type B (overhead console)

422

Type C (back of the front center seatback)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Map holder
The card holder is designed for holding
cards, tickets, etc.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary box, console box or holder box closed while
driving.

XS10083a

Type D (center console box)

XS10084a

Type A (back of the front center seatback)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

423

07 04.26

The map holder is designed for holding
maps, magazines, etc.
Remove the lid.

Type C—
Remove the lid and stow it as shown in
the illustration.

CAUTION
Stow the lid

XS10085a

Type B (center console box)

424

To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary or console
box closed while driving.

XS10043a

Type C (center console)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Pen holder

Tissue pocket
The pen holder is designed for holding
pens, pencils, etc.

CAUTION

XS10050

Type A (back of the front center seatback)

Type B only—To reduce the chance of
injury in case of an accident or a
sudden stop, always keep the console
box closed while driving.

XS10045

XS10052

Type B (inside of the center console box)

Type A (back of the front center seatback)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

425

07 04.26

Center console box
The console box is equipped with a
tissue pocket on the inside of the auxiliary or console box lid.

Outside—

To use the tissue pocket:
1. Pull up the auxiliary or console box lid
while pushing the lock release lever.
2. Place a tissue pack in the pocket.

CAUTION

XS10046

To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary or console
box lid closed while driving.

Inside—

XS10075

Tray

Type B (center console box)

426

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Box

07 04.26

Outside—
To open or slide the console box lid, pull
up on the lock release lever.
Inside—
The tray slides forward or backward. The
tray and box can be removed.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

XS10055

XS10056a

hooks
Tray

Box

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

427

07 04.26

Front cup holders
Remove the tray and box as shown in the
illustration.
Hanging file folders can be hung on the
hooks when the tray and box are removed.

XS10026c

CAUTION
To reduce the chance on injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

XS10086a

Type B (front center seat)

The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely.
Type A only—
Cup holder is detachable. Replace it in its
original position when using the cup holder. The drink will not be held securely.

CAUTION

Type A (center console)

428

Do not place anything else other than
cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,
as such items may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Rear cup holders
(Double cab models)

Rear cup holders
(Crew Max models)
The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely.

CAUTION

XS10025a

Type A (back of the center console box)

Do not place anything else other than
cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,
as such items may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injured people in the vehicle during
sudden braking or in an accident.

XS10097

Rear center seat

The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely.
To use the holder, pull down the rear armrest as shown in the illustration.

XS10027a

CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than
cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,
as such items may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injured people in the vehicle during
sudden braking or in an accident.

Type B (back of the front center seatback)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

429

07 04.26

Bottle holders
The bottle holders are designed to hold
bottles securely.

XS10023

XS10031

Type A only—
The adapter for bottle holder is detachable. Replace it in its original position
when using the bottle holder. Otherwise
the drinks will not be held securely.

CAUTION

Type A (instrument panel)

Type C (rear door)

Do not attempt to use the holder for
any other purpose for which it was
intended. Inappropriately sized or
shaped objects may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during a
sudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

XS10030

Type B (front door)

430

XS10098

Do not put a cup or open bottle in
the bottle holder because the contents may spill when the door opens
or closes.

type D (rear door)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Storage box (on some Double
cab models)

—Removing the storage box
CAUTION

XS10071a

To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the storage box closed
and locked while driving.

XS10087

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the storage
box, avoid putting heavy loads on the
storage box lids.
Before using the box, lift up the rear
seats. (For detailed information, see
“—Raising rear seat cushion (Double
cab models)” on page 59 in Section
1−3.)

To remove the storage box:

To open the storage box, turn the
knobs “OPEN” direction indicated by
the arrow and open the lid as shown in
the illustration.

3. Remove the storage box.

1. Remove the storage box lids.
2. Remove the knobs by turning them
counterclockwise.

The storage box can be removed. For
detailed information, see “—Removing the
storage box” on page 431 in this Section.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

431

07 04.26

Seatback table (Regular cab
models)

Deck hooks
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the seat, avoid
putting heavy loads on the temporary
table.

XS13006

You should use the front passenger’s
seatback as a temporary table only when
the vehicle is stopped.
To use the seatback table, fold the seatback down. (For detailed information, see
“—Folding front passenger’s seat” on page
54 in Section 1−3.)

XS10070a

To secure your luggage, use the deck
hooks.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 464
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.

CAUTION
To avoid serious injury:

D Do not set up the seatback table
while the vehicle is moving.

D Do not sit on the seatback table.
432

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Grocery bag/cargo net hooks
(Crew Max models)
Grocery bag hooks

Floor mat
These hooks are designed to hang
things like grocery bags or cargo net.
Although the cargo net itself is not included as an original equipment, these
hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

XS10080

NOTICE
z To prevent damage to the hooks,
avoid hanging heavy loads on them
when using them as grocery bag
hooks.

XS10096

z To prevent damage to the hooks,
avoid hanging things other than a
cargo net on it when using them as
cargo net hooks.

Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have
two holes, then they are designed for use
with two locking clips. Attach the floor mat
to the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock
the clips into the holes in the vehicle
carpet.

Cargo net hooks

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

433

07 04.26

XS10081

CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the vehicle carpet and the
correct side face upward. If the floor
mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

434

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 2

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

18
21
22
27
30
33
34
35
39
39
41
43

07 04.26

Keys (without engine
immobilizer system)

XS12045

Keys (with engine immobilizer
system)

XS12046

XS12049

These keys work in every lock.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
of keys.

Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.

1. Master keys—These keys work in every lock.
2. Sub key—This key will not work in the
glove box and tailgate.
To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry a
spare key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

Your vehicle is supplied with the two
kinds of keys.
1. Master keys (black)—These keys work
in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will
need one of them to make a new key
with a built−in transponder chip.
2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not work
in the glove box and tailgate.
A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
system has been placed in the head of
the master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry a
spare key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle.

LS12040

LS12041

NOTICE
When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following
precautions:
z When starting the engine, do not
use the key with a key ring resting
on the key grip and do not press
the key ring against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts.

z When starting the engine, do not
use the key with other transponder
keys around (including keys of other vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts. If
this happens, remove the key once
and then insert it again after removing other transponder keys (including keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

z Do not cover the key grip with any
material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.

LS12042

z Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.
z Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard and hood
under direct sunlight.

LS12043

z Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
z Do not bend the key grip.

z Do not use the key with electromagnetic materials.

KEY NUMBER PLATE
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Engine immobilizer system
Inserting the registered key in the ignition
switch automatically cancels the system,
which enables the engine to start. The
indicator light will go off.
The system is maintenance−free.

LS12044

The engine immobilizer system is a
theft prevention system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head
transmits an electronic code to the vehicle. The engine will start only when
the electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered ID code for
the vehicle.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle
when you leave the vehicle.

XS12001

For your Toyota dealer to make you a
new key with built−in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key. However, there is a limit
to the number of additional keys your
Toyota dealer can make for you.

The system is automatically set when the
key is removed from the ignition switch.
The indicator light will start flashing to
show the system is set.
If any of the following indicator conditions
occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

D The indicator light stays on except

when the theft deterrent system is setting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent
system” on page 39 in this Section.)

If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

NOTICE
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or
modifications are made, proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

D The indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.

D The indicator light flashes inconsistently.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Wireless remote control—
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCCID:MOZRI−21BTY

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS−210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:

XS12030

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

1. “

” (lock) switch

2. “

” (unlock) switch

3. “

” (alarm) switch

The wireless remote control system is
designed to lock or unlock all doors or
activate the alarm from a distance within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.
When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Locking and unlocking
doors
The wireless remote control transmitter is
an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause
damage to the transmitter.

D Do not leave the transmitter in places

where the temperature becomes high
such as on the dashboard.

D Do not disassemble it.
D Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.

D Avoid putting it in water.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control transmitters for the same vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed
information.
If the wireless remote control transmitter
does not actuate the doors or alarm, or
operate from a normal distance:

D Check for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter.

D The battery may be depleted. Check

the battery in the transmitter. To
replace the battery, see “—Replacing
battery” on page 25.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
avoid the possibility of theft, or an
accident. (See “If you lose your wireless
remote control transmitter” on page 518 in
Section 4.)
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

XS12035a

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Locking operation

For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

XS12034a

Unlocking operation

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

To lock and unlock all doors, push the
switches of the transmitter slowly and
securely.
To lock: Push the “

” (lock) switch. All

the doors are locked simultaneously. At
this time one beep will be heard, and the
turn signal lights flash once.
Check to see that all the doors are securely locked after locking.
If any of the doors is not securely closed,
locking cannot be performed by the “ ”
(lock) switch and a beep will sound continuously for 10 seconds. However, if the
key is in the ignition switch, a beep will
not sound.
To stop the beep, close all the doors securely or push the “ ” (unlock) switch.
The beep and flashing turn signal lights
can be disabled. If your vehicle is
equipped with the multi−information display
(For
further
information,
see
“Multi−information display” on page 187 in
Section 1−6.), these can be changed by
yourself. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.

To unlock: Push the “

” (unlock) switch

once to unlock the driver’s door alone.
Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds
unlocks all the side doors and back door
simultaneously. Each time the “ ” (unlock) switch is pushed, two beeps will be
heard, and the turn signal lights flash
twice.
This double switch operation to unlock all
the doors can be changed to a single
switch operation. If your vehicle is
equipped with the multi−information display
(For
further
information,
see
“Multi−information display” on page 187 in
Section 1−6.), it can be changed by
yourself. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.

The time for automatic door lock function
can be changed. If your vehicle is
equipped with the multi−information display
(For
further
information,
see
“Multi−information display” on page 187 in
Section 1−6.), it can be changed by
yourself. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.
If the “

” (lock) or “

” (unlock) switch

is kept pressed in, the locking the unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the
switch and then push again.

When you unlock all the doors using the
wireless remote control, the Illuminated
entry system, interior lights, personal
lights and cargo lamp will be activated.
(For further information, see “Interior
lights” on page 170, “Personal lights” on
page 171, “Illuminated entry system” on
page 173 and “Cargo lamp” on page 174
in Section 1−5.)
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
doors will be automatically locked again.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Activating alarm

—Replacing battery
For replacement, use a CR2032 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

XS12036

Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed transmitter battery or
components.

LS12017

NOTICE
Holding the “
” (alarm) switch blows
the horn intermittently and flashes the
headlights, tail lights, turn signal lights,
interior light and personal lights.
” switch is used to deter vehicle
The “
theft when you witness anyone attempting
to break into or damage your vehicle.
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
alarm midway, push the “
” switch once
again, lock or unlock a door with transmitter, or turn the ignition switch from the
“LOCK” to “ON” position.

z When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the
transmitter case.

z Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Replace the transmitter battery by following these procedures:

The alarm does not work when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

z Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.

LS12018

z Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the transmitter battery and that dust or oils do not
adhere to the transmitter case.

LS12019

z Close the transmitter case securely.

2. Remove the circuit board, then remove
the discharged transmitter battery.

NOTICE
z Take care not to damage the circuit
board.
z Do not bend the terminals.

3. Put in a new transmitter battery with
positive (+) side up. Install the circuit
board into the transmitter case.

After replacing the battery, check that the
transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE
z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the transmitter battery are faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Side doors

XS12002

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.
To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.
Vehicles with power door lock system—
All the doors lock and unlock simultaneously with the driver’s door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the key once will
unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all the door simultaneously.

Vehicles with power door lock system—
When the interior light/personal light main
switch and cargo lamp switch is in the
“DOOR” position and the driver’s door is
unlocked using the key, the Illuminated
entry system, interior lights, personal
lights and cargo lamp will be activated.
(For further information, see “Interior
lights” on page 170, “Personal lights” on
page 171, “Illuminated entry system” on
page 173 and “Cargo lamp” on page 174
in Section 1−5.)
When the interior light/personal light main
switch and cargo lamp switch is in the
“DOOR” position and any of the doors is
opened, the light will come on. After all
the doors are closed, the light remains on
for about 15 seconds before fading out.
(For further information, see “Interior
lights” on page 170, “Personal lights” on
page 171, “Illuminated entry system” on
page 173 and “Cargo lamp” on page 174
in Section 1−5.)

XS12003

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
INSIDE LOCK KNOB

WITH

Move the lock knob.
To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.
The front doors can be opened by pulling
the inside handles even if the lock knobs
are in the locked position.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

CAUTION
Do not pull the inside handle of the
front doors while driving. The doors
will open and an accident may occur.
Toyota strongly recommends that all
children be placed in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Closing the door with the lock knob in the
lock position will also lock the door. Be
careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.
Vehicles with power door lock system—
The door will not lock if the key is left in
the ignition switch when closing the front
doors.

WITH

Push the switch.

XS12005a

To lock: Push the switch down on the
right side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on
the left side.
Operating the switch simultaneously locks
or unlocks all the doors.

Driver’s side

If you do either of the following, no door
can be unlocked with the power door lock
switch.

D Lock all the doors with the key or wireless remote control transmitter when all
the doors are closed.

D Open the driver’s door or front passen-

XS12006a

ger’s door and move the inside lock
knobs of both front doors to the lock
position, then close the doors.

The power door lock switch can be reset
in the following ways.

D Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.

D Unlock all the doors with the key or
wireless remote control transmitter.

Passenger’s side

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-

CAUTION

senger’s door with the inside lock
knob, and then unlock all the doors
with the power door lock switch.

Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

XS12007

REAR
DOOR
CHILD−PROTECTORS
(Double cab and Crew Max models)
Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
When the child−protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Automatic door locking and
unlocking functions

Power windows

Vehicles with power door lock system—

The windows can be operated with the
switch on either front door (Regular
cab models)/each door (Double cab and
Crew Max models).

Locking function—All doors are automatically locked when the vehicle speed goes
above about 20 km/h (12 mph).
Unlocking function—All doors are automatically unlocked when the selector lever is
moved to the “P” position with the engine
started.

The power windows work when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.

XS12051b

Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, they work for 43 seconds even
after the ignition switch is turned off. They
stop working when either front door is
opened.

The following functions can be changed:

D Shift position linked auto lock.
D Driver’s door open linked auto unlock.
If your vehicle is equipped with the multi−
information display (For further information, see “Multi−information display” on
page 187 in Section 1−6.), these can be
changed by yourself.

The indicator light (“AUTO”) on the switch
tells you the switch can be operated.

Regular cab models

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW
Use the switch on the driver’s door.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.

For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.

XS12009b

Double cab and Crew Max models

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Automatic operation (to open only):
Push the switch completely down and then
release it. The window will fully open. To
stop the window partway, lightly pull the
switch up and then release it.

XS12054

Regular cab models

Window
lock
switch

XS12052b

Driver’s door switch (Regular cab models)
Window
lock
switch

XS12053

Double cab and Crew Max models

XS12013b

Driver’s door switches (Double cab and
Crew Max models)
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

OPERATING
WINDOWS

THE

Use the switches
door (Regular cab
doors (Double cab
els) or the switch
that controls each

PASSENGERS’

on the passenger’s
models)/passenger’s
and Crew Max modon the driver’s door
passenger’s window.

The window moves as long as you hold
the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.

XS12023a

Passenger’s door switch
(Regular cab models)

If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passenger’s window
(Regular cab models)/passenger’s windows
(Double cab and Crew Max models) cannot be operated.

XS12024a

Passenger’s door switches (Double cab
and Crew Max models)
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Back window
(on some models)
CAUTION

D Be sure to remove the ignition key

To avoid death or serious personal
injury, you must do the following.

D Never leave anyone (particularly a

D Before you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the power
windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.

D When small children are in the ve-

when you leave your vehicle.

small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the power window switches and
get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

XS12043a

To open the rear window, push the lever and slide the window.
After closing the window, make sure it is
completely closed.

hicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Power back window
(Crew Max models)
D Never leave anyone (particularly a

CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.

D Before you close the power back

XS12057a

The back window can be operated with
the switch on the instrument panel.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON”
position.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
To open: Push the switch on the “
side.
To close: Push the switch on the “
side.

”
”

window, always make sure there is
nobody around the power back window. You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the power
back window, make sure he or she
operates the window safely.

small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the power back window switch
and get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

D Keep the back window closed while
driving. This not only keeps the
luggage from being thrown out but
also prevents exhaust gases from
entering the vehicle.

D When small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power
back window switch without supervision.

D Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Before removing the tailgate
(with rear view monitor
system only)

Tailgate—

CAUTION

XS12014

To open the tailgate, pull the handle up.
The support cables will hold the tailgate
horizontal.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 464
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
After closing the tailgate, try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely
locked.

Prior to removing the tailgate, disconnect the wire harnesses between the
rear view monitor system camera and
the vehicle. Failure to do so could
cause damage to the vehicle and may
result in personal injury.

XS12039c

These connector covers are used when
removing the tailgate, to prevent the wire
harness connectors from being contaminated. Store the connector covers in the
glove box in the plastic bag when not
using.
Connector cover A—Gray connector cover
Connector cover B—White connector cover

NOTICE
Avoid driving with the tailgate open.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Connector cover B

XS12031b

XS12040b

XS12048

Connector 2

1. To disconnect the wire harness connectors, press and hold the lock of the
connector 1 and pull apart. The connectors are located on the vehicle body
frame, behind the bumper.
Connector

Connector

1—Rear
view
monitor
system camera wire
harness
connector
(white)
2—Vehicle wire harness
connector (gray)

2. Attach the connector cover B (white) to
the connector 2.

3. Lower the tailgate. Remove the protector C located in the vehicle bed by
pressing the tabs and pulling the protector. Pull the wire harness D through
the hole.
C: Plastic wire protector
D: Rear view monitor system camera
wire harness

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Removal
Connector cover A

Support cable bracket

XS12042a
Connector 1

4. Attach the connector cover A (gray) to
the connector 1 (white).

XS12015b

XS12016a

1. Open the tailgate to the angle where
you can release the brackets on the
support cables from the lugs on
both sides.

2. Tilt the tailgate to about 45° from
vertical and pull up the right side of
the tailgate to unhook the right side.

Clip

To unhook the support cable bracket, keep
pulling up the clip on the bracket and
unhook the bracket.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

NOTICE
z Make sure the support brackets are
securely latched on both side panels when installing the tailgate.

XS12017a

z With rear view monitor system—
Store the removed tailgate with the
back−up camera lens facing upward.
Failure to do so could cause damage to the camera lens.

3. Tilt the tailgate up to about 15° open
and slide the tailgate a little to the
right to unhook the left side.
To attach the tailgate, follow the removal
procedure in reverse order.
After closing the tailgate, try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely
closed.
We recommend you keep
closed when not in use.

the

XS12047

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
Insert the master key into the keyhole
and turn it to lock or unlock the tailgate.
To lock: Turn the key clockwise.
To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

tailgate

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Hood

Theft deterrent system

XS12018a

To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The
hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood
is securely closed and locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may
occur.

XS12019b

XS12026a

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood.

The system sounds alarm and flashes
lights when forcible entry is detected.
The alarm is triggered if any of the
doors or hood is forcibly unlocked or
opened or the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected when
the vehicle is locked.

Before closing the hood, check to see that
you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. Then lower the hood and make sure
it locks into place. If necessary, press
down gently on the front edge to lock it.

On some models, the alarm also
sounds, when someone attempts to
break the side windows.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS12001

SETTING THE SYSTEM

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
position and remove it.

Activating the system

The indicator light will start flashing when
the key is removed from the ignition
switch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”
on page 21 in this Section for details.)
2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle.
3. Close and lock all the doors and hood.

Indicator light

XS12027a

The system will sound the alarm under
the following conditions:

D If any of the doors is unlocked or

opened without the key or wireless remote control transmitter, or if the hood
is forcibly opened

D If the battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected

The indicator light will remain on when all
the doors and hood are closed and
locked.

Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor—

The system will automatically be set after
30 seconds. When the system is set, the
indicator light will start flashing again.

The indicator light will come on when the
system is activated.

4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the vehicle.
Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.

D The side windows are tapped or broken.

If the alarm has been activated and the
key is not in the ignition switch, all the
doors will re−lock automatically.
After one minute, the alarm will automatically stop and the indicator light will start
flashing again.

Glass breakage sensor (on some models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Fuel tank cap
Reactivating the alarm

TESTING THE SYSTEM

Once set, the system automatically resets
the alarm after the alarm stops.

1. Open all the windows.

The alarm will activate again under the
same
circumstances
described
in
“Activating the system”.
Stopping the alarm
The alarm will be stopped by the following
two ways:

D Turn

the ignition switch
“LOCK” to “ON” position.

from

the

D Unlock any of the doors with the key
or wireless remote control transmitter.

These ways cancel the system at the
same time.

2. Set the system as described above.
The side doors should be locked with
the key or wireless remote control
transmitter. Be sure to wait until the
indicator light goes off or starts flashing.

XS12038c

3. Unlock any door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.
4. Stop the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other
doors and hood. When testing the
hood, also check that the system is
activated when the battery terminal is
disconnected and then reconnected.

This indicates that the fuel filler door
is on the left side of your vehicle.

If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Do not fill a fuel container in the

XS12020a

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
door toward out as shown.
When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

D Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames when refueling.
The fumes are flammable.

D When opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly removed.

bed under any circumstances. A
static electricity charge could cause
a spark and fire hazard. The proper
procedure is to place an approved
fuel container on the ground away
from the truck for filling.

XS12021a

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap slowly counterclockwise,
then pause slightly before removing
it. After removing the cap, hang it
on the cap hanger.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened.
When installing the cap, turn it clockwise until one click is heard, in order
to fully close it. The cap returns slightly when your hand is released from the
cap after closure, however this does
not cause any problems.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Electric moon roof (on some
Crew Max models)
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

CAUTION

D Make sure the cap is installed se-

To operate the moon roof, use the
switches on the overhead console.
The moon roof works when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.

XS12058a

curely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.

The sun shade can be opened or closed
by hand.
Sliding operation—
To open: Push and hold the “SLIDE”
switch for 1 second on the “ ” (rear)
side.

D Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.
Sliding operation

The roof will fully open automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push one of the
moon roof switches briefly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will open while the
switch is being pushed and stop when
released.

XS12059

Tilting operation

The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.
When the moon roof is opened fully, the
deflector will raise to reduce the entering
of the strong wind. The angle of the deflector will be adjusted according to the
vehicle speed.
To close: Push and hold the “SLIDE”
switch for 1 second on the “ ” (front)
side.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

The roof will fully close automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push one of the
moon roof switches briefly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will close while the
switch is being pushed and stop when
released.
Tilting operation—
To tilt up: Push and hold the “TILT” switch
for 1 second on the “UP” side.
The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push one of the
moon roof switches briefly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the
switch is being pushed and stop when
released.
To tilt down: Push and hold the “TILT”
switch for 1 second on the indented
(front) side.
The roof will fully tilt down automatically.
To stop the roof partway, push one of the
moon roof switches briefly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will tilt down while
the switch is being pushed and stop when
released.

Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, the moon roof works for about 43
seconds even after the ignition switch is
turned off. It stops working when either
door is opened.

Make sure that the moon roof opens and
closes automatically. If the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked
by your Toyota dealer.

Jam protection function:

D If something gets caught between the

moon roof and frame during slide closing operation, the moon roof stops and
opens, and the deflector stops and
raises fully.

D If something gets caught between the
moon roof and frame during tilting
down operation, the moon roof stops
and opens fully.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.
If the moon roof does not operate automatically or the jam protection function
does not operate correctly, you should
normalize the moon roof.
To normalize the moon roof, push and
hold the switch toward the “UP” (tilt up)
side or “ ” (sliding close) side. The
moon roof will tilt up and down, then release the switch.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE
The moon roof can be opened and closed
with the key operation in the driver’s door
keyhole.
To open: Turn the key fully backward and
hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the moon roof
begins to open. To stop in the middle,
return the key.
To close: Turn the key fully forward and
hold it.

XS12061

After the door is locked, the moon roof
begins to close. To stop in the middle,
return the key.

CAUTION
To avoid death or serious personal
injury, you must do the following.

D While the vehicle is moving, always

keep the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be killed or seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

D Before you close the moon roof,

always make sure there is nobody
around the moon roof. You must
also make sure nobody places his
or her head, hands and other parts
of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof,
first make sure it is safe to do so.

D Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

D Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the moon roof switch and get
trapped in the roof opening. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

D Never sit on top of the vehicle
around the roof opening.

D Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally, as it could result in death or serious injury.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught
just before the moon roof is fully
closed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 3

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Front seats—
—Front seat precautions

Seats
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback
upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

D Do not drive the vehicle unless the
occupants are properly seated. Do
not allow any passengers to sit on
top of a folded−down seatback, or
in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly
seated and/or not properly restrained by seat belts can be killed
or severely injured in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.

D During driving, do not allow any

passengers to stand up or move
around between seats. Otherwise,
death or severe injuries can occur
in the event of emergency braking
or a collision.

Driver seat

D Slightly recline the back of the
CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if
the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag
is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
in.) from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety.
This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your
breastbone. If you sit less than 250
mm (10 in.) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:

D Move your seat to the rear as far

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250
mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the
seat somewhat. If reclining the back
of your seat makes it hard to see
the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.

D If your steering wheel is adjustable,
tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.

as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Seat adjustment precautions
Front passenger seats

Front seats

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also
deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.

The SRS side airbags are installed in
the driver and front passenger seats.
Observe the following precautions.

D Do not adjust the seat while the

D Do not lean against the front door

when the vehicle is in use, since
the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
you may be killed or seriously injured.

D Do not use seat accessories which
cover the area where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.

D Do not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such change may prevent
the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system, or
cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

vehicle is moving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.

D After adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.

D After adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

D Do not put objects under the seats.

Otherwise, the objects may interfere
with the seat−lock mechanism or
unexpectedly push up the seat position adjusting lever and the seat
may suddenly move, causing the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Adjusting front seats
(manual seat)
D While adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and
injured.

XS13002a

XS13001b

Separate seats (Regular cab models)

Separate seats (Double cab and Crew Max
models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER
Hold the center of the lever and pull
it up. Then slide the seat to the desired position with slight body pressure and release the lever.
2. SEATBACK
LEVER

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.
3. DRIVER’S SEAT CUSHION
ADJUSTING KNOB

ANGLE

To change the angle of the seat
cushion on the front side, turn the
knob either way.

CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death
or personal injury.

XS13145b

4. DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING
LEVER
To change the height of the seat,
pull up or push down the lever.
5. DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT
ADJUSTING SWITCH
Push the switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will
change while the switch is pushed.

Bench seats (Regular cab models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

1. SIDE SEAT
LEVERS

POSITION

ADJUSTING

Hold the center of the lever and pull
it up. Then slide the seat to the desired position with slight body pressure and release the lever.
2. SIDE SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
LEVERS
Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.

XS13003f

3. CENTER SEAT SEATBACK
ADJUSTING LEVER

ANGLE

Pull the lever up. Then lean back to
the desired angle and release the
lever.
4. DRIVER’S SEAT CUSHION
ADJUSTING KNOB

ANGLE

To change the angle of the seat
cushion on the front side, turn the
knob either way.
5. DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING
LEVER
To change the height of the seat,
pull up or push down the lever.
Bench seats (Double cab and Crew Max
models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Adjusting front seats
(power seat)
1. DRIVER’S
SEAT
LEG
SUPPORT
ADJUSTING
SWITCH
(on
some
models)
Operating this switch raises
front edge of the seat cushion.

the

Push the switch on either side.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat
cushion at that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the
seat movement.

XS13097a

XS13147a

2. DRIVER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION,
SEAT HEIGHT AND SEAT CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH
PASSENGER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION
ADJUSTING SWITCH
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat
at that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the
seat movement.

Driver’s seat

Front passenger’s seat

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Folding front passenger’s
seat (Regular cab models)
3. SEATBACK
SWITCH

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback at that position.

XS13209

XS13160

BEFORE
FOLDING
PASSENGER’S SEAT

FRONT

1. Push the seat belt hanger down as
far as it will go when it is in the
raised position.

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes
through the hanger when folding the
front passenger’s seat.
This prevents the shoulder belt from being
damaged.

CAUTION
The seat belt must be removed from
the hanger when the seat belt is in
use.

Push the switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will
change while the switch is pushed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13004a

XS13005a

XS13006

1. Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever and raise the seatback to its upright position.

2. Pull the seatback folding lever and
fold the seatback down.

You should use the seatback as a temporary table only when the vehicle is
stopped.

CAUTION
To avoid death or serious injury:

D Do not set up the seatback table
while the vehicle is moving.

D Do not sit on the folded seatback.
D Make sure the front passenger’s

seat is securely locked in sliding
position when you set the seat as
a temporary table.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Driving position memory
system (on some models)
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the seat, avoid
putting heavy loads on the temporary
table.

This system can memorize the position
of the driver’s seat, the tilt and telescopic steering and outside rear view
mirrors, and recall them at the touch of
a button.
Buttons “1” and “2” can memorize two
separate positions.

XS13098a

SETTING THE DRIVING POSITION
The ignition switch must be in the “ON”
position and the selector lever is in the
“P” position.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, tilt and
telescopic steering and outside rear
view mirrors to the desired position.
2. While pushing the “SET” button,
push button “1” or “2” until a beep
in heard.
The system can memorize up to 2 positions by repeating the above steps. If step
2 is performed when both buttons “1” and
“2” are memorized, the previous position
will be erased and a new position will be
set.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

To reactivate the system, push the button
“1” or “2” again.

To make only slight changes to an already
memorized position, the easiest way is to
first activate the memorized position, then
make the desired changes and perform
step 2 above.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,
the memory will be erased and the positions will have to be set again.

XS13099a

CAUTION

D Do not start the vehicle while the
adjustment are being made.

D Take care not to select the wrong
RECALLING THE MEMORIZED POSITION
When you push button “1” or “2”, a
beep will sound and the driving position will be automatically adjusted to
the position recorded for that button.

button, or the seat could strike the
rear passenger or hit your body
against the steering wheel. If this
happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving
position memory switch, or depressing the brake pedal.

The memorized position can be recalled
under the following conditions:

D The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion and the selector lever is in the “P”
position.

D The key is not in the ignition switch

and less than 30 seconds have passed
since opening the driver’s door.

To stop the operation, push any driving
position memory button.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Rear seats—
—Rear seat precautions
CAUTION

D Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving.

D Be careful that the seat does not

—Adjusting rear seats
(Crew Max models)
D When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or
sudden stop:

D After adjusting the seat position, re-

Make sure the seatback is securely
locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.

D After adjusting the seatback, push

Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

hit a passenger or luggage.

D Be careful not to get your hands or
feet pinched in the seat.

lease the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

XS13158

Folding down the rear seatbacks will enlarge the luggage compartment. See
“—Stowage precautions” on page 464 in
Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Raising rear seat cushion
(Double cab models)
1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVERS
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
2. SEATBACK
LEVERS

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Pull the lever up. Then lean back to the
desired angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

D Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving.

D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.

D Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
passengers are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats. If you
are reclined, the lap belt may slide
past your hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or
your neck may contact the shoulder
belt. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined,
the greater the risk of death or serious injury.

D After adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.

D After adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

NOTICE

XS13146b

BEFORE RAISING REAR SEAT CUSHION
1. Stow the rear seat belt buckles as
shown in the illustration.
This prevents the seat belt buckles from
falling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE
The seat belt and buckles must be
stowed before you raise the rear
seats cushion.

Do not fold the rear seat seatback
forward with the luggage cover hooks
attached.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

NOTICE

XS13122

To prevent damage to the box under
the seat, do not sit on the box when
the bottom cushion is in the raised
position.

XS13007

CAUTION

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes
through the hanger when folding the
rear seat.
This prevents the shoulder belt from being
damaged.

CAUTION
The seat belt must be removed from
the hanger when the seat belt is in
use.

When returning seats to their original
position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent death or
serious injury in a collision or sudden stop:

3. Raising rear seat cushion.
Pull the lever on the side of the bottom
cushion and lift up the cushion until it
locks.
When returning the rear seat, pull the lever on the back of the bottom cushion
and pull the cushion downward until it
locks.
Folding down the rear seats will enlarge
the luggage compartment. See “—Stowage
precautions” on page 464 in Section 2 for
precautions when loading luggage.

D Make sure the bottom cushion is

securely locked by trying to pull up
the edge of the bottom cushion.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operation properly.

D Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught under the bottom
cushion and are arranged in their
proper position and are ready to
use.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Folding down rear seats
(Crew Max models)

XS13157

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEATS
1. Stow the rear seat belt buckles as
shown in the illustration.

XS13161

XS13159

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes
through the hanger when folding the
rear seat.

This prevents the seat belt buckles from
falling out when you fold the seatback.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being
damaged.

NOTICE

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the seat belt
buckles, the seat belt buckles must
be stowed before you fold the seatback.

The seat belt must be removed from
the hanger when the seat belt is in
use.

FOLDING DOWN REAR SEATS
Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever
to unlock the seatback and fold the
seatback down until it locks.

CAUTION
Be careful that the seat does not hit
a passenger or luggage.

NOTICE
Do not fold the rear seat seatback
forward with the luggage cover hooks
attached.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Head restraints
Folding down the rear seats will enlarge
the luggage compartment. See “—Stowage
precautions” on page 464 in Section 2 for
precautions when loading luggage.

CAUTION
When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent
death or serious injury in a collision
or sudden stop:

XS13008

D Make sure the seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.

D Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

Front separate seats

XS13152

Front separate seats (with seat heater)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13009

Rear center head restraint and front center head restraint (bench seats)—When an
occupant sits on the center position of the
rear seats (Double cab and Crew Max
models) or the front seats (bench seats),
always pull up the center head restraint to
the lock position.

XS13196

The head restraint is most effective when
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

CAUTION
Front bench seat

Rear seats (Crew Max models)

D Adjust the center of the head re-

For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving.
To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.

XS13010

Front separate seats (with seat heater)
only—
You can pull up or push down the head
restraint. You can also move the front
head restraint forward or backward. If
such adjustment is desired, pull or push
the base of the head restraint.

straint so that it is closest to the
top of your ears.

D After adjusting the head restraint,
make sure it is locked in position.

D Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Rear seats (Double cab models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Armrest (Crew Max models)

Seat heaters
CAUTION

XS13207

Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because it
may make them feel too hot or cause
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for;

XS13100c

D Babies, small children, elderly per-

sons, sick persons or persons with
physical disabilities

To use the armrest, pull it down as
shown in the illustrations.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest,
avoid putting heavy loads on it.

To turn on the seat heater, move the
dial upward (“L” dial for the left front
seat or “R” dial for the right front
seat). At this time, the indicator light
will illuminate to indicate the seat heater is operating.
Move the dial upward or downward to adjust to the desired temperature.

D Persons who have sensitive skin
D Persons who are exhausted
D Persons who have taken alcohol or

drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat from overheating,
do not use the seat heater with a
blanket, cushion, or other insulating
objects which cover the seat.

To turn it off, move the dial downward
until it stops.
When the seat heater is not in use, move
the dial fully downward.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON”
position to operate seat heaters.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
NOTICE
z Do not put unevenly weighed objects on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
z When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.). They may damage the heater
and seat surface.
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, turn the switch off
when the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase
the chance of injury and/or the severity of
injury in accidents.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle
are designed for people of adult size,
large enough to properly wear them.

Do not allow any children to stand up or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An
unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or
a collision. Also, do not let the child sit
on your lap. Holding a child in your arms
does not provide sufficient restraint.

Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”
on page 114 in this Section for details.
REGULAR CAB MODELS—
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the seat
and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt.
DOUBLE
CAB
AND
CREW
MAX
MODELS—
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips and not on the
waist.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Fastening front and rear
seat belts
CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats
properly wearing their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer serious bodily injury or
death in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe
the following:

D Use the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt for
two or more people—even children.

D Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
driver and the front passenger are
sitting up straight and well back in
the seats. If you are reclined, the
lap belt may slide past your hips
and apply restraint forces directly
to the abdomen or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt. In the
event of a frontal collision, the
more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or serious injury.

D Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or side doors.

D Inspect the belt system periodically.

Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.

XS13012a

D Keep the belts clean and dry. If

they need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into
contact with the belts—they may
severely weaken the belts. (See
“Cleaning the interior” on page 524
in Section 5.)

D Replace the belt assembly (includ-

ing bolts) if it has been used in a
severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.

USING FRONT SEAT BELT HANGERS
(Regular cab models)
Raise the front seat belt hanger until it
locks before you fasten the front seat
belt.
You will hear a click when the seat belt
hanger locks in raised position.

CAUTION
Make sure the seat belt hanger is
secured in the raised position before
you fasten the seat belt. If it is not,
the seat belt may not work properly.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13125

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see “Child
restraint” on page 114 in this Section.) To
free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.

Tab

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit
straight and well back in the seat.
fasten your belt, pull it out of the
tractor and insert the tab into
buckle.

up
To
rethe

You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts
to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a
sudden stop or on impact. It also may
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend, and you can move around freely.

Take up
slack

XS13126

Too high

Keep as low on
hips as possible

Adjust the position
shoulder belts.

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the

Position the lap belt as low as
on your hips—not on your waist,
just it to a snug fit by pulling the
portion upward through the latch

lap and
possible
then adshoulder
plate.

the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

D Both high−positioned lap belts and

Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in a collision.

loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on hips as possible.

XS13011

D Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
anchor (Double cab and Crew Max
models)—
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.
To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
After adjustment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Stowing the rear seat belt
buckles (Double cab and Crew
Max models)
The rear seat belt buckles
stowed when not in use.

can

Seat belt buckles must be stowed before
you fold the seatback.

XS13124

To release the belt, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to
retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

XS13146b

Double cab models

XS13157

Crew Max models

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer so
that the dealer can order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the
heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length.
Additional ordering information is available
at your Toyota dealer.

D Make sure the passenger airbag on−

XS13127

CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender,
observe the following precautions.
Failure to follow these instructions
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt restraint system in case of
an accident, increasing the chance of
death or serious injury.

D Remember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one originally intended.

D If the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without the driver actually
wearing the seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that
the driver is wearing it. In this
case, the driver’s airbag may not
activate correctly, causing death or
serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt
with the seat belt extender.

off indicator light indicates “ON”
when using the seat belt extender
for the front passenger seat. If the
indicator light indicates “OFF”, disconnect the extender tongue from
the seat belt buckle, then reconnect
the seat belt. Reconnect the seat
belt extender after making sure the
indicator light indicates “ON”. If
you use the seat belt extender
while the indicator light indicates
“OFF”, the front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the front passenger side may not activate correctly, which could cause death or
serious injury in the event of collision.

D Do not use the seat belt extender
if it is not absolutely necessary.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

As far as the seat belt extender on the
front passenger side is concerned, do not
fail to disconnect the extender from the
seat belt after the above operation in order to activate the front passenger airbag
correctly when getting into the vehicle
next time.

D Do not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.

XS13128

When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure
To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Seat belt pretensioners

XS13020

The driver and front passenger seat
belt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in response to a severe frontal impact. On vehicles equipped with
curtain shield airbags, the pretensioners
are also activated during vehicle roll
over.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner will not activate if no passenger is
detected in the front passenger seat by
the front passenger occupant classification
system. However, the front passenger’s
seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put on the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 104 in this
Section.)
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions.

XS13132a

The seat belt pretensioners will not operate in a vehicle rollover if the “RSCA
OFF” indicator light is on. For details, see
“—Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch” on page 113 in this Section.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal
impact or a vehicle roll over, the front
seat belts are quickly drawn back by the
retractors so that the belts snugly restrain
the occupants.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

8. SRS warning light
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled
by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag
sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

XS13139

When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard
and a small amount of non−toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally
harmless.

The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the following components
and their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
3. Front passenger occupant classification
ECU
4. Load sensor
5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
6. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

7. Airbag sensor assembly

belt

buckle

Once the seat belt pretensioners have
been activated, the seat belt retractors
remain locked.

CAUTION

D Do not modify or change the sus-

pension system. Such changes may
cause the driver airbag, front passenger airbag, seat belt pretensioners and curtain shield airbags to
inflate accidentally, which could result in death or serious injury.

D Do not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recommended size. Such a use may cause
the driver airbag, front passenger
airbag, seat belt pretensioners and
curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, which could result in
death or serious injury. For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 551 in Section 7−2.

D Do not modify, remove, strike or

open the seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to
follow these instructions may prevent the seat belt pretensioners
from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result
in death or serious injury. Consult
your Toyota dealer about any repair
and modification.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat
belt buckle switch,
front passenger
occupant classification system∗, passenger
airbag off switch, passenger airbag on−off
indicator light, seat belt pretensioner
assemblies,
inflators,
“RSCA
OFF”
indicator light, interconnecting wiring and
power sources. (For details, see “Service
reminder indicators and warning buzzers”
on page 197 in Section 1−6.)

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.

XS13135a

z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Repairs on or near the front seat
belt pretensioner assemblies
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or console

This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the seat belt pretensioners
are operating properly.

∗:

The front passenger occupant classification system includes the front passenger
occupant classification ECU, load sensor,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch.
If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SRS airbags—
—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag (Regular cab
models)

D If any seat belt does not retract or can
not be pulled out due to a malfunction
or activation of the relevant seat belt
pretensioner.

D The seat belt pretensioner assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged.

XS13121

XS13130a

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

D Either seat belt pretensioner assembly

or surrounding area is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and right front passenger in addition to
the primary safety protection provided
by the seat belts.
Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor
vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag system controls airbag deployment
power for the driver and right front passenger. The driver airbag system consists
of the driver seat’s position sensor etc.
The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Vehicles with bench seats—The SRS airbags are designed to protect the driver
and right front passenger and they are not
designed to protect an occupant in the
front center seating position.
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work with the seat
belts to help reduce injury by inflating.
The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s
head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle interior.
The SRS front passenger airbag will not
activate if there is no passenger sitting in
the right front passenger seat. However,
the front passenger airbag may deploy if
luggage is put in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 104 in this
Section.)
Always wear your seat belt properly.

D Improperly seated and/or restrained

CAUTION

D The SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the
primary protection of the driver and
front passenger seat belt systems.
The driver and front passenger can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat
belts” on page 65 in this Section.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

D Do not turn off the passenger air-

XS13153

bag off switch except when a member of a passenger risk group identified in TABLE 1 is occupying the
right front passenger seating position.

D When
Indicator light

The
passenger
airbag
system
is
equipped with a off switch and indicator light. Turning the passenger airbag
off switch clockwise to the “AUTO”
position makes the front passenger airbag system operational. To disable the
front passenger airbag system, turn the
off switch counterclockwise to the
“OFF” position and remove the key. The
“OFF” indicator light on the passenger
airbag off switch will come on when
the front passenger airbag system has
been disabled.

the passenger airbag off
switch is turned off, the front passenger airbag will not inflate in a
collision and turning off the front
passenger airbag can reduce the
occupant protection which your vehicle safety systems can provide to
you in certain accidents and increase the likelihood of death or
serious injuries.

See “—Passenger airbag off switch” on
page 85 in this Section for detail.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

TABLE 1: A PASSENGER RISK GROUP
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the front seat because:

D Vehicle has no rear seat;
D Vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear−facing infant seat;
or

D The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician,

makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because:

D Vehicle has no rear seat:
D Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible,
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of vehicle; or

D The child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician,

makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which according to his
or her physician:

D Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger: and
D Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the
potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if
belted, to hit the dashboard, or windshield in a crash.

For more detailed information concerning about the passenger risk group, please
contact NHTSA at 1−888−327−4236 or Transport Canada at 1−800−333−0371.

The SRS front airbags are designed to
deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold
level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and seat
belt pretensioners may not activate together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Collision from the rear

XS13118

Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard surface

Falling into or
jumping over a
deep hole

XS13110

XS13141a

Collision from the side
Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generally
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may
occur.

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consists
mainly of the following components, and
their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
3. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4. Passenger airbag off switch
5. Front passenger occupant classification
ECU
6. Load sensor
7. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

8. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

buckle

07 04.26

9. Driver’s seat position sensor
10. Airbag sensor assembly
11. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
12. SRS warning light
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the
forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an
impact results in a forward deceleration
beyond the designed threshold level, the
system triggers the airbag inflators. At this
time a chemical reaction in the inflators
very quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward motion
of the occupants. The front airbags then
quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver’s vision should it be
necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it
may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
are usually in the nature of minor burns
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s
hands, arms, chest or head is in close
proximity to the airbag module at the time
of deployment. This is why it is important
for the occupant to: avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the
occupant and the airbag module; sit
straight and well back into the seat; wear
the available seat belt properly; and sit as
far as possible from the airbag module,
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel or
dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured.
Toyota strongly recommends that:

D The driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see
“—Front seat precautions” on page
48 in this Section.

CAUTION
A member of a passenger risk group
should never sit or be occupied in
the right front passenger seat with
airbag off switch in the “AUTO” position. (For details, see “—SRS driver
airbag and front passenger airbag” on
page 75 in this Section.)

D The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.

D All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.

D If the seat belt extender has been

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13018

D Do not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when
the vehicle is in use, since the
front passenger airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates,
can be killed or seriously injured.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt
properly.

XS13019

XS13022b

D Toyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and be
properly restrained.

D Do not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the seat. For instructions
concerning the installation of a
child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 114 in this Section.

D Do not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the
dashboard or steering wheel pad
that houses the front airbag system. They might restrict inflation or
cause death or serious injury as
they are projected rearward by the
force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Do not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, dashboard
near the front passenger airbag,
front passenger airbag cover, front
passenger airbag or airbag sensor
assembly. Doing so may prevent the
front airbag system from activating
correctly, cause sudden activation
of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or
serious injury.

D Do not modify or change the sus-

D Do not use tires or wheels other

Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with a physical disability,
consult your Toyota dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS
front airbags operation.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system in some cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel, front passenger’s seat or
dashboard near the front passenger
airbag

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13135a

This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the SRS airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensors, driver’s seat position sensor,
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front
passenger occupant classification system∗,
passenger airbag off switch, passenger
airbag on−off indicator light, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, “RSCA
OFF” indicator light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see
“Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.)

The SRS warning light will come on and
passenger airbag on−off indicator light will
indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in
the front passenger occupant classification
system.

∗: The front passenger occupant classification system includes the front passenger
occupant classification ECU, load sensor
and front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch.
If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Passenger airbag off switch
(Regular cab models)
Operate off switch as follows:
Insert key into the keyhole.

XS13134a

To turn the front passenger airbag
on—Turn the key clockwise to the “AUTO”
position. At this time, the indicator light
condition
varies
depending
on
the
occupant in the right front passenger seat.
(For details, see “—Front passenger
occupant classification system” on page
104 in this Section.)

XS13153
Indicator light

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D The SRS airbags have been inflated.
D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS airbags to inflate.

D The pad section of the steering wheel

or
front passenger
airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

This off switch is designed to disable
the front passenger airbag in order to
allow usage, if necessary, of a member
of a passenger risk group identified in
TABLE 1 is occupying the right front
passenger seating position. (For details,
see “—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag” on page 75 in this
Section.)

To turn the front passenger airbag
off—Turn the key counterclockwise to the
“OFF” position and remove it. At this time,
the “OFF” indicator light comes on. If the
key is removed at any other position than
“OFF”, the switch will automatically return
to the “AUTO” position.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag
(Double cab and Crew Max models)

D When

XS13034g

XS13131

For details, see “—SRS driver airbag
and front passenger airbag” on page
75 in this Section.
The SRS warning light and the passenger airbag on−off indicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction
in the passenger airbag off switch.

CAUTION

D Do not turn off the passenger air-

bag off switch except when a member of a passenger risk group identified in TABLE 1 is occupying the
right front passenger seating position.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor
vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag system controls airbag deployment
power for the driver and front passenger.
The driver airbag system consists of the
driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front
passenger’s airbag system consists of the
front passenger occupant classification
sensor etc.
Vehicles with bench seats—The SRS airbags are designed to protect the driver
and right front passenger, and they are
not designed to protect an occupant in the
front center seating position.
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work with the seat
belts to help reduce injury by inflating.
The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s
head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will not
activate if there is no passenger sitting in
the right front passenger seat. However,
the front passenger airbag may deploy if
luggage is put in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 109 in this
Section.)
Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

D The SRS front airbag system is de-

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed
or
seriously
injured
by
the
deploying airbags. An infant or
child who is too small to use a seat
belt should be properly secured
using a child restraint system.
Toyota strongly recommends that all
infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and
properly restrained. The rear seat is
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint
system, see “Child restraint” on
page 114 in this Section.

The SRS front airbags are designed to
deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold
level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.

Collision from the
rear

XS13119
Collision
the side

from
Vehicle rollover

Always wear your seat belts properly.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

8. Driver’s seat position sensor
9. Airbag sensor assembly
Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard surface

Falling into or
jumping over a
deep hole

XS13111

10. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
11. SRS warning light

XS13104a

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consists
mainly of the following components, and
their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
3. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4. Front passenger occupant classification
ECU
5. Load sensor
6. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

buckle

7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the
forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an
impact results in a forward deceleration
beyond the designed threshold level, the
system triggers the airbag inflators. At this
time a chemical reaction in the inflators
very quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward motion
of the occupants. The front airbags then
quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver’s vision should it be
necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel or
dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured.
Toyota strongly recommends that:

For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see
“—Front seat precautions” on page
48 in this Section.

D The driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.

D The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.

D All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.

D If the seat belt extender has been

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13018

D Do not sit on the edge of the seat

XS13019

XS13022b

D Toyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and be
properly restrained.

D Do not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 114 in this Section.

D Do not put anything or any part of

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Do not modify or remove any wir-

D Do not modify or change the sus-

D Do not use tires or wheels other

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS front airbag system in some
cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel, front passenger’s seat or
dashboard near the front passenger
airbag

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

∗: The front passenger occupant classification system includes the front passenger
occupant classification ECU, load sensor
and front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch.

XS13135a

This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the SRS front airbags are
operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat
belt buckle switch,
front passenger
occupant classification system∗, passenger
airbag on−off indicator light, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, “RSCA
OFF” indicator light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see
“Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.)

If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
D The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.
The SRS warning light will come on and
passenger airbag on−off indicator light will
indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in
the front passenger occupant classification
system.

XS13133a

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D The SRS front airbags have been inflated.

D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.

D The pad section of the steering wheel

or
front passenger
airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags
In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags in the impacted side work with the
seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side airbags help reduce
injuries mainly to the driver’s or right front
passenger’s chest. The SRS curtain shield
airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s and all window−side passenger’s
head and help prevent them from being
thrown out of the vehicle.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

XS13102

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver and all window−side passengers in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by
the seat belts.

The SRS side airbag on the passenger
seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the right front passenger
seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put
in the seat. (As for the front passenger
occupant
classification
system,
see
“—Front passenger occupant classification
system” on page 109 in this Section.)
The SRS curtain shield airbag on the passenger side are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat or rear outside
seat.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Roll sensing function:
In response to a vehicle rollover, the curtain shield airbags on both sides work
with the seat belts to help reduce injury
by inflating. The curtain shield airbags
help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,
all window−side passenger’s head and
help prevent them from being thrown out
of the vehicle. (This function can be
turned off if inflation is not desired. See
“—Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch” on page 113 in this Section.)
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not
activated.
Always wear your seat belt properly.

D Do not allow anyone to lean his/her

CAUTION

D The SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver, right
front passenger and rear outside
passenger seat belt systems. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passenger
in the vehicle must wear their seat
belts properly. Wearing a seat belt
properly during an accident reduces
the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 65 in
this Section.

head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof
side rail from which the SRS side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
deploy even if he/she is a child
seated in the child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the occupant.

D Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page
114 in this Section.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13113

Collision from the rear

XS13115

XS13116

Collision from the front
Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are not generally
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed side collision.

The angle of
vehicle tip−up
is marginal

Skidding vehicle
hitting a curb
stone

The SRS curtain shield airbags may inflate if the angle of vehicle tip−up is
marginal or if the skidding vehicle’s
tires hit a curb stone laterally as shown
in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side.
The curtain shield airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side or vehicle rollover.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Collision from
the front

XS13109

Collision from the
rear

Pitch end over end

The SRS curtain shield airbags are not
generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if
it is involved in a low−speed side collision.

Hitting a curb, edge
of pavement or
hard surface

Falling into or
jumping over
a deep hole

XS13111

XS13105c

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
may deploy if a serious impact occurs
to the underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustration.

Regular cab models

XS13107c

Double cab models

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
8. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

buckle

9. Airbag sensor assembly

XS13165

Crew Max models

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
1. SRS warning light
2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
3. Curtain shield airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)

10. Curtain shield airbag sensors
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly.
In a severe side impact, the side and
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain
shield airbag inflators. At this time a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help
restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.
In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor
assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag
inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction
in the inflators quickly fills the airbags
with non−toxic gas to help restrain the
lateral motion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke
and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or
abrasions and swelling.
Front seats as well as parts of the front
and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be
hot for several minutes, but the airbags
themselves will not be hot. The airbags
are designed to inflate only once.

4. Front passenger occupant classification
ECU
5. Load sensor
6. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags
inflate with considerable
force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and
rear outside passengers must:

XS13031

XS13132a

D Wear their seat belts properly.
D Remain properly seated with their

backs upright and against the seats
at all times.

Improper sitting and wearing of the
seat belts may not retain you inside
the vehicle.

D Do not allow anyone to lean against

the door when the vehicle is in use,
since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have
a small child in the vehicle.

D Make

sure
the
“RSCA
OFF”
indicator light is off. The curtain
shield airbags will not inflate in a
vehicle rollover if this indicator
light is on and you may be killed or
seriously injured. For details, see
“—Roll sensing of curtain shield
airbags off switch” on page 113 in
this Section.

D Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag, and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side
rail with a curtain shield airbag.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13030

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her

head closer to the area where the
side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

100

XS13033

XS13035

D Do not allow anyone to kneel on

the passenger seat, facing the passenger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her

head or hands out of windows
since the curtain shield airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Do not hook a hanger, heavy or

XS13023

sharp pointed objects on the coat
hook. If the curtain shield airbag
inflates, those items will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. When you hang clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly.

XS13024

D Do not use seat accessories which
D Do not attach a cup holder or any
other device or object on or around
the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other
device or object will be thrown with
great force or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in
death or serious injury. Likewise,
the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

D Do not attach a microphone or any

other device or object around the
area where the curtain shield airbag
activates such as on the windshield
glass, side door glass, front and
rear pillars, roof side rail and assist
grips. When the curtain shield airbags inflate, the microphone or other device or object will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbags may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.

cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.

D Do not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such changes may prevent
the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

101

07 04.26

D Do not disassemble or repair the
front and rear pillars and roof side
rail containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable
the system or cause the curtain
shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

D Do not modify or change the sus-

D Do not use tires or wheels other

Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.

102

If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with a physical disability,
consult your Toyota dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS
side airbags and curtain shield airbags operation.

XS13135a

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system in some cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player

This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags are operating
properly.

z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment
z Repairs made on or near the console or front seat

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system∗, passenger airbag
off switch, passenger airbag on−off indicator light, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, “RSCA OFF” indicator light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 197 in
Section 1−6.)
∗:

The front passenger occupant classification system includes the front passenger
occupant classification ECU, load sensor
and front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch.

The SRS warning light will come on and
passenger airbag on−off indicator light will
indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in
the front passenger occupant classification
system.

XS13137

If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

103

07 04.26

—Front passenger occupant
classification system (Regular
cab models)
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated.

D The portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.

D The surface of the seats with the side
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

D The portion of the front pillars, rear

pillars or headlining (padding) containing the curtain shield airbag inside
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front
passenger occupant classification system. The system detects conditions
1—4 (Shown in the table on page 106)
Based on these conditions, the systems
below are activated or deactivated:

D Front passenger airbag
D Side airbag on the right front passenger seat

D Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

The system monitors the weight and
load on the right front passenger seat,
and the seat belt buckle switch to determine conditions 1—4.
In order to ensure that the system detects the conditions correctly:

D Do not place a heavy load on the right
front passenger seat or the seatback
table, etc.

D Do not attach a commercial seatback

table or other heavy item to the back
of the right front passenger seat.

D Do not apply pressure to the right front

passenger seat by resting hands or
legs on the seatback.

104

XS13025a

The passenger airbag on−off indicator
light indicates the actuation of the front
passenger airbag, side airbag on the
front passenger seat and front passenger seat belt pretensioner.
The passenger airbag on−off indicator
light will indicate “ON” and “OFF”
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position. After about four seconds, it will go off. After that, the front
passenger occupant classification system operates and judges whether to indicate “ON” or “OFF”.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

The indicator light will indicate “OFF”
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position with the condition 2 in the table
shown below.
If the front passenger occupant classification system determines that a person of
adult size sits in the front passenger seat
but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, one
of the following is likely to have occurred:

D Objects are placed under the front passenger seat.

D The front passenger seatback is in

4. Ask the front passenger to adjust the
seatback to the upright position and to
sit up straight on the center of the seat
cushion, with his/her legs comfortably
extended forward.
5. Turn the ignition on, having the passenger remain in that position until the
passenger airbag on−off indicator light
indicates “ON”.

XS13034g

If the “OFF” indicator remains illuminated,
move the right front passenger seat fully
rearward.

contact with the back wall.

To ensure that the system correctly detects the presence or absence of a person
of adult size sitting in the right front passenger seat, make sure that none of the
above occur.
Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illuminated when a person of adult size is
seated in the right front passenger seat.
If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, follow
the procedure below:

The SRS warning light will come on
and the passenger airbag on−off indicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is
a malfunction in the front passenger
occupant classification system. Contact
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Make sure the airbag off switch is set
to the “AUTO” position.
3. Make sure the right front passenger
seat belt is worn correctly.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

105

07 04.26

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Indicator/warning light
Condition detected by
the front passenger
occupant classification
system∗1

1. Adult∗2
2. Child∗3 or child
restraint system∗4
3. Unoccupied
4. There is a
malfunction in the
system
∗1 :

Passenger
airbag off
switch
position

Passenger
airbag
on−off
indicator
light

“AUTO”

“ON”

“OFF”

Devices

SRS
warning
light

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
reminder
light

Off

Flashing∗5

“OFF”∗6

Off

Flashing∗5

Deactivated

“AUTO”

Not
illuminated

Off

Deactivated

“OFF”

“OFF”
On

Off

Deactivated

“AUTO”
“OFF”

“OFF”

Front
passenger
airbag

Side airbag
on the right
front
passenger
seat

Activated
Deactivated

Curtain
shield
airbag in
the front
passenger
side

Front
passenger’s
seat
belt
pretensioner

Activated
Activated

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

The right front passenger on the bench seat

∗2 :

The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗3 :

When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

106

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

∗4 :

Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 114 in this Section as for installing the
child restraint system.)

∗5 :

In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 114 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

∗6 :

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

107

07 04.26

CAUTION
To avoid potential death or serious
injury when the front passenger occupant classification system does not
detect the conditions correctly, observe the following.

D Make sure the passenger airbag on−
off indicator light indicates “ON”
when using the seat belt extender
for the front passenger seat. If the
indicator light indicates “OFF”, disconnect the extender tongue from
the seat belt buckle, then reconnect
the seat belt. Reconnect the seat
belt extender after making sure the
indicator light indicates “ON”. If
you use the seat belt extender
while the indicator light indicates
“OFF”, the front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the front passenger side may not activate correctly, which could cause death or
serious injury in the event of collision.

108

D Do not recline the front passenger
seatback
backwall.
indicator
indicates
bags will
a severe
touches
seatback
does not

so far that it touches a
This may cause the “OFF”
to be illuminated, which
that the passenger’s airnot deploy in the event of
accident. If the seatback
the backwall, return the
to a position where it
touch the backwall.

Keep the front passenger seatback
as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

D If an adult sits in the front passen-

ger seat, the passenger airbag on−
off indicator light should indicate
“ON”. If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat,
feet on the floor and with the seat
belt worn correctly. If the “OFF”
indicator still remains illuminated,
move the front passenger seat fully
rearward.

D Wear the seat belt properly.
D Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt tab has not been left inserted in the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger
seat.

D Do not place a heavy load on the
front passenger seat, etc.

D Do not apply pressure to the front
passenger seat by resting hands or
legs on the seatback.

D Do not put objects under the front
passenger seat.

D Do not attach any heavy items to
the back of the front passenger
seat.

D When it is unavoidable to install the
forward−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the
proper order. (As for the installation
order, see “—Installation with seat
belt” on page 117 in this Section.)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Front passenger occupant
classification system
(Double cab and Crew Max models)

D Do not modify or remove the front
seats.

D Do not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe impact.
Otherwise, the SRS warning light
may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this
case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

The passenger airbag on−off indicator light
may indicate “ON” (the front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger seat may deploy) even if
observing the above cautions, when a
child sits in, or a forward−facing child
restraint system is installed on the front
passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions
in “—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag” on page 75, “—SRS
side airbags and curtain shield airbags” on
page 94 and “Child restraint” on page 114
in this Section.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front
passenger occupant classification system. The system detects conditions
1—4 (Shown in the table on page 111)
Based on these conditions, the systems
below are activated or deactivated:

D Front passenger airbag
D Side airbag on the right front passen-

XS13025a

ger seat

D Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

The system monitors the weight and
load on the right front passenger seat,
and the seat belt buckle switch to determine conditions 1—4.
In order to ensure the system detects
the conditions correctly:

D Do not place a heavy load on the right
front passenger seat or the seatback
table, etc.

D Do not attach a commercial seatback

table or other heavy item to the back
of the right front passenger seat.

D Do not apply pressure to the right front

passenger seat by resting hands or
legs on the seatback.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

109

07 04.26

The indicator light will indicate “OFF”
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position with the condition 2 in the table
shown below.
If the front passenger occupant classification system determines that a person of
adult size sits in the right front passenger
seat but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated,
one of the following is likely to have occurred:

D A rear passenger lifts the front passen-

Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illuminated when a person of adult size is
seated in the right front passenger seat.
If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask
the passenger to sit up straight, well back
in the seat, and with the seat belt worn
correctly. If the “OFF” indicator remains
illuminated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat, or if that is not
possible, move the right front passenger
seat fully rearward.

XS13034g

ger seat cushion with their legs.

D Objects are placed under the front passenger seat.

D The front passenger seatback is in
contact with the rear seat.

To ensure that the system correctly detects the presence or absence of a person
of adult size sitting in the right front passenger seat, make sure that none of the
above occur.

110

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Indicator/warning light
Condition detected by
the front passenger
occupant classification
system∗1
1. Adult∗2
2.

Child∗3

or child
restraint system∗4

3. Unoccupied
4. There is a
malfunction in the
system

Devices
Side airbag
on the right
front
passenger
seat

Passenger
airbag on−off
indicator light

SRS warning
light

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
reminder light

“ON”

Off

Flashing∗5

“OFF”∗6

Off

Flashing∗5

Deactivated

Not
illuminated

Off

Deactivated

“OFF”

Off

Deactivated

Front
passenger
airbag

Curtain shield
airbag in the
front
passenger
side

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
pretensioner

Activated
Activated
Activated

Deactivated
Activated

∗1 :

The right front passenger on the bench seat.

∗2 :

The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗3 :

When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗4 :

Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 114 in this Section as for installing the
child restraint system.)

∗5 :

In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

∗6 :

In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 114 as for installing the child restraint system properly.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

111

07 04.26

CAUTION
To avoid potential death or serious
injury when the front passenger occupant classification system does not
detect the conditions correctly, observe the following.

112

D Do not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a
rear seat. This may cause the
“OFF” indicator to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the
event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat return the seatback to a position
where it does not touches the rear
seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback
as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

D If an adult sits in the front passen-

D Wear the seat belt properly.
D Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt tab has not been left inserted in the buckle before someone sits in the right front passenger seat.

D Do not place a heavy load on the
front passenger seat or the seatback table, etc.

D Do not apply pressure to the front
passenger seat by resting hands or
legs on the seatback.

D Do not let a rear passenger lift the
front passenger seat with their feet
or press on the seatback with their
legs.

D Do not put objects under the front
passenger seat.

D Do not attach a commercial seat-

back table or other heavy item to
the back of the right front passenger seat.

D Child restraint systems installed on

the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off switch
D When it is unavoidable to install the
forward−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on
the right front passenger seat in
the proper order. (As for the installation order, see “—Installation with
seat belt” on page 127 in this Section.)

D Do not modify or remove the front
seats.

The passenger airbag on−off indicator light
may indicate “ON” (the front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger seat may deploy) even if
observing the above cautions, when a
child sits in, or a forward−facing child
restraint system is installed on the front
passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions
in “—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag” on page 86, “—SRS
side airbags and curtain shield airbags” on
page 94 and “Child restraint” on page 114.

XS13029

D Do not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe impact.
Otherwise, the SRS warning light
may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this
case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

The roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)
can turn off the curtain shield airbags
and seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle
rollover. This switch should only be
used if inflation is not desired (such as
extreme off−road driving).

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

113

07 04.26

Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
When you push the “RSCA OFF” switch
for a few seconds with the ignition switch
on, the “RSCA OFF” indicator light comes
on and the roll sensing function is turned
off. When you push the switch again, the
indicator light goes off and the roll sensing function is turned on. (For details
about the roll sensing function, see
“—SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags” on page 94 in this Section.)
In a severe side impact, the curtain shield
airbags on impacted side will inflate even
if the roll sensing function is turned off.
(For details about the curtain shield airbags, see “—SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags” on page 94 in this Section.)
In a severe frontal impact, the seat belt
pretensioners will work even if the roll
sensing function is turned off. (For details
about the seat belt pretensioners, see
“—Seat belt pretensioners” on page 72 in
this Section.)
If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or
“LOCK” with the roll sensing function off
and then the ignition switch is turned back
to “ON”, the roll sensing function will turn
back on automatically.

114

CAUTION

D Before normal driving, make sure
the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is
off.

D When the roll sensing function is
turned off (and the “RSCA OFF”
indicator light is on), the curtain
shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners will not work in a vehicle
rollover. Turning off the curtain
shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners reduces occupant protection
which your vehicle safety systems
can provide in accidents and increase the likelihood of death or
serious injuries.

Toyota strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for
children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.
and Canada now require the use of a
child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on
page 65 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

D For effective protection in automo-

bile accidents and sudden stops, a
child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint
system depending on the age and
size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Regular cab models—

Toyota strongly urges use of a
proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child.
Double cab and Crew Max models—
Toyota strongly urges use of a
proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.

D Regular cab models—

Never put infant or child age 1 to
12 in a passenger risk group on the
right front passenger seat with the
passenger airbag off switch in the
“AUTO” position. In the event of an
accident, the force of the rapid
inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

If you must put infant or child age
1 to 12 in a passenger risk group
on the right front seat, make sure
that the passenger airbag off switch
is in the “OFF” position with the
key removed and that the indicator
light is on. (For details, see “—SRS
driver airbag and front passenger
airbag” on page 75 in this Section.)

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passenger seat even if the passenger airbag on−off indicator light indicates
“OFF”. In the event of an accident,
the impact of the rapid inflation of
the front passenger airbag could
cause death or serious injury to the
child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.

D A forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the passenger
airbag on−off indicator light indicates “OFF”, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable
speed
and
force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.

D Do not allow the child to lean his/

her head or any part of his/her
body against the door or the area
of the seat, front or rear pillar or
roof side rail from which the side
airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the
impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

115

07 04.26

—Types of child restraint
system

—Child restraint system
D Do not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.

D Make sure you have complied with

all installation instructions provided
by the child restraint manufacturer
and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly,
it may cause death or serious injury
to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
carefully consult the manufacturer’s
instructions which accompany the child
restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child
restraint system following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer. General directions are also
provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be
installed in the rear seat if your vehicle
is equipped with rear seats. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.

Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on
page 138 or 141 in this Section.
The child restraint lower anchorages
approved for your vehicle may also be
used. See “—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages” on page 146 or
148 in this Section.

When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

116

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Installation with seat belt
(Regular cab models)

XS13028

(A) Infant seat

XS13027

XS13036

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.

XS13026

(B) Convertible seat

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

117

07 04.26

CAUTION

D If you must install a rear−facing

XS13154

child restraint system on the right
front passenger seat, make sure
that the front passenger airbag off
switch is in the “OFF” position with
the key removed and that the indicator light is on.

XS13156

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the center front
seat.

CAUTION
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat with the passenger airbag off
switch in the “AUTO” position. In the
event of an accident, the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear−facing
child restraint system is installed on
the front passenger seat.

118

When you install a rear−facing child restraint system which belongs to a passenger risk group on the right front
passenger seat, turn the passenger airbag off switch counterclockwise to the
“OFF” position and remove the key.
(For details, see “—SRS driver airbag
and front passenger airbag” on page 75
in this Section.)
The indicator light comes on when the
system is off.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

Same angle
Same position

XS13150a

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

XS13039

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
D Bench seat: In order to firmly se-

cure the child restraint system to
the right front passenger seat, align
the seatback angle and seat position of the right front passenger
seat to match the center front passenger seat. Otherwise, it could
cause death or injury in a collision.

To install the infant seat:
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

119

07 04.26

XS13040

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.

120

XS13041

3. While pressing
against the seat
let the shoulder
it will go to hold
ly.

XS13042

the infant seat firmly
cushion and seatback,
belt retract as far as
the infant seat secure-

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13044

To remove the infant seat:
Press the buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or older child passenger.

XS13067

XS13155

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the child’s age and size of
the child. When installing, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions about the
applicable age and size of the child as
well as directions for installing the
child restraint system.

CAUTION
Rear−facing child restraint system:
Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat with the passenger airbag off
switch in the “AUTO” position. In the
event of an accident, the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear−facing
child restraint system is installed on
the front passenger seat.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

121

07 04.26

XS13156

CAUTION

D If you must install a rear−facing

Forward−facing child restraint system:
A
forward−facing
child
restraint
system which belongs to a passenger
risk group should never be installed
on the right front passenger seat with
the passenger airbag off switch in the
“AUTO” position, because the force
of the deploying airbag could cause
death or serious injury to the child in
forward seating position. (For details,
see “—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag” on page 75 in this
Section.)

child restraint system on the right
front passenger seat, make sure
that the passenger airbag off switch
is in the “OFF” position with the
key removed and that the indicator
light is on.

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the center front
seat.

122

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

Same angle

D After inserting the tab, make sure

Same position

XS13151

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

XS13047

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
D Bench seat: In order to firmly se-

cure the child restraint system to
the center front passenger seat,
align the seatback angle and seat
position of the right front passenger seat to match the center front
passenger seat. If the child restraint
system cannot be firmly secured,
install it onto the right front passenger seat. Otherwise, it could
cause death or injury in a collision.

D Bench seat: If the child restraint

system installed on the center front
passenger seat interferes with the
driver, install it onto the right front
passenger seat.

To install the forward−facing convertible
seat:
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

For instructions concerning the installation
of the rear−facing convertible seat, see
“(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION” on
page 117.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

123

07 04.26

XS13048

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

124

XS13049

XS13050

3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

XS13051

To remove the convertible seat:
Press the buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or older child passenger.

XS13052

A
forward−facing
child
restraint
system which belongs to a passenger
risk group should never be installed
on the right front passenger seat with
the passenger airbag off switch in the
“AUTO” position, because the force
of the deploying airbag could cause
death or serious injury to the child in
forward seating position. (For details,
see “—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag” on page 75 in this
Section.)

A booster seat must be used in forward−facing position only.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

125

07 04.26

D If the seat belt does not function

CAUTION

D Always make sure the shoulder belt

XS13053

is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from child’s neck, but
not falling off child’s shoulder.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

D Both high−positioned lap belts and
To install the booster seat:
Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the
lap and shoulder belt through or around
the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the tab into the
buckle taking care not to twist the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly
across the child’s shoulder and that the
lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on
page 65 in this Section for details.

126

loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on a child’s hips as possible.

D For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Installation with seat belt
(Double cab and Crew Max
models)

XS13051

To remove the booster seat:
Press the buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract.

XS13054

XS13055

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.

CAUTION

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passenger seat even if the passenger airbag on−off indicator light indicates
“OFF”. In the event of an accident,
the force of the rapid inflation of
the front passenger airbag could
cause death or serious injury to the
child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

127

07 04.26

Same angle
Same position

XS13056

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant, may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

D If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.
Child
restraint
system
installed on the rear seat should
not contact the front seatbacks.

128

XS13193

XS13057

D Crew Max models: When installing

a child restraint system in the rear
seat center position, adjust both
seat cushions to the same position
and align both seatbacks at the
same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely
restrained and this may cause death
or serious injuries in a collision.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

XS13058

XS13059

the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly
against the seat cushion and seatback,
let the shoulder belt retract as far as
it will go to hold the infant seat securely.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

129

07 04.26

XS13060

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

130

XS13061

XS13062

To remove the infant seat:
Press the buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or older child passenger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions about the
applicable age and size of the child as
well as directions for installing the
child restraint system.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Install the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a
front passenger occupant classification
system. In order to activate the occupant
classification system correctly, install the
forward−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the following
order:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Move the right front passenger seat to
the rearward position.
3. When it is unavoidable, put the child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat without putting your weight on the
front passenger seat.
4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat
belt buckle.
5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended. To hold the seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.
7. Put a child on the child restraint system and secure the child, complying
with the instructions provided by the
child restraint system manufacturer.
The passenger airbag on−off indicator light
should indicate “OFF” when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position and the
child is in the child restraint system after
following these procedures. The “OFF” indicator indicates the SRS front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the passenger
side will not deploy. if the indicator light
indicates “ON”, do the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. When reinstalling a child restraint system, make sure the seatback does not
press the child restraint system into
the seat cushion. If this occurs, adjust
the seatback angle slightly.
4. Then make sure the head restraint is
not pressing the child restraint system
into the seat cushion. If this occurs,
raise the head restraint.
5. Turn the ignition on again.
The passenger airbag on−off indicator light
should indicate “OFF”. If the indicator light
still indicates “ON” when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, then
the SRS front passenger airbag and side
airbag on the passenger side may deploy
in an accident. Do not drive the vehicle
in this condition. Remove the child restraint system and contact your Toyota
dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

131

07 04.26

CAUTION

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger
seat when unavoidable. If you must
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, put the
seat in its most rearward position,
and install the forward−facing child
restraint system in the proper order. Otherwise, the front passenger
occupant classification system can
not detect the presence of the child
restraint system and the front passenger airbag and side airbag on
the front passenger seat could
deploy, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

132

XS13063

XS13064
Move seat
fully back

D A forward−facing child restraint sys-

CAUTION

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Do not allow the child to lean his/

Same angle
Same position

XS13065

XS13194

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupants may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

D If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.
Child
restraint
system
installed on the rear seat should
not contact the front seatbacks.

D Crew Max models: When installing

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

133

07 04.26

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

XS13066

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

XS13068

the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
To install the forward−facing convertible
seat:
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

For instructions concerning the installation
of the rear−facing convertible seat, see
“(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION” on
page 127.

134

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS13069

3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

XS13070

XS13071

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

To remove the convertible seat:
Press the buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or older child passenger.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

135

07 04.26

D Do not allow the child to lean his/

XS13072

XS13073
Move seat
fully back

CAUTION

D A forward−facing child restraint sys-

136

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

Same angle

D Always make sure the shoulder belt

Same position

XS13195

XS13074

D Both high−positioned lap belts and
D Crew Max models: When installing

To install the booster seat:
Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the
lap and shoulder belt through or around
the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the tab into the
buckle taking care not to twist the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly
across the child’s shoulder and that the
lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on
page 65 in this Section for details.

D For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

137

07 04.26

—Using a top strap
(Regular cab models)
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

XS13071

XS13075

To remove the booster seat:
Press the buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract.

138

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Symbol mark

Use the anchor bracket on the back panel
to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
passenger seating position.

XS13076a

This symbol indicates the locations of the
anchor brackets.

XS13077

Anchor brackets
Bench seats

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
1. Remove
straint.

the

passenger

head

re-

Anchor
bracket

XS13144a

Symbol mark

Separate seats

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

139

07 04.26

XS13078

2. Lightly push down on the top surface of the anchor bracket cover,
then pull it forward to remove.

140

XS13079

XS13080

3. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.

4. Replace
straint.

the

passenger

head

re-

Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.

Store any removed covers in a safe place
such as the glove box.

For instructions on installing the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 114 in this Section.

Be sure to replace all covers when the
anchor bracket is not in use.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Using a top strap
(Double cab models)
CAUTION

D When returning the seatback to its

original position, make sure the
seatback is securely locked by
pushing forward and rearward on
the top of the seatback.

XS13082a

XS13084a

D Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child
restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Right position

Left position

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

XS13083a

Center position

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

141

07 04.26

Inner anchor
strap ring(s)

XS13085d

XS13087b

XS13086a

Strap or
routing device

Use the strap or routing device and the
inner anchor strap rings to attach the top
strap.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

2. Pull up the strap.

1. Raise the head restraints.

Anchor strap ring are installed for each
rear seating position.

142

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Routing
device

Inner anchor
strap ring

XS13088b

XS13089b

3. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.

4. Latch the hook onto the inner anchor strap ring and tighten the top
strap.

Route the top strap through the
routing device as shown in the illustration.

XS13090b

5. Lower the head restraints.
For instructions on installing the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 114 in this Section.

CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
6. If two child seats will be installed,
use the outboard seating positions.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

143

07 04.26

—Using a top strap
(Crew Max models)
Anchor brackets

XS13197

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

XS13198

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the rear
seat seatbacks to secure the top strap.

XS13199

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
1. Remove the head restraint.

Anchor brackets are installed for each
seating position of the rear seat.
This symbol indicates the locations of
user ready anchor brackets.

144

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

D When returning the seatback to its

XS13200

original position, make sure the
seatback is securely locked by
pushing forward and rearward on
the top of the seatback. Failure to
do so will prevent the seat belt
from operating properly.

XS13210

D Make sure the top strap is securely

2. Open the anchor bracket cover with
the symbol as shown in the illustration.

3. Pull the seatback release lever and
swing the seatback forward slightly,
then latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket. Return the seatback to its
original position.

latched, and check that the child
restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt and tighten the top
strap.
For instructions on installing the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 114 in this Section.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

145

07 04.26

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages
(Regular cab models)

1st lock
position

XS13202

4. Replace the head restraint.
5. If two child seats will be installed,
use the outboard seating positions.

XS13143

XS13091

12th lock
position

Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems complying with the FMVSS225
or
CMVSS210.2
specifications
are
installed in the front seat.
The anchorages are installed in the gap
between the seat cushion and seatback of
the right side of the seat as shown in the
illustration.
Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.

146

CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION

SYSTEM

1. Fold down the seatback and back to
the 1st lock position until it locks
into place. Adjust the seatback to
the 12th lock position.
Make sure the seatback is locked securely.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

2. Widen the slits of the seat cushion
slightly and confirm the position of
the lower anchorages near the button on the seat cushion.
3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.
For owners in Canada—The symbol on
a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

XS13092e

XS13093e

If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 138 in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

Canada only
Type A

Canada only
Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

147

07 04.26

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages
(Double cab models)
CAUTION

D When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.

XS13094

D Push and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

D After securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the
seat.

XS13095

Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems complying with the FMVSS225
or
CMVSS210.2
specifications
are
installed in the rear seat.
The anchorages are installed in the gap
between the seat cushion and seatback of
both outside rear seats as shown in the
illustration.
Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.

Canada only
Type A

148

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION

SYSTEM

1. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the button on the
seatback.

D When using the lower anchorages

2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.

D Push and pull the child restraint

Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.

XS13096

CAUTION
for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.
system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

For owners in Canada—The symbol on
a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

D After securing the child restraint

If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 141 in this Section.)

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

system, never lift up the seat cushion.

tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

Canada only
Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

149

07 04.26

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages
(Crew Max models)
3rd lock
position

XS13203

1st lock
position

XS13206

CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION

XS13204

SYSTEM

1. Fold down the seatback and back to
the 1st lock position (most upright
position) until it locks into place.
Adjust the seatback to the 3rd lock
position.
Make sure the seatback is locked securely.

Canada only
Type A

150

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

2. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the button on the
seatback.
3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.

XS13205

For owners in Canada—The symbol on
a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 144 in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

D When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.

D Push and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

D When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, ensure that the seat is moved to the
rear−most position, with the seatback close to the child restraint
system.

D After securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the
seat.

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

Canada only
Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

151

07 04.26

152

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 4

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors

Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

154
154
155
156
159
160
161
161

153

07 04.26

Tilt and telescopic steering
wheel

Tilt steering wheel
CAUTION

D Do not adjust the steering wheel

XS14002

while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

XS14001

D After adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.

To change the steering wheel angle,
hold the steering wheel, push down the
lock release lever, tilt the steering
wheel to the desired angle and return
the lever to its original position.

154

To adjust the steering wheel position,
push down the lock release lever. Then
tilt the steering wheel to the desired
angle, push or pull it to the desired
steering column length and pull up the
lock release lever.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Power tilt and telescopic
steering wheel
CAUTION

D Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

XS14003

XS14004

D After adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.
ADJUSTMENT
TILT

STEERING

WHEEL

ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN

To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel,
push the control switch upward or
downward to set it to the desired position.

To adjust the steering column length,
push the control switch forward or
backward to set the steering wheel to
the desired position.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is moving. Doing so
may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

When the ignition key is removed, the
steering column moves forward away from
the driver and also tilts up for easy exit
and entry.
When the key is inserted into the ignition
switch, the steering column returns to the
previously set position.
This feature can be set inoperative. Ask
your Toyota dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

155

07 04.26

Outside rear view mirrors—
Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering column
while the vehicle is moving. Doing so
may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

XS14005

Normal type

XS14021

Extend type only—Each mirror is divided
into two and has two different curvatures.
The lower part of the mirror offers a wider
field of vision than the upper part. Distances will therefore appear to be different
in the lower and upper part of the mirrors.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.
On some models, when you push the
outside rear view mirror defogger switch,
the heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror
surface. (See “Outside rear view mirror
defogger” on page 177 in Section 1−5.)

Extend type

156

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Power rear view mirror
control
To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

CAUTION

1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
be adjusted
Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”
(right).

D Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious injuries.

XS14006a

D On some models, since the mirror

2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direction.
Mirrors can be adjusted when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the defogger switch is
on.

Vehicles with the driving position memory
system—The position of the outside rear
view mirrors and driver’s seat can be
memorized. For details, see “Driving
position memory system” on page 56 in
Section 1−3.

Type A

NOTICE

XS14007a

If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
the mirror.

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

157

07 04.26

—Folding rear view mirrors
The rear view mirrors can be folded
backward for parking in compact areas.
To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.

XS14008

FOLDING MIRRORS (type B only)

XS14009

Normal type

To fold mirrors for parking in restricted
areas, push the mirror folding button.

with

mirror

folding

If the ignition switch is turned from
“LOCK” to “ACC” the mirror will move automatically according to the position of the
mirror folding button.
If folding button is not fully depressed, the
mirror may come out of its normal position. If this happens, depress the button
again to return it to the normal position.

XS14023a

Do not drive with the mirrors folded
backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.

CAUTION
To avoid personal injury and any mirror malfunction, do not touch the mirror while it is moving.
Extend type

158

button

CAUTION

The ignition switch must be in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Position 1—To fold the mirrors
Position 2—To return the mirrors back to
their original positions

Vehicles
only—

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Extending rear view mirrors

Anti−glare inside rear view
mirror
CAUTION

XS14022

The mirrors can be slid outward to improve visibility around wide trailers.

Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. It may cause the
driver to mishandle the vehicle and
an accident may occur resulting in
death or serious injuries.

XS14010

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.
Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

159

07 04.26

Auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror
In automatic function mode, if the mirror
detects light from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected
light.

XS14011

To turn off and on the automatic function,
push the “

” switch.

XS14012

Adjust it before driving so that the rear
view is in the best condition.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
This mirror is equipped with auto anti−
glare function. The function is designed
to reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving.

When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take a little longer for the mirror to
darken in response to the detection of
headlights.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of anti−
glare mirror sensors located on both
sides of the mirror, do not touch or
cover the sensors with your finger or
a piece of cloth, etc.

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the inside rear view mirror always turns on in the automatic function
mode.
The indicator illuminates to show you that
the function is on.

160

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Sun visors

XS14013

To block out glare, move the sun visor.
To block out glare from the front—Swing
down the sun visor (position 1).
To block out glare from the side—Swing
down the sun visor, remove it from the
hook and swing it to the lateral side (position 2).
If glare comes from obliquely behind you,
slide the sun visor backward (to position
3).

Vanity mirrors

XS14014

XS14015

On some models: To block the glare from
the front when the main sun visor is
swung to the lateral side (position 2),
swing down the sub visor.

Type A

CAUTION
Do not extend the plate at the end of
the sun visor when the visor is in the
position 1. It can cover the anti−glare
inside rear view mirror and obstruct
the rear view.

XS14016

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

161

07 04.26

To use the vanity mirror, swing down
the sun visor and open the cover.
Vanity lights (type B only)—
The lights come on when you open the
cover.
To adjust the brightness of the lights, slide
the switch.

162

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 5

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights and Wipers

Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior foot lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirror defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

164
169
169
170
170
171
173
174
175
176
177
178

163

07 04.26

Headlights and turn signals
(without automatic light
control system)
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

LS15028a

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights
For Canada—The tail light indicator (green
light) on the instrument panel will tell you
that the tail lights are on.
Position
above

For the U.S.A.

2—Headlights

and

all

the

If you are going to park for over one
week, make sure the headlight switch is
off.
The timing for the headlights turning off
can be changed. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

For the U.S.A.—The headlight low beam
indicator light (green light) on the instrument panel will tell you that the low
beams are on.
Automatic light cut off system

LS15027

To turn them on again, turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position or actuate the
headlight switch.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.

The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when all the doors are closed
with the ignition switch in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position and the lever at position
2.
The lights also automatically turn off when
the driver’s door is opened with the lever
at position 1.
If the doors are locked by the wireless
remote control transmitter, the lights automatically turn off immediately.

For Canada

164

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Daytime running light (DRL) system (on
some models)
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
can make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day. The
DRL system can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be
especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset.

LS15025a

LS15026a

The DRL system will make your front turn
signal lights come on when:

D The ignition switch is on with the engine running.

D The knob is in the “OFF” position or
position 1.

D The parking brake is released.
To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob
to position 2, flashing the high beam
headlights or turn the ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.

TURN SIGNALS

The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”
position.

Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”.

To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.

The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

165

07 04.26

Headlights and turn signals
(with automatic light control
system)
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

XS15019b

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights

However, the brightness of the instrument
cluster, air conditioning controls indicator
lights and passenger airbag on−off indicator light will not be reduced in daytime
even when the tail lights/headlights are
turned on.

For Canada—The tail light indicator lights
up in the instrument cluster.
Position
above

2—Headlights

and

all

the

For the U.S.A.—The headlight indicator
lights up in the instrument cluster.
For the U.S.A.

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all
of the lights in position 1
They automatically turn on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings.

XS15010b

Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.
When the tail lights/headlights are turned
on, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control knob is turned
fully upward.

For Canada

166

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Automatic light cut off system
Position 1 or position 3 with the tail
lights on—

XS15011

The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
switch in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on—
The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when all the doors are closed
with the ignition switch in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.

The automatic light control sensor is on
the top of the driver’s side instrument
panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
If you feel that the automatic light control
comes into operation too early or too late,
have the sensor adjusted by your Toyota
dealer.

If the lock switch of the wireless remote
control transmitter is pushed when all the
doors are already locked, the lights automatically turn off immediately.
The time before the headlights turn off
can be changed. If your vehicle is
equipped with the multi−information display, it can be changed by yourself. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
If any of the doors is left open, the lights
automatically turn off after 20 minutes.
To turn them on again, turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position or actuate the
headlight switch.
If you are going to park for over one
week, make sure the headlight switch is
off.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.
Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
(on some models)
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
can make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day. The
DRL system can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be
especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make the front turn
signal lights come on when:

D The ignition is on with the engine running.

D The knob is in the “OFF” position,
position 1 or position 3 with the tail
lights on.

D The parking brake is released.
To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob
to position 2 or position 3 with the headlights on, flashing the high beam headlights or turn the ignition switch to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

167

07 04.26

If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 564 in Section 7−3.

XS15020b

XS15031a

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.

TURN SIGNALS

The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”
position.

Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”.

168

To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Emergency flashers

Instrument panel light control
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

XS15002a

To turn on the
push the switch.

emergency

XS15003

flashers,

To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the dial.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.

With the dial set in the full intensity position, the intensity of the instrument panel
lights will not be reduced even when the
tail lights/headlights are turned on.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operating.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

169

07 04.26

Front fog lights

XS15001a

To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight and turn signal switch lever. They will come on
only when the headlights are on low
beam.

Interior lights

XS15012

Type A (front)

XS15014

Type B (rear)

170

XS15022a

Type C (rear)

XS15005

Interior/personal light main switch

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Personal lights (with power
door lock system)
—Front personal lights
To turn on the interior lights, operate
the interior/personal light main switch.
The lights can be turned on or off by
pushing each switch when the interior/
personal light main switch is in the
“DOOR” or “OFF” position.

XS15004

The interior/personal light main switch has
the following positions:

XS15005

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”— The lights can be turned on or off
by pushing each switch.
“DOOR”—Turn the light on when any of
the doors is opened.

Type A

Interior/personal light main switch

If all the doors are closed, when the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” position, the lights will come on and remain
on for about 15 seconds.
If all the doors are closed and the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” position interior
light will go off immediately.

XS15032

Type B and Type C—For details, see
“Illuminated entry system” on page 173 in
this Section.
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened with the switch at the “DOOR”
position for 20 minutes or more.

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

171

07 04.26

—Rear personal lights
(Crew Max models)
To turn on the front personal lights,
operate the interior/personal light main
switch.

To turn on the rear personal lights, operate the interior/personal light main
switch.

The lights on your side can be turned
on or off by pushing each lens when
the interior/personal light main switch
is in the “DOOR” or “OFF” position.

The lights on your side can be turned
on or off by pushing each lens or
switch when the interior/personal light
main switch is in the “DOOR” or “OFF”
position.

XS15033

The interior/personal light main switch has
the following positions:

The interior/personal light main switch has
the following position:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—The lights can be turned on or off
by pushing each lens.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of
the doors is opened. For details, see
“Illuminated entry system” on page 173 in
this Section.

“OFF”—The lights can be turned on or off
by pushing each lens or switch.

Type A

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of
the doors is opened. For details, see
“Illuminated entry system” on page 173 in
this Section.

To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened with the switch at the “DOOR”
position for 20 minutes or more.

XS15015

To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened with the switch at the “DOOR”
position for 20 minutes or more.

Type B

172

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Illuminated entry system (with power door lock system)
The following lights will come on when
any of the doors are opened. After all
the doors are closed, the lights remain
on for about 15 seconds before fading
out.
1. Foot light
2. Ignition switch light
3. Front personal lights—with the “DOOR”
position
4. Rear
personal
lights/Interior
(rear)—with the “DOOR” position

XS15017a

light

When any of the doors are unlocked, the
lights will come on and remain on for
about 15 seconds before fading out.
If all the doors are closed, when the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” position, the lights will come on and remain
on for about 15 seconds.
The duration of the lighting can be
changed. If your vehicle is equipped with
the multi−information display, it can be
changed by yourself. For details, contact
your Toyota dealer.
If all the doors are closed and the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” position, the ignition switch light, interior light, foot light
and personal lights will go off immediately.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

173

07 04.26

Cargo lamp
If all the doors are locked, all the lights
will fade out.

The cargo lamp is designed to light up
the rear deck of your vehicle.

To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off when
the ignition key is removed and the door
is left opened for about 20 minutes.

CARGO LAMP OPERATION
The cargo lamp should only be kept on
during cargo loading or unloading.
The cargo lamp switch has the following
positions:
“ON” position—Keeps the light on all the
time.
“OFF” position—Keeps the light off all the
time.

XS15008

“DOOR” position—The cargo lamp comes
on under the following cases:

D When locking and unlocking the doors

(vehicles with the power door lock system)
You can operate the cargo lamp by this
method when all the doors are closed
and the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
position or the key is removed.
To turn on: Unlock the door with the
key or the wireless remote control
transmitter.
The cargo lamp will automatically turn
off after 15 seconds.
To turn off: Lock the doors with the
key, the power door lock switch or the
wireless remote control transmitter.

174

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Exterior foot lights (with
driving position memory
system)
D When opening and closing the doors

The lights will come on when the doors
are unlocked simultaneously using either
the power door lock switches or the wireless remote control. This light remains on
for 15 seconds before fading out when
any door is opened, and additional 15
seconds after all the doors are closed.

To turn on: Open any of the doors.
To turn off: Close all the doors.

D When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the cargo lamp will go off immediately.

D When the ignition switch is in the

However, in the following cases, the light
goes off immediately.

“LOCK” position or the key is removed,
the cargo lamp will automatically go off
after 15 seconds.

To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off in
about 20 minutes after the ignition key is
removed.
This feature is deactivated when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

D Doors are locked with wireless remote
control.

D The selector lever is put in a position

XS15018b

other than “P” with the ignition switch
on.

D The doors are locked via the driver’s
door key cylinder.

D The doors are locked via the switches

either inside the driver’s or front passenger’s door.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

175

07 04.26

Windshield wipers and washer
(type A)

XS15029a

The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust the
wiping time interval when the wiper lever
is in the intermittent position (position 1).
Twist the band upward to increase the
time between sweeps, and downward to
decrease it.
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you and release it.
If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
squirts.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON”
position.
Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Intermittent

Position 2

Slow

Position 3

Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,
push the lever up and release it.

176

When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
the washer nozzles do not become
blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,
contact your Toyota dealer to have the
vehicle serviced.

NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 563 in
Section 7−3.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Outside rear view mirror
defoggers and front
windshield de−icer (on some
models)

Windshield wipers and washer
(type B)
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

XS15030a

To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON”
position.
Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Slow

Position 2

Fast

XS14017b

NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.
When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
the washer nozzles do not become
blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,
contact your Toyota dealer to have the
vehicle serviced.

Type A

NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

XS14018b

For a single sweep of the windshield,
push the lever up and release it.
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you and release it.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 563 in
Section 7−3.

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

177

07 04.26

Back window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers and
front windshield de−icer (Crew
Max models)
To defog or defrost the outside rear
view mirrors, push the switch.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON”
position.
The heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surfaces. An indicator light will illuminate to
indicate the mirror heaters are operating.
On some models, the front windshield wiper de−icer also operates simultaneously by
this switch. On vehicles with the front
windshield wiper de−icer, the front windshield wiper blades will be de−iced.
Push the switch once again to turn the
mirror heaters off.

Make sure you turn the mirror heaters off
when the mirror surfaces are clear. Leaving the mirror heaters on for a long time
could cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop−and−go driving. The
mirror heaters are not designed for drying
rain water or for melting snow.

XS15034

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de−icer
before operating the switch.

Type A

The system will automatically shut off after the defogger have operated about 15
minutes.

CAUTION

XS15035a

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,
do not touch them when the switch
is on.

Type B

178

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

To defog or defrost the back window,
push the switch with the back window
closed.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
back window will quickly clear the surface.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
the defogger is operating.
On some models, the outside rear view
mirror defoggers and/or the front windshield wiper de−icer also operate simultaneously by this switch. On vehicles with
the outside rear view mirror defoggers, the
heater panel in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surfaces.
On vehicles with the front windshield wiper de−icer, the front windshield wiper
blades will be de−iced.
Push the switch once again to turn the
defogger off.
The system will automatically shut off after the defoggers have operated about 15
minutes.

CAUTION
On some models, since the mirror
surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the defogger switch is on.
Make sure you turn the defoggers off
when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
defoggers on for a long time could cause
the battery to discharge, especially during
stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.
On some models, if the outside rear view
mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a
spray de−icer before operating the switch.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the back
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

179

07 04.26

180

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 6

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

182
182
183
184
185
185
186
187
197

181

07 04.26

Engine coolant temperature
gauge

Fuel gauge
Low fuel
level
warning
light

XS16001a

The gauge indicates the approximate
quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
when the ignition switch is on.
Nearly full—Needle at “F”
Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

XS16003a

It is a good idea to keep the tank over
1/4 full.
The needle moves when braking, accelerating or making turns. This is caused by
the movement of the fuel in the tank.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
fuel tank as soon as possible.

Type A
Low fuel
level
warning
light

XS16002a

Type B

182

Type A

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.

XS16004a

The indicator lamp will go off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Oil pressure gauge
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature when the ignition switch is
on. The engine operating temperature
will vary with changes in weather and
engine load.
If the needle moves into the red zone,
your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
engine to cool.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:

D Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
D Reducing speed or stopping after high
speed driving.

NOTICE

Normal
driving

z Do not remove the thermostat in
the engine cooling system as this
may cause the engine to overheat.
The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.

Idling

XS16005

z Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in Section 4.
Type A

D Idling for a long period with the air
conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

Normal
driving

D Towing a trailer.
Idling

XS16006

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

183

07 04.26

Automatic transmission fluid
temperature gauge (with
towing package)
The oil pressure gauge indicates engine
oil pressure when the ignition switch is
on. Check it while driving to make sure
that the needle is in the proper range.
If the oil pressure should stay below the
normal range, pull off the road to a safe
place and stop the engine immediately.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop for assistance.
Oil pressure may not build up when the
oil level is too low. The oil pressure
gauge is not designed to indicate oil level,
and the oil level must be checked using
the level dipstick.

Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge indicates automatic transmission fluid temperature when the
ignition switch is on. Check it while
driving to make sure that the needle is
in the proper range.

XS16015c
High range

Type A

The gauge displays the current temperature of the automatic transmission fluid.
The gauge informs the driver of changes
in the automatic transmission fluid temperature especially if it becomes too high
while towing a heavy trailer or hauling a
heavy load.
If the needle reads high range while you
are driving, slow down and pull off the
road. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and
put the selector lever in “P”. With the
engine idling, wait until the needle reads
below the high range. If the needle reads
below the high range, you may start the
vehicle again. If the needle reads the high
range, call a Toyota dealer or qualified
repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the oil
pressure below the normal range until
the cause is fixed—it may ruin the
engine.

XS16016c
High range

NOTICE
Continued driving with reading in the
high range may damage the automatic
transmission.

Type B

184

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Voltmeter

Tachometer
The voltmeter tells whether the battery
is charged or discharged. Check it
while the engine is running—the needle
should always indicate as shown above.

XS16007b
Normal range
Type A

If the needle reads below or above the
normal range while the engine is running,
it indicates the charging system needs immediate repair.

XS16009

However, it is normal for the needle to
drop below the normal range during engine starting.
Type A

XS16008b

XS16010

Normal range
Type B

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

185

07 04.26

Odometer and two trip meters
(without multi−information
display)
3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also change
the meter display.

The tachometer indicates engine speed
in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
minute). Use it while driving to select
correct shift points and to prevent engine lugging and over−revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
the slower the engine speed, the greater
the fuel economy.

To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.

XS16011b

NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage.

This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.
1. Odometer—Shows the total
the vehicle has been driven.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the knob until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

distance

186

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Multi−information display—
The following information is displayed
on the multi−information display when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

D
D
D
D

Cruise information
Odometer and two trip meters

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

Warning messages
Feature customization

During ordinary driving, cruise information
is displayed. However, in case the vehicle
has a system malfunction or if there is
some information that the driver should be
informed of, a warning message appears
on the display. See “—Warning messages”
on page 193 for details.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the cruise information
display, the display will automatically be
set to the initial mode.
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the display
will be reduced.
At extremely low temperatures, the multi−
information display may respond slowly,
and the display changes may be delayed.

SELECTING UNIT
You can select the unit between English/U.S. customary system and metric
unit.
To select unit A (English/U.S. customary
system) or unit B (metric unit), push
“SELECT RESET” button to display
“UNITS” screen, and push “SETUP US/M”
button while the screen is displayed.
The unit variations are as follows;
Information
Average fuel
consumption and
Instantaneous fuel
consumption
Driving range
Average vehicle
speed

Unit A

Unit B

MPG

L/100
km

MILES

MPH

km/h

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

187

07 04.26

—Cruise information
Each time you push the “INFO” button,
the display toggles through the following
1. Zoom display of odometer and trip meter
2. Average fuel consumption
3. Instantaneous fuel consumption
4. Driving range
5. Driving time
6. Average vehicle speed

XS16012c

The displayed values in the cruise information display indicate general driving
conditions. Accuracy varies with driving
habits and road conditions.
When the ignition switch is on, the last
previously used mode displayed just before the ignition switch is off will appear.

188

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

1. Zoom display of odometer and trip
meter

The display indicates 0 when the vehicle
is stopped with the engine running.

The odometer and one of the trip meters
are
displayed
simultaneously.
See
“—Odometer and two trip meters”.

The calculation is reset when the ignition
switch is turned off.

2. Average fuel consumption
(“Average Fuel Economy”)
Average fuel consumption is calculated
and displayed based on total driving
distance and total fuel consumption
with the engine running.

If the low fuel level warning light comes
on, refuel the vehicle even if the display
indicates that the vehicle can be driven
further.

4. Driving range (“Distance To Empty”)

5. Driving time (“Trip Timer”)

The distance the vehicle can travel with
the remaining fuel is calculated and
displayed based on the quantity of remaining fuel and past fuel consumption.

To calculate the driving time, display
the “Trip Timer” after the engine has
been started. Then press the “SELECT
RESET” button. To stop the calculation,
press the “SELECT RESET” button
again.

The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds.

The driving range display indicates the
approximate distance that you can drive
until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is
different from the actual distance traveled.

To reset the calculations, push and hold
the “SELECT RESET” button for more
than 2 seconds.

The displayed value is updated every time
the fuel equivalent for 1 mile or 1 km is
consumed.

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption
(“Current Fuel Economy”)

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the calculation is reset. However, when only a
small amount of fuel is added to the tank,
the display may not be reset.

If the ignition switch is turned off while
the driving time is being calculated, the
calculation will cease. When the engine is
next started, it will automatically resume
from the previous value.

The actual driving range varies with driving habits and road conditions. If fuel consumption is good, the driving range will be
longer than indicated. If fuel consumption
is poor, the driving range will be shorter
than indicated.

If the “SELECT RESET” button is pressed
to cease the calculation and then the ignition switch is turned off, the calculation
will not resume when the engine is next
started. In this case, press the “SELECT
RESET” button to start the calculation.

The instantaneous fuel consumption is
calculated and displayed based on distance and fuel consumption at 20 revolutions of the engine.
The displayed value is updated for a short
time.
An accurate figure may not be shown if
the vehicle is driving down a long slope,
and engine brake is applied. (The display
will indicate the extremely low fuel consumption.)

Driving time is counted from 00:00:00. Up
to 99:59:59 (99 hours, 59 minutes and 59
seconds) can be displayed. When the driving time exceeds 99:59:59, the counter
returns to 00:00:00.

To reset the calculation, push and hold
the “SELECT RESET” button for more
than 2 seconds.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

189

07 04.26

—Feature customization
6. Average vehicle speed
(“Average Speed”)
Average vehicle speed is calculated and
displayed based on total driving distance and total driving time with the
engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds.
To rest the calculations, push and hold the
“SELECT RESET” button for more than 2
seconds.

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to
your preferences. The vehicle can be customized while the vehicle is stopped.
“KEYLESS ENTRY” is used for some customization item names in the screen display. It means “Wireless door lock” in this
owner’s manual.

2. Customize the item with the “SELECT
RESET” button.

D Door lock and unlock warning function
Screen
text:
FEEDBACK

KEYLESS

“LAMPS + TONE”∗

“LAMPS”

1. Select the item you want to customize
unit with the “SETUP US/M” button.

“OFF”

“TONE”

UNITS

D Time for automatic door lock function
Screen
text:
RELOCK TIMER

KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK
KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER

“60 SECONDS”∗

KEYLESS

ENTRY

“120 SECONDS”

KEYLESS ENTRY
ALL DOORS UNLOCK

“30 SECONDS”

DOOR AUTO LOCKING

D Double switch operation to unlock all

DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING
HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER

“OFF”

the doors

Screen text: KEYLESS
DOORS UNLOCK

ENTRY ALL

“2 PRESSES”∗ ⇔ “1 PRESS”

COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER
DEFAULT SETTING

190

ENTRY

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Automatic door locking function

D Time period before lights turn off

Screen text: DOOR AUTO LOCKING
“SHIFT OUT
OF PARK”

“ABOVE 12MPH
(Metric: 20 km/h)”∗

Screen text: COURTESY OFF TIMER
“15 SECONDS”∗

“8 SECONDS”

“OFF”

D Automatic door unlocking function
Screen text: DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING
“DRIVER DOOR
OPEN”

“SHIFT TO
PARK”∗

“30 SECONDS”

“OFF”

D Time period before lights turn off (if a

door is opened and closed, and ignition
switch is in ACC or LOCK)
Screen text: HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF
TIMER

“30 SECONDS”∗

“60 SECONDS”

“0 SECONDS”

“90 SECONDS”

∗:

Default setting

After customizing is complete, press the
“SET UP” button to set the selected item.
If the customization fails, the previously
set item will be displayed. If no button is
pressed for 10 seconds, the display
switches to INFO mode.
As for any items except “UNITS”, the settings cannot be changed at a vehicle
speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or more. A message, “PLEASE STOP VEHICLE TO
CHANGE SETTINGS”, will be indicated on
the screen and customizing operation cannot be accomplished.
If the “SYSTEM ERROR” message is indicated on the screen, the customizing operation cannot be performed due to a
communication error. In such cases, turn
the ignition switch off and then on again.
When the communication returns to normal, the customizing operation can then
be performed. If the “SYSTEM ERROR”
message is indicated again, contact your
Toyota dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

191

07 04.26

—Odometer and two trip
meters
This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.

XS16013d

Normal display

XS16014c

Selecting the zoom display of the
odometer and trip meter when the
cruise information is displayed causes
the odometer and one of the trip meters to be displayed simultaneously.
1. Odometer—Shows the total
the vehicle has been driven.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the knob until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

distance

2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.
3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also changes
the meter display.
To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.

Zoom display

192

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Warning messages
Message

Status

Action

(a)

Parking brake is not released.

Release parking brake.

(b)

Engine coolant temperature is too high.

Stop your vehicle and allow engine to cool.

(c)

Any of doors are opened.

Close doors completely.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

193

07 04.26

Message

Status

Action

(d)

Fuel in tank becomes nearly empty.

Fill up tank.

(e)

Automatic transmission fluid temperature is
too high.

Stop and check.

(f)

Oil change is nearly due.

Check engine oil.

(g)

Oil change is due.

Replace engine oil.

(h)

Washer fluid level is low.

Add washer fluid.

194

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

The message disappears by pressing
“SELECT RESET” button when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. However,
the low fuel level warning light remains
on.

(c)

(a)
This message is to warn the driver that
the parking brake is not completely released at the vehicle speed of 5 km/h
(3 mph) or more.
Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake fully.
The message appears with the master
warning light flashes, brake system warning light and a warning tone sounds.
(b)
This message is to warn the driver that
the engine coolant temperature is too
high.
Stop the vehicle and allow the engine
to cool.
The message appears with the master
warning light flashes and a warning tone
sounds.

NOTICE

(e)
This message is to remind the driver
that any of the doors are opened.
Close the door securely.

This message is to warn the driver that
automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.

The message appears with the master
warning light flashes, open door warning
light and a warning tone sounds when the
vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h (3
mph).

If the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high, the message appears
with the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light comes on and a
warning tone sounds.

(d)
This message is to remind the driver
that the fuel level in the tank becomes
nearly empty.
If the message appears with the low fuel
level warning light comes on and a warning tone sounds, fill up the tank as soon
as possible.

If this message appears while you are
driving, slow down and pull off the road.
Stop the vehicle at a safe place and put
the selector lever in “P”. With the engine
idling, wait until the message goes off. If
the message goes off, you may start the
vehicle again. If the message does not go
off, call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop for assistance.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. See “If your vehicle
overheats” on page 497 in Section 4.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

195

07 04.26

NOTICE
Continue driving with the warning
message on may result in damage of
the automatic transmission.

(f)

(U.S.A. only)

This message is to remind the driver to
change the engine oil. The message is
a prior notice.
Toyota recommends that the engine oil
be changed as soon as possible.
If the driving range after the previous oil
change reaches 7200 km (4500 miles), the
message appears for about 15 seconds
with the master warning light and a warning tone sounds.
The engine oil maintenance data must be
reset after the engine oil change. See
following
“Resetting
the
engine
oil
maintenance data”.

(g)

(U.S.A. only)

This message is to remind the driver to
change the engine oil.
Change the engine oil as soon as possible.
If the driving range after the previous oil
change reaches 8000 km (5000 miles), the
message appears with the master warning
light and a warning tone sounds. The
message stays on with the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
The engine
reset after
“Resetting
data” below
system.

oil maintenance data must be
the engine oil change. See
the engine oil maintenance
for the procedure to reset the

Resetting the engine oil maintenance
data
The engine oil maintenance data must be
reset after replacement of the engine oil.
Reset the data by the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position with the trip meter
A reading shown. (For details, see
“Odometer and two trip meters” on
page 186 in this Section.)

196

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position while holding down the trip
meter reset knob.
Hold down the knob for at least 5
seconds. The information display indicates
“MAINT
REQD
RESET
MODE
COMPLETE”, the master warning light
turns on and the tone sounds.
If the system fails to reset, perform the
above procedure again.
(h)
This message appears when the washer
fluid level becomes very low.
Fill the tank as soon as possible.
The message appears with the master
warning light, low windshield washer fluid
level warning light and a warning tone
sounds.
If the message appears, fill the washer
tank as soon as possible. For instructions, see “Adding washer fluid” on
page 563 in Section 7−3.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(a)

Do this.

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(indicator and buzzer)

(b)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(c)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(d)

Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e)

Stop and check.

(f)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

197

07 04.26

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

Do this.

(g)

Replace engine oil.

(h)

Fill up tank.

(i)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j)

If the light flashes, take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k)

Close all doors.

(l)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m)

198

Adjust tire inflation pressure. If the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute,
contact Toyota dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

Do this.

(n)

Stop and check.

(o)

Read a warning message on multi−information display.

(p)

Add washer fluid.

(q)

Key reminder buzzer

Remove key.

(r)

Parking brake reminder buzzer

Release parking brake.

(s)

Four−wheel drive system warning
buzzer

Shift the transfer mode correctly.

(t)

Open moon roof reminder buzzer

Close moon roof.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

199

07 04.26

(a) Brake System Warning Light and
buzzer
This light comes on in the following cases
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.

D When the parking brake is applied...
This light comes on for a few seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position even after the parking brake
is released.

D When the brake fluid level is low...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving
normally when the brake fluid level is
low.
Have your vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer in the following case:

D The light does not come on even if the
parking brake is applied when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Buzzer

CAUTION
If either of the following conditions
occurs, immediately stop your vehicle
at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.

D The light does not turn off even
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may not
work properly and your stopping
distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and
bring the vehicle to an immediate
stop.

D The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS”
warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
buckle up the driver’s seat belt.
Once the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
or “START”, the reminder light flashes and
buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt is
not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the
belt, the light continues flashing and the
buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.
If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h
(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,
the buzzer will sound for about 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle
speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the
buzzer will continue to sound. To stop the
buzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer
still sounds, make sure the front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.

D The light does not come on even if the
ignition switch is turned on with the
parking brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

200

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Belt

Re-

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
have the front passenger buckle up the
seat belt.

(d) Charging System Warning Light
This warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, and goes off when the engine is
started.

Once the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the reminder light flashes if
a passenger sits in the right front passenger seat and does not fasten the seat
belt.

When there are problems in the charging
system while the engine is running, the
warning light comes on.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h
(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,
the buzzer will sound for 10 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,
the buzzer will sound in a different tone
for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speed
drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the buzzer
will continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,
fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer still
sounds, make sure the driver’s seat belt
is fastened.

When the charging system warning
light comes on while the engine is
running, malfunctions such as the engine drive belt being broken may have
occurred. If the warning light comes
on, immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight, the reminder light to flash and
buzzer to sounds.

NOTICE

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If it flickers or stays on while you are
driving, pull off the road to a safe place
and stop the engine immediately. Call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when
the engine is idling or it may come on
briefly after a hard stop. There is no
cause for concern if it then goes out when
the engine is accelerated slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level
is extremely low. It is not designed to
indicate low oil level, and the oil level
must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the
warning light on—even for one block.
It may ruin the engine.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

201

07 04.26

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position
and goes off after the engine starts.
This means that the warning light system is operating properly.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp
comes on while driving, first check the
followings.

D Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.

D Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely
tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel
tank cap is not loose...

D There is a problem somewhere in the
engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.

202

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) programs

If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.

Your vehicle may not pass a state
emission inspection if the malfunction
indicator lamp remains on. Contact your
Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s
emission
control
system
and
OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) system before
taking your vehicle for the inspection.

At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position.

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs” in Section 6.
(g) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder
Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
This light acts as a reminder to replace
the engine oil.
This light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
will go off after about a few seconds.
When you drive for about 7200 km (4500
miles) after the engine oil replacement,
this light illuminates for about 3 seconds
and then flashes for about 12 seconds
with the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position. If you continue driving without
replacing the engine oil, and if the
distance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000
miles), the light will come on after the
ignition switch is turned to “ON” position.
The light will remain on thereafter.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If the light is flashing, we recommend that
you replace the engine oil at an early
opportunity depending on the driving and
road conditions. If the light comes on,
replace it as soon as possible.
The system must be reset after the
engine oil replacement. Reset the system
by the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position with the trip meter A reading
shown. (For details, see “Odometer and
two trip meters” on page 186 in this
Section.)
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position while holding down the trip
meter reset knob.
Hold down the knob for at least 5
seconds. The trip meter A indicates
“000000” and the light goes off.
If the system fails to reset, the light will
continue flashing.
(h) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level
in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.

D The light does not come on when the

(i) “ABS” Warning Light
The light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
the anti−lock brake system and the brake
assist system work properly, the light
turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter,
if either of the systems malfunctions, the
light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
following systems do not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally.

D
D
D
D
D

Anti−lock brake system
Brake assist system
Traction control system
“AUTO LSD” system
Vehicle stability control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
so that the wheels will lock up during a
sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, or remains on.

D The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

203

07 04.26

(j) “VSC OFF” warning light

(k) Open Door Warning Light

The light flashing warns that there is a
problem somewhere in the following.

This light remains on until all the doors
are completely closed.

D Vehicle stability control system
D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system

The buzzer also sounds once when any
of the doors is not completely closed at
the vehicle speed 5 km/h (3 mph) or
more. Stop the vehicle and close all the
door completely.

The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and
will go off after a few seconds.
If the light flashes on while driving, the
above mentioned systems do not work.
However, as conventional braking operates
when applied, there is no problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

D The warning light remains on after the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light flashes while driving.

204

(l) SRS Warning Light
This light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. After about 6 seconds, the light
will go off. This means the systems of
the airbag and front seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system∗, passenger airbag
off switch, passenger airbag on−off indicator light, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, “RSCA OFF” indicator light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.

∗: The front passenger occupant classification system includes the front passenger
occupant classification ECU, load sensor
and front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch.

If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction somewhere in
the parts monitored by the warning light
system. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.

D The light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.
(m) Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light warns that the tire inflation pressure of one or more of your tires (except
for the temporary spare tire) is low. The
light comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. It goes off
after a few seconds. This indicates that
the tire pressure warning system is functioning properly.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If the light comes on, stop your vehicle in
a safe place as soon as possible and
check that the tire inflation pressure of all
four tires is as specified on the tire and
loading information label. (See “Checking
tire inflation pressure” on page 548 in
Section 7−2.) The light should go off 3 to
6 minutes after the tire inflation pressure
is adjusted.
If the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute, the tire pressure warning
system may be malfunctioning. Contact
your Toyota dealer.
For details, see “Tire pressure warning
system” on page 251 in Section 1−7.
(n) Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Warning Light
This light warns that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.
If this light comes on while you are driving, slow down and pull off the road. Stop
the vehicle at a safe place and put the
selector lever in “P”. With the engine idling, wait until the light goes off. If the
light goes off, you may start the vehicle
again. If the light does not go off, call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.

(r) Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer

NOTICE
Continued driving with the warning
light on may damage the automatic
transmission.
(o) Master Warning Light
If the master warning light comes on, a
message appears on the multi−information
display. Depending on the conditions a
warning tone may sound. (See “—Warning
messages” on page 193 in this Section for
instructions.)
(p) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level
Warning Light
The light warns that the windshield washer
fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at
your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 563 in
Section 7−3.)

The buzzer acts once when the parking
brake is not completely released at the
vehicle speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or more.
Stop the vehicle and release the parking
brake fully.
(s) Four−wheel Drive System Warning
Buzzer (four−wheel drive models)
This buzzer reminds you that the transfer
mode is not selected correctly.
If the buzzer sounds when you shift the
transfer from “2WD” to “4H”, “4L” to “4H”,
“4H” to “4L”, or “4L” to “2WD” mode, follow the instructions in “Four−wheel drive
system” on page 239 in Section 1−7.
(t) Open Moon Roof Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer acts as a reminder to close
the moon roof when you turn the ignition
switch off and open the driver’s door.

The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
will go off after a few seconds.
(q) Key Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove
the key when you open the driver’s door
with the ignition switch in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

205

07 04.26

The SRS warning light goes off after
about 6 seconds.

CHECKING
SERVICE
REMINDER
INDICATORS (except the low fuel level
warning light)

With multi−information display—

Without multi−information display—

1. Apply the parking brake.

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the doors.
The open door warning light should
come on.
3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, but do not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light should
come on.
The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Engine oil replacement reminder light
“ABS” warning light
“RSCA OFF” indicator light
“VSC OFF” indicator/warning light
“AUTO LSD” indicator light
Tire pressure warning light
Slip indicator light
Low windshield washer fluid level warning light

206

If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described
above, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.

2. Open one of the doors.
The open door warning light should
come on.
3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, but do not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light should
come on.
The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 7

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS

Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four−wheel drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
”AUTO LSD” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

208
209
239
242
244
248
251
258
259

207

07 04.26

Ignition switch
“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be removed only at this position.

XS17001a

“START”—Starter motor on. The key
will return to the “ON” position when
released.
For starting tips, see page 468 in Section
3.
“ON”—Engine on and all accessories
on.
This is the normal driving position.
“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio
operate, but the engine is off.
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position and open the driver’s
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove
the key.

208

You must push in the key to turn the key
from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The
selector lever must be put in the “P” position before pushing the key.

NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON”
position if the engine is not running.
The battery will discharge and the
ignition could be damaged.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—
Once you remove the key, the engine immobilizer system is automatically set. (See
“Engine immobilizer system” on page 21
in Section 1−2.)
When starting the engine, the key may
seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To
free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key gently.
Approximately five hours after the engine
is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from underneath the deck for several minutes. This is normal operation and does
not indicate a malfunction. (See “Leak
detection pump” on page ix.)
It is not a malfunction if the needles on
all meters and gauges move slightly when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”,
“ON” or “START” position.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Automatic transmission (floor shift type)
"5−speed models

Selector lever

Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch in “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal

XS17002a
Shift with the brake pedal
depressed. (The ignition switch
must be in “ON” position.)

R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
S: “S” mode driving
+: Upshift range
−: Downshift range

Shift normally.

To select “S” or “D”, lean the
selector lever leftward or rightward.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

209

07 04.26

(b) Normal driving
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 468 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
“P” or “N”.
When the front drive control switch knob
is in “4L” (low−speed position, four−wheel
drive), the driving pattern selector setting
has no effect on gear shift timing. (See
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in
this Section for information of the front
drive control lever.)
2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.
When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
Always use the “D” position for better fuel
economy and quieter driving. If the engine
coolant temperature is low or when the
front drive control switch knob is in “4L”
(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the
transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even in the “D” position. (See
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in
this Section for information of the front
drive control.)

210

D Automatic shifting point change con-

CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.
AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting control—
AI shifting control selects the most
suitable shift range automatically according to the driver’s operation and
driving condition.
AI shifting control operates automatically with the selector lever in the “D”
position. When the lever is moved to
the “S” position, this function will be
cancelled.

D Shifting control on the slope:

On inclines, you can drive smoothly
with reduced shifting quantity. On declines, the vehicle will shift down automatically to obtain optimum engine
braking and reduce the driver’s foot
braking load.

trol:
The most suitable shift range is selected depending on the driver’s accelerator pedal operation and vehicle condition.

(c) Driving in “S” mode
The shift range position can be
changed in “S” mode. When the selector lever is in the “S” position, the
shift range position can be switched
between “5” (fifth range) and “1” (first
range) by shifting the selector lever to
the “+” (up) or “−” (down) position. By
shifting the lever to the “+” (up) position and holding it for at least 1 second, the highest shift range position
can be obtained. However, it cannot be
changed while cruise control is activated. When the selector lever is
shifted to the “S” position, shift range
position “4” (fourth range) is selected
automatically.
However, if the selector lever is shifted
to the “S” position when AI shifting
control is being performed, the initial
shift range position may be “3” (third
range). This is because the suitable
shift range is selected depending on
the driving condition.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

The “S” mode indicator light and the current shift range position are shown on the
instrument cluster.

Shift range positions

D “5” (Fifth range):

The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and overdrive
(fifth) gears according to the vehicle
speed and driving conditions.

D “4” (Fourth range):

XS17028

The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and fourth
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. Slight engine
braking will be obtained on a downhill
road. Smooth running with less shifting
will be obtained on an uphill road.

D “3” (Third range):

The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and third
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. This range is to
be used when stronger engine braking
is necessary.

D “2” (Second range):

First or second gear will be selected
automatically according to the vehicle
speed and driving conditions. This
range is to be used when engine braking stronger than that of the “3” range
position is necessary.

1: Upshift range
2: Downshift range
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

211

07 04.26

D “1” (First range):

The gear is fixed in first regardless of
vehicle speed and driving conditions.
This range is to be used when maximum engine braking is necessary.

If you attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not possible to downshift
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone
sounds twice.

NOTICE
Do not drive in the “3”, “2” or “1”
range when driving at high speed or
climbing a gentle slope for a long
time. Otherwise the transmission or
engine may overheat causing damage.

Maximum allowable speeds
To get on a highway or to pass slower
traffic, maximum acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the following maximum allowable speed in each
range:
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
range
1
2
3

km/h
59
102
148

(mph)
(36)
(63)
(91)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
Without towing package
range
1
2
3

km/h
61
105
154

(mph)
(37)
(65)
(95)

km/h
58
100
147

(mph)
(36)
(62)
(91)

With towing package
range
1
2
3

212

Four−wheel drive models without towing
package
—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
range
1
2
3
4
5

km/h
23
40
58
68
68

(mph)
(14)
(24)
(36)
(42)
(42)

Four−wheel drive models with towing
package
—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
range
1
2
3
4
5

km/h
22
38
56
64
64

(mph)
(13)
(23)
(34)
(39)
(39)

NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going
faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower range.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

When the “S” mode indicator light does
not come on even with the selector lever
moved to the “S” position, there may be a
problem somewhere in the system. Have
your vehicle checked/repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this
case, you can drive in the same condition
as in the “D” position.
(d) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:

D When driving in the “D” position—

Shift the selector lever to “S” position.
When driving in the “5” range within
the “S” position—
Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “4” range. The
transmission will downshift to fourth
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than the following
speed, and engine braking will be enabled.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 km/h (84 mph)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)
—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 km/h (82 mph)
Four−wheel drive models without towing package
—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)

When the cruise control is being used,
engine braking can not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. However, engine braking will be
automatically enabled if the vehicle
speed is higher than the set speed of
the cruise control depending on the
driving conditions.

Four−wheel drive models with towing
package

For decreasing the vehicle speed, see
“Cruise control” on page 259 in this
Section.

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 km/h (82 mph)

D Move the selector lever down to the

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 km/h (31 mph)

“−” side to select the “3” range. The
transmission will downshift to third
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than the following
speed, and stronger engine braking will
be enabled.

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 km/h (32 mph)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

213

07 04.26

D Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “2” range. The
transmission will downshift to second
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than the following
speed, and more powerful engine braking than that of the “3” range position
will be enabled.
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 km/h (57 mph)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 km/h (57 mph)
—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 km/h (55 mph)
Four−wheel drive models without towing package
—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 km/h (57 mph)
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 km/h (21 mph)

214

Four−wheel drive models with towing
package

Four−wheel drive models without towing package

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 km/h (55 mph)
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 km/h (20 mph)
D Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “1” range. The
transmission will downshift to first
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than the following
speed, and maximum engine braking
will be enabled.

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 km/h (24 mph)

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 km/h (9 mph)
Four−wheel drive models with towing
package
—Front drive control switch
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 km/h (23
—Front drive control switch
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 km/h (8

knob
mph)
knob
mph)

CAUTION

—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 km/h (24 mph)
—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 km/h (23 mph)

Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery surface. The abrupt change
in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

(e) Backing up

(g) Good driving practice

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up

2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
(f) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
fully depress the parking brake pedal
to apply the parking brake securely.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” position.

CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.

and down between third gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever into “S” position.

D When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use the transmission in “D”. Select an
appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the “P” position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see “If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 516 in Section 4.

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

215

07 04.26

"6−speed models

Selector lever

XS17002a
Shift with the brake pedal
depressed. (The ignition switch
must be in “ON” position)

R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
S: “S” mode driving
+: Upshift range
−: Downshift range

Shift normally.
To select “S” or “D”, lean the
selector lever leftward or
rightward.

216

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Automatic shifting point change con-

D Shifting control on the slope:

trol:
The most suitable shift range is selected depending on the driver’s accelerator pedal operation and vehicle condition.

(c) Driving in “S” mode
The shift range position can be
changed in “S” mode. When the selector lever is in the “S” position, the
shift range position can be switched
between “6” (sixth range) and “1” (first
range) by shifting the selector lever to
the “+” (up) or “−” (down) position. By
shifting the lever to the “+” (up) position and holding it for at least 1 second, the highest shift range position
can be obtained. However, it cannot be
changed while cruise control is activated. When the selector lever is
shifted to the “S” position, shift range
position “4” (fourth range) or “5” (fifth
range) is selected depending on the vehicle speed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

217

07 04.26

However, if the selector lever is shifted
to the “S” position when AI shifting
control is being performed, the initial
shift range position may be “2” (second
range) or “3” (third range). This is because the suitable shift range is selected depending on the driving condition.

Shift range positions

D “6” (Sixth range):

The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and overdrive
(sixth) gears according to the vehicle
speed and driving conditions.

D “5” (Fifth range):

The “S” mode indicator light and the current shift range position are shown on the
instrument cluster.

XS17028

The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and fifth gears
according to vehicle speed and driving
conditions. This range is suitable for
acceleration such as when you want to
pass a vehicle running ahead of you
during high speed driving.

D “4” (Fourth range):

D “3” (Third range):

1: Upshift range
2: Downshift range

218

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D “2” (Second range):

D “1” (First range):

The gear is fixed in first regardless of
vehicle speed and driving conditions.
This range is to be used when maximum engine braking is necessary.

If you attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not possible to downshift
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone
sounds twice.

Maximum allowable speeds
To get on a highway or to pass slower
traffic, maximum acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each
range:
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Without towing package
range
1
2
3

km/h
62
106
154

(mph)
(38)
(65)
(95)

With towing package
range
1
2
3

km/h
59
101
147

(mph)
(36)
(62)
(91)

Four−wheel drive models without towing
package
—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
range
1
2
3
4
5
6

km/h
23
40
58
68
68
68

(mph)
(14)
(24)
(36)
(42)
(42)
(42)

Four−wheel drive models
package

with towing

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
range
1
2
3
4
5
6

km/h
22
38
56
64
64
64

(mph)
(13)
(23)
(34)
(39)
(39)
(39)

NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going
faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower range.
When the “S” mode indicator light does
not come on even with the selector lever
moved to the “S” position, there may be a
problem somewhere in the system. Have
your vehicle checked/repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this
case, you can drive in the same condition
as in the “D” position.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

219

07 04.26

(d) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:

D When driving in the “D” position—

Shift the selector lever to the “S”
position.

When driving in the “6” range within
the “S” position—
Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “5” range. The
transmission will downshift to fifth
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than the following
speed, and engine braking will be
enabled.
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Four−wheel drive models
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 km/h (49 mph)

When the cruise control is being used,
even if you downshift the transmission,
engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. However, engine braking will be
automatically enabled if the vehicle
speed is higher than the set speed of
the cruise control depending on the
driving conditions.

When the cruise control is being
used, even if you downshift the
transmission, engine braking will not
be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. However, engine
braking will be automatically enabled
if the vehicle speed is higher than
the set speed of the cruise control
depending on the driving conditions.

For ways to decrease the vehicle
speed, see “Cruise control” on page
259 in this Section.

D Move selector lever down to the “−”

D Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “4” range. The
transmission will downshift to fourth
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than the following
speed, and stronger engine braking will
be enabled.

side to select the “3” range. The transmission will downshift to third range
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
more powerful engine braking than that
of the “4” range position will be enabled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Four−wheel drive models
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 km/h (49 mph)

220

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)

—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 km/h (58 mph)

—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 km/h (25 mph)

—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 km/h (81 mph)

—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (55 mph)

—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph)

Four−wheel drive models without towing package

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 km/h (58 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 km/h (25 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 km/h (34 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 km/h (22 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 km/h (9 mph)

Four−wheel drive models with towing
package

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 km/h (81 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (55 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 km/h (32 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 km/h (22 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 km/h (8 mph)

D Move the selector lever down to the

D Move selector lever down to the “−”

“−” side to select the “2” range. The
transmission will downshift to second
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than the following
speed, and more powerful engine braking will be enabled.

side to select the “1” range. The downshift to first range when the vehicle
speed drops down to or lower than the
following speed, and maximum engine
braking will be enabled.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

221

07 04.26

CAUTION

NOTICE

Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery surface. The abrupt change
in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.

Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.

Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

222

(g) Good driving practice

D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between fourth gear and
overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever into “S” position.

D When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use the transmission in “D”. Select an
appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

To turn off: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch
once again and the “TOW/HAUL” mode
indicator light goes off.

XS17036a

(i) “TOW/HAUL” switch
(on some models)

“TOW/HAUL” mode is canceled by pressing “TOW/HAUL” switch again or by turning the ignition switch to “OFF”.
Even when “TOW/HAUL” mode is used
during normal driving, no damage is
caused to the engine or the transmission.
However, fuel economy is reduced and the
transmission and/or engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.
Toyota recommends using “TOW/HAUL”
mode only when a heavy trailer or a large
heavy load is towed.

Use “TOW/HAUL” mode when pulling a
trailer or hauling a heavy load. In this
mode, the driving and engine braking performance is improved in accordance with
towing conditions or increased load.
To turn on: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch
“TOW/HAUL” mode is activated and
“TOW/HAUL” mode indicator light comes
on by pressing “TOW/HAUL” switch.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

223

07 04.26

Automatic transmission (column−shift type)
"5−speed models
Selector lever

XS17026a
Shift with the brake pedal
depressed. (The ignition switch
must be in “ON” position.)

R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
S: “S” mode driving
+: Upshift range
−: Downshift range

Shift normally.
To select “S” or “D”, pull the
lever toward you and shift
down. Shift the lever up and
push outward.

224

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Automatic shifting point change con-

D Shifting control on the slope:

trol:
The most suitable shift range is selected depending on the driver’s accelerator pedal operation and vehicle condition.

(c) Driving in “S” mode
The shift range position can be
changed in “S” mode. When the selector lever is in the “S” position, the
shift range position can be switched
between “5” (fifth range) and “1” (first
range) by turning the “S” mode switch
of the selector lever to the “+” (up) or
“−” (down) direction. By turning the
“S” mode switch to the “+” (up) direction and holding it for at least 1 second, the highest shift range position
can be obtained. However, it cannot be
changed while cruise control is activated. When the selector lever is
shifted to the “S” position, shift range
position “4” (fourth range) is selected
automatically.
However, if the selector lever is shifted
to the “S” position when AI shifting
control is being performed, the initial
shift range position may be “3” (third
range). This is because the suitable
shift range is selected depending on
the driving condition.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

225

07 04.26

The “S” mode indicator light and the current shift range position are shown on the
instrument cluster.

Shift range positions

D “5” (Fifth range):

The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and overdrive
(fifth) gears according to the vehicle
speed and driving conditions.

D “4” (Fourth range):

XS17027

D “3” (Third range):

D “2” (Second range):

1: Upshift range
2: Downshift range

226

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D “1” (First range):

The gear is fixed in first regardless of
vehicle speed and driving conditions.
This range is to be used when maximum engine braking is necessary.

If you attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not possible to downshift
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone
sounds twice.

NOTICE
Do not drive in the “3”, “2” or “1”
range when driving at high speed or
climbing a gentle slope for a long
time. Otherwise the transmission or
engine may overheat causing damage.

km/h
59
102
148

(mph)
(36)
(63)
(91)

km/h
61
105
154

(mph)
(37)
(65)
(95)

km/h
58
100
147

(mph)
(36)
(62)
(91)

with towing package
range
1
2
3

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
range
1
2
3
4
5

km/h
23
40
58
68
68

Four−wheel drive models
package

(mph)
(14)
(24)
(36)
(42)
(42)
with towing

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
without towing package
range
1
2
3

Four−wheel drive models without towing
package

range
1
2
3
4
5

km/h
22
38
56
64
64

(mph)
(13)
(23)
(34)
(39)
(39)

NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going
faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower range.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

227

07 04.26

D When driving in the “D” position—

Shift the selector lever to “S” position.
When driving in the “5” range within
the “S” position—
Turn the “S” mode switch of the selector lever to the “−” side to select the
“4” range. The transmission will downshift to fourth range when the vehicle
speed drops down to or lower than the
following speed, and engine braking will
be enabled.

228

D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
Four−wheel drive models without towing package
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 km/h (46 mph)
Four−wheel drive models with towing
package
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 km/h (44 mph)
When the cruise control is being used,
engine braking can not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. However, engine braking will be
automatically enabled if the vehicle
speed is higher than the set speed of
the cruise control depending on the
driving conditions.
For decreasing the vehicle speed, see
“Cruise control” on page 259 in this
Section.

tor lever to the “−” side to select the
“3” range. The transmission will downshift to third range when the vehicle
speed drops down to or lower than the
following speed, and stronger engine
braking will be enabled.
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 km/h (84 mph)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)
—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 km/h (82 mph)
Four−wheel drive models without towing package
—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 km/h (32 mph)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Four−wheel drive models with towing
package

Four−wheel drive models without towing package

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 km/h (82 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 km/h (57 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 km/h (31 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 km/h (21 mph)

D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 km/h (23 mph)

Four−wheel drive models with towing
package

Four−wheel drive models without towing package

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 km/h (55 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 km/h (24 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 km/h (20 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 km/h (9 mph)

tor lever to the “−” side to select the
“2” range. The transmission will downshift to second range when the vehicle
speed drops down to or lower than the
following speed, and more powerful engine braking than that of the “3” range
position will be enabled.
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 km/h (57 mph)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 km/h (57 mph)
—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 km/h (55 mph)

D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor lever to the “−” side to select the
“1” range. The transmission will downshift to first range when the vehicle
speed drops down to or lower than the
following speed, and maximum engine
braking will be enabled.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 km/h (24 mph)

Four−wheel drive models with towing
package
—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 km/h (23 mph)
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 km/h (8 mph)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

229

07 04.26

CAUTION

NOTICE

Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery surface. The abrupt change
in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.

Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.

Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

230

(g) Good driving practice

D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between third gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever into “S” position.

D When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use the transmission in “D”. Select an
appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

"6 speed models
Selector lever

XS17026a
Shift with the brake pedal
depressed. (The ignition switch
must be in “ON” position)

R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
S: “S” mode driving
+: Upshift range
−: Downshift range

Shift normally.
To select “S” or “D”, pull the
lever toward you and shift
down. Shift the lever up and
push outward.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

231

07 04.26

232

D Automatic shifting point change con-

D Shifting control on the slope:

trol:
The most suitable shift range is selected depending on the driver’s accelerator pedal operation and vehicle condition.

(c) Driving in “S” mode
The shift range position can be
changed in “S” mode. When the selector lever is in the “S” position, the
shift range position can be switched
between “6” (sixth range) and “1” (first
range) by turning the “S” mode switch
of the selector lever to the “+” (up) or
“−” (down) direction. By turning the
“S” mode switch to the “+” (up) direction and holding it for at least 1 second, the highest shift range position
can be obtained. However, it cannot be
changed while cruise control is activated. When the selector lever is
shifted to the “S” position, shift range
position “4” (fourth range) or “5” (fifth
range) is selected depending on the vehicle speed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Shift range positions

D “6” (Sixth range):

The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and overdrive
(sixth) gears according to the vehicle
speed and driving conditions.

D “5” (Fifth range):

The “S” mode indicator light and the current shift range position are shown on the
instrument cluster.

XS17027

D “4” (Fourth range):

D “3” (Third range):

1: Upshift range
2: Downshift range

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

233

07 04.26

D “2” (Second range):

D “1” (First range):

The gear is fixed in first regardless of
vehicle speed and driving conditions.
This range is to be used when maximum engine braking is necessary.

If you attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not possible to downshift
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone
sounds twice.

drive

range
1
2
3

km/h
62
106
154
models
km/h
59
101
147

(mph)
(38)
(65)
(95)
with

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
range
1
2
3
4
5
6

km/h
23
40
58
68
68
68

Four−wheel drive models
package

(mph)
(14)
(24)
(36)
(42)
(42)
(42)
with towing

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
towing

(mph)
(36)
(62)
(91)

Four−wheel drive models without towing
package

range
1
2
3
4
5
6

km/h
22
38
56
64
64
64

(mph)
(13)
(23)
(34)
(39)
(39)
(39)

NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going
faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower range.

234

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D When driving in the “D” position—

Shift the selector lever to the “S”
position.

When driving in the “6” range within
the “S” position—
Turn the “S” mode switch of the selector to the “−” side to select the “5”
range. The transmission will downshift to fifth range when the vehicle
speed drops down to or lower than
the following speed, and engine braking will be enabled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive models

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 km/h (49 mph)

When the cruise control is being
used, even if you downshift the
transmission, engine braking will not
be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. However, engine
braking will be automatically enabled
if the vehicle speed is higher than
the set speed of the cruise control
depending on the driving conditions.

For ways to decrease the vehicle
speed, see “Cruise control” on page
259 in this Section.

D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor to the “−” side to select the “4”
range. The transmission will downshift
to fourth range when the vehicle speed
drops down to or lower than the following speed, and stronger engine braking
will be enabled.

tor to the “−” side to select the “3”
range. The transmission will downshift
to third range when the vehicle speed
drops down to or lower than the following speed, and more powerful engine
braking than that of the “4” range position will be enabled.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

235

07 04.26

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)
—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 km/h (81 mph)
Four−wheel drive models without towing package
—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 km/h (34 mph)
Four−wheel drive models with towing
package
—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 km/h (81 mph)
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 km/h (32 mph)

236

D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor to the “−” side to select the “2”
range. The transmission will downshift
to second range when the vehicle
speed drops down to or lower than the
following speed, and more powerful engine braking will be enabled.
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models

D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor to the “−” side to select the “1”
range. The downshift to first range
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
maximum engine braking will be enabled.
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 km/h (58 mph)

—without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 km/h (25 mph)

—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (55 mph)

—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph)

Four−wheel drive models without towing package

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 km/h (58 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 km/h (25 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 km/h (22 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 km/h (9 mph)

Four−wheel drive models with towing
package

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (55 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 km/h (22 mph)

—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 km/h (8 mph)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

NOTICE

Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery surface. The abrupt change
in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.

Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.

Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

(g) Good driving practice

D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between fourth gear and
overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever into “S” position.

D When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use the transmission in “D”. Select an
appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

237

07 04.26

To turn off: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch
once again and the “TOW/HAUL” mode
indicator light goes off.

“TOW/HAUL” mode is canceled by pressing “TOW/HAUL” switch again or by turning the ignition switch to “OFF”.

XS17032b

Even when “TOW/HAUL” mode is used
during normal driving, no damage is
caused to the engine or the transmission.
However, fuel economy is reduced and the
transmission and/or engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.
Toyota recommends using “TOW/HAUL”
mode only when a heavy trailer or a large
heavy load is towed.

(i) “TOW/HAUL” switch
(on some models)
Use “TOW/HAUL” mode when pulling a
trailer or hauling a heavy load. In this
mode, the driving and engine braking performance is improved in accordance with
towing conditions or increased load.
To turn on: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch
“TOW/HAUL” mode is activated and
“TOW/HAUL” mode indicator light comes
on by pressing “TOW/HAUL” switch.

238

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Four−wheel drive system
(a) Front drive control
Use the front drive control switch knob
to select the following transfer modes.
“2WD” (high speed position, two−wheel
drive): Front drive control switch knob at
“2WD”
Use this for normal driving on dry hard−
surfaced roads. This position gives greater
economy, quietest ride, least wear and
better vehicle control.
“4H” (high speed position, four−wheel
drive): Front drive control switch knob at
“4H”

XS17003b

The “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light comes on when the “4H”
mode is selected.

The “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light comes on when the “4L”
mode is selected.
Use this for maximum power and traction.
Use “4L” position for climbing or descending steep hills, off−road driving, and hard
pulling in sand, mud or deep snow.
See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further instructions.
In this mode, the vehicle stability control
system is off. (See “Vehicle stability
control system” on page 248 in this
Section.)

Use this for greater traction than two−
wheel drive. (When you experience a loss
of power, such as wheel spinning.) This
position provides greater traction than
two−wheel drive.
In this mode, the vehicle stability control
system is off. (See “Vehicle stability
control system” on page 248 in this
Section.)
“4L” (low speed position, four−wheel
drive): Front drive control switch knob at
“4L”

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

239

07 04.26

(b) A.D.D. (automatic
disconnecting differential)
The A.D.D. can be engaged or disengaged by the shifting operations described in “(c) Shifting procedure”.
You should drive in four−wheel drive for
at least 16 km (10 miles) each month.
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.

(c) Shifting procedure
SHIFTING BETWEEN “2WD” AND “4H”
To shift from “2WD” to “4H”, reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62
mph) and turn the front drive control
switch knob fully clockwise.
When the ambient temperature is −15_C
(5.0_F) or lower, shifting can be performed
with the vehicle speed below 70 km/h (43
mph).
If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light continues to blink when you
operate the front drive control switch knob
from the “2WD” to the “4H” position, this
reminds you that the transfer mode is not
securely in “4H” mode. Drive straight
ahead while accelerating or decelerating.
If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light continues to blink and the
buzzer sounds when you operate the front
drive control switch knob from the “2WD”
to the “4H” position, this reminds you that
the transfer mode is not in “4H” mode.
Stop the vehicle or reduce the vehicle
speed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph).
(When the ambient temperature is −15_C
(5.0_F) or lower, it needs to be reduced
to below 70 km/h (43 mph).) Operate the
switch knob again.

240

CAUTION
Never operate the front drive control
switch knob if the wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning
before operating.
To shift from “4H” to “2WD”, reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62
mph) and turn the front drive control
switch knob fully counterclockwise.
When you operate the front drive control
switch knob from “4H” to “2WD” with the
vehicle speed at 100 km/h (62 mph) or
higher, the “4HI” indicator light continues
to blink and buzzer sounds. When the
switch knob is returned from “2WD” to
“4H”, the indicator light turns off and the
buzzer stops sounding.
If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light continues to blink when you
operate the front drive control switch knob
from the “4H” to the “2WD” position, this
reminds you that the transfer mode is not
securely in “2WD” mode. Drive straight
ahead while accelerating or decelerating,
or drive forward or backward in a short
distance.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If there is any malfunction within the
brake system, “4HI” or “4LO” indicator
light blinks and the transfer mode may not
be able to be shifted from “4H” to “2WD”.
If the indicator light continues to blink
even if doing so, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. There may be
a trouble in the four−wheel drive system.

CAUTION
Never operate the front drive control
switch knob if the wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning
before operating.
SHIFTING BETWEEN “4H” AND “4L”
To shift between “4H” and “4L”
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop
with the brake pedal held down.
2. Shift the automatic transmission selector lever into “N”.
3. To shift from “4H” to “4L”, push and
turn the front drive control switch knob
fully clockwise.
To shift from “4L” to “4H”, turn the
front drive control switch knob counterclockwise.

4. Maintain this condition until the “4LO”
or “4HI” indicator light comes on.
If the “4LO” indicator light continues to
blink...
If this indicator light continues to blink
when you operate the front drive control
switch knob to the “4H” or “4L” position,
stop the vehicle completely, shift the automatic transmission selector lever securely
into “N” and operate the switch knob
again.

If there is any malfunction in the brake
system or the engine, “4HI” or “4LO” indicator light blinks and the transfer mode
may not be able to be shifted from “4H”
to “4L”.
If the indicator continues to blink even if
doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible. There may be a trouble
in the four−wheel drive system.

INFORMATION
z If the engine coolant temperature is
too low the transfer mode may not
be able to be shifted. When the engine is warmer operate the switch
knob again.
z If the automatic transmission selector lever is moved before the indicator comes on, the transfer mode
may not be shifted completely. In
this case, stop the vehicle completely, return the automatic transmission selector lever to “N” and
operate the switch knob again.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

241

07 04.26

Traction control system
The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of rear
wheels (two−wheel drive models) or 4
wheels (four−wheel drive models) when
the vehicle is started or accelerated on
slippery road surfaces.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE
Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it can operate
when needed.

XS17004a

When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the system automatically
turns on.

CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and
power to the rear wheels (two−wheel
drive models) or 4 wheels (four−wheel
drive models) cannot be maintained,
even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the
vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the road surface is
covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires
or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the
present road conditions.

You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the traction control system is in the self−check
mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
When the traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:

D The system controls the spinning of the

Type A

rear wheels (two−wheel drive models)
or 4 wheels (four−wheel drive models).
At this time, the slip indicator light
blinks.

D You may feel vibration or noise in your

XS17005a

vehicle, caused by operation of the
brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position. If the indicator light
does not come on when the ignition is
turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Type B

242

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

The brake actuator temperature increases
during continuous operation of the following systems under conditions such as on
slippery roads.

D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
If the brake actuator temperature becomes
too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the traction control
system can no longer operate. In this
case, immediately stop your vehicle at a
safe place.
If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
continuous.
(The
continuous
buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.)
At the time, the slip indicator light will
come on and the traction control system
temporarily stops operating in order to
protect the brake actuator. (Although the
traction control system does not operate,
it is no problem to continue driving.) The
system will be automatically restored after
a short time and the slip indicator light
goes off.

To turn on: Briefly push the “VSC OFF”
switch once again.
The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights
will go off.
If the engine is turned off while the
“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights are
on and then restarted, the indicator lights
will turn off automatically.

XS17010a

TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE
(two−wheel drive mode only)
When getting the vehicle out of mud or
newly fallen snow, etc., it may be beneficial to turn off the traction control
system. This system that controls engine performance interferes with the
process of freeing rear wheels.
To turn off: Briefly push the “VSC OFF”
switch.
The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights
will come on.

When you push and hold the “VSC OFF”
switch for 3 seconds or more with the
vehicle stopped, turn off the vehicle stability control system. See “Vehicle stability
control system” on page 248 in this Section.
“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights come
on for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
the indicator lights do not come on when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
Do not drive with the traction control
system continuously turned off.

The vehicle stability control system is always activated, even if the traction control
system is turned off.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

243

07 04.26

“AUTO LSD” system
“VSC OFF” warning light
The light flashing warns that there is a
problem somewhere in the following.

XS17006a

D Traction control system
D Vehicle stability control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
When the system is normal and the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the light will come on and will go off after
a few seconds.
If the “VSC OFF” warning light flashes
while driving, the traction control system
does not work. However, if the brakes
operate normally when applied, it is no
problem to continue your driving.

Type A

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

XS17007a

XS17009

The “AUTO LSD” system aids traction
by using the traction control system to
control engine performance and braking
when one of the rear wheels begins to
spin.

D The warning light does not come on

This system should be used only when
wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or
rough surface.

D The warning light remains on after the

This system is effective in case one of
the rear wheels is spinning.

after the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light flashes while driving
Type B

244

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If the engine is turned off while the
“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights are
on and then restarted, the indicator light
will turn off automatically.

CAUTION
Do not use the “AUTO LSD” system
in conditions other than the above. A
much greater steering effort and more
careful cornering control will be required.

XS17010a

To turn on the system, briefly push the
“VSC OFF” switch.
The “AUTO LSD” is activated under the
following condition. At this time, the
“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights
will come on.

D The driving mode is set in the two−
wheel drive mode (In the four−wheel
drive mode, the system does not
work.)

D Driving at a speed under 100 km/h (62
mph)

To turn off the system, briefly push the
“VSC OFF” switch again and the “AUTO
LSD” and slip indicator lights will go off.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

245

07 04.26

XS17011a

Type A

Make sure the “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights come on under the above condition when you use the “AUTO LSD” system.

If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
continuous.
(The
continuous
buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.)

The slip indicator light blinks when the
system is controlling the spinning of the
rear wheels.

At the time the slip indicator light will
come on and the “AUTO LSD” system
temporarily stops operating in order to
protect the brake actuator. (Although the
“AUTO LSD” system does not operate, it
is no problem to continue driving.) The
system will be automatically restored after
a short time.

The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights
come on for a few seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. If the indicator lights does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position, contact your Toyota
dealer.
The brake actuator temperature increases
during continuous operation of the following systems under conditions such as on
slippery roads.

XS17012a

D “AUTO LSD” system
D Traction control system
If the brake actuator temperature becomes
too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound intermittently to indicate that the “AUTO LSD”
system can no longer operate. In this
case, immediately stop your vehicle at a
safe place.

Type B

246

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

“VSC OFF” warning light
The light flashing warns that there is a
problem somewhere in the following.

XS17006a

D “AUTO LSD” system
D Traction control system
D Vehicle stability control system

CAUTION
Do not drive with the “AUTO LSD”
system continuously turned on.

When the system is normal and the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the light will come on and will go off after
a few seconds.
If the “VSC OFF” warning light flashes
while driving, the “AUTO LSD” system
does not work. However, as the brakes
operate normally when applied, it is no
problem to continue your driving.

Type A

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on

XS17007a

after the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
D The warning light remains on after the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
D The warning light flashes while driving.

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

247

07 04.26

Vehicle stability control
system
The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the
systems such as anti−lock brake system, traction control, engine control,
etc. This system automatically controls
the output of the brakes or engine to
help prevent the vehicle from skidding
when cornering on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel abruptly.
The vehicle stability control system is activated when the vehicle speed is more
than 15 km/h (9 mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the system is in the self−check mode, but does
not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

D Do not rely excessively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even
if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always
drive carefully and attentively to
avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light
blinks and an alarm sounds, special
care should be taken while driving.

D Only use tires of specified size. The

size, manufacturer, brand and tread
pattern for all 4 tires should be the
same. If you use the tires other
than specified, or different type or
size, the vehicle stability control
system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels,
contact your Toyota dealer. (See
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 551 in Section 7−2.)

XS17004a

Type A

XS17005a

Type B

248

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an
alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.

The vehicle stability control system automatically turns off, and the “VSC
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
when the four−wheel drive mode is set.

The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes on
for a few seconds when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position, and then
turns off. If either one of the above conditions applies, the indicator light is illuminated again.

XS17006a

Type A

XS17007a

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

249

07 04.26

To turn on: Briefly push the “VSC OFF”
switch once again.
The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights
will go off.

XS17035a

If the engine is turned off while the “VSC
OFF” and slip indicator lights are on and
then restarted, the indicator lights will turn
off automatically.

XS17006a

When you briefly push the “VSC OFF”
switch, turn off the vehicle stability control
system. See “Traction control system” on
page 242 in this Section.
When getting the vehicle out of mud or
newly fallen snow, etc., it may be beneficial to turn off the vehicle stability
control system. This system that controls engine performance interferes with
the process of freeing rear wheels
(two−wheel drive models) or 4 wheels
(four−wheel drive models).
To turn off: First, push the “VSC OFF”
switch to turn off the traction control
system and check that the “AUTO LSD”
and slip indicator lights come on. Then,
push and hold the “VSC OFF” switch
for 3 seconds or more with the vehicle
stopped.
The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights
will come on.

250

The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights
come on for a few seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. If the indicator lights do not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, contact your Toyota dealer.

Type A

CAUTION

XS17007a

Do not drive with the vehicle stability
control system continuously turned
off.

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Tire pressure warning system
“VSC OFF” warning light
The light flashing warns that there is a
problem somewhere in the following.

D Vehicle stability control system
D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
The light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and
will go off after a few seconds.
If the light flashes while driving, the vehicle stability control system does not
work. However, if the brakes operate normally when applied, it is no problem to
continue your driving.

The tire pressure warning system warns
you that the tire inflation pressure is
low.
The tire pressure warning system is not
a substitute for checking normal tire inflation pressure. Check the tire inflation
pressure with a tire pressure gauge regularly.

XS17013b

CAUTION
The warning system may not activate
immediately if blowout or sudden air
loss should occur.

Type A

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
after the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

XS17014b

D The warning light remains on after the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light flashes while driving.

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

251

07 04.26

The tire pressure warning light comes on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and goes off after a few
seconds. This means the tire pressure
warning system is operating properly. If
the tire inflation pressure becomes low,
the light comes on again. In this case,
adjusting the tire inflation pressure will
turn off the light after 3 to 6 minutes. If
the light comes on after blinking for 1
minute, the tire pressure warning system
is not working properly.
Indicator
status

Meanings

Do this

Tire inflation
pressure is
low

Adjust the
tire
inflation
pressure

ON after
blinking for
1 minute

Tire pressure
warning
system
malfunction

Have the
system
checked at
your Toyota
dealer

252

CAUTION
If the tire pressure warning light
comes on, be sure to observe the
following precautions. Failure to do
so could cause loss of vehicle control
and result in death or serious injury.

D Stop your vehicle in a safe place as

soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.

D If the tire pressure warning light

comes on even after tire inflation
pressure adjustment, it is probable
that you have a flat tire. Check the
tires. If the tire is flat, change to
the temporary spare tire and have
the flat tire repaired by the nearest
Toyota dealer.

D Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-

The tire pressure warning light may turn
on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes
caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn
off the light after 3 to 6 minutes.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset
switch should not turn off the tire pressure
warning light. Adjusting the tire inflation
pressure will turn off the light.
The temporary spare tire is not equipped
with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warning
light will not turn off even though the flat
tire is replaced with the temporary spare
tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with
the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire
inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after 3 to 6 minutes.

ing. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label (tire
and load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label
(tire and load information label), you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS−
tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light) when one
or more of your tires is significantly
under−inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under−inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under−inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning
light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start−ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under−inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

253

07 04.26

TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE
z Do not use liquid sealants for a flat
tire as tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter will be damaged.

XS17018b

z When the tires must be repaired or
replaced, have them repaired or replaced by the nearest Toyota dealer
or an authorized tire dealer. The
tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters will be affected by the
installation or removal of tires.
Type A

XS17017b

Type B

254

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
LIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKING
FOR 1 MINUTE...

D If a window tint that affects the radio

If the tire pressure warning light comes
on after blinking for 1 minute when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the tire pressure warning system is not working properly.

vehicle, in particular around the wheels
or wheel housings.

The system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the
system will work properly.)

D If tires not equipped with tire pressure
warning
used.

valves and

transmitters are

D If the ID code on the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters is not
registered in the tire pressure warning
computer.

The system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the
system will work properly.)

D If electronic devices or facilities using
similar radio
nearby.

wave

frequencies

are

D If a radio set at similar frequencies is
in use in the vehicle.

wave signals is installed.

D If there is a lot of snow or ice on the
D If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.
D If tire chains are used.
If the tire pressure warning light continues
to come on after blinking for 1 minute
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work
properly with some types of tires.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset
switch should not turn off the tire pressure
warning light.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:

NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

255

07 04.26

D Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

D Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

D Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

D Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

256

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS
When replacing the tires and wheels, be
sure to install tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters. ID codes on the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters
are registered in the tire pressure warning
computer. When replacing a tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have
the ID code registered by your Toyota
dealer.
If the ID code is not registered, the system will not work properly. After driving
for 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning
light comes on after blinking for 1 minute
to indicate a system malfunction.

NOTICE
When the tires or tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be
replaced, have them replaced by your
Toyota dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be
affected by the installation or removal
of tires.

XS17016a

TIRE PRESSURE
SWITCH

WARNING

RESET

When initializing the system, the present
tire inflation pressure is stored as standard. The tire pressure warning system
determines decreased air pressure by
comparing the present and the standard
tire inflation pressures. When you change
the set tire inflation pressure, it is necessary to initialize the tire pressure warning
system.

D When rotating the tires on vehicles dif-

fering with front and rear tire inflation
pressures.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D When changing the tire inflation pres-

sure according to the instruction for
traveling speed, load weight or tire
size.

To initialize the system, perform the
following:

If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally and initialization is
performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize
the system again.

XS17018b

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and
turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.
2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed
tires to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (See “Tires” on page
586 in Section 8.)
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.

Type A

4. Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure
warning light blinks slowly three times.
5. Wait for 7 minutes with the ignition
switch “ON”, and then turn the ignition
switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

XS17017b

If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch while the vehicle is moving,
initialization is not performed.

Type B

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

257

07 04.26

Parking brake
If the tire pressure warning light does not
blink slowly three times when you push
and hold the tire pressure warning reset
switch, initialization has failed and the tire
pressure warning system may not work
properly. In this case, initialize the system
again. If initialization cannot be performed,
have the system checked at your Toyota
dealer.

When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

XS17029

To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.

CAUTION
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the
specified level. Otherwise, the
tire
pressure warning light may not come
on even if the tire inflation pressure
is low, or it may come on when the
tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

To set: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while
setting the parking brake.
To release: Depress the parking brake
pedal once again.

Type A

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

XS17030

Type B

258

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Cruise control
The cruise control is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruising speed can be set to any
speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).
Within the limits of the engine’s capabilities, cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades. However, changes in vehicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging the
cruise control, turn the system off
when it is not in use. Make sure the
“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

XS17022

CAUTION

D To help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or
winding roads.

D Be careful about vehicle speed as
it may increase when driving downhill with the cruise control on.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
To turn the cruise control on, press the
“ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicator
light on the instrument panel will come on
to indicate that the cruise control is operational. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button
again turns the system off.
When the system is turned off, cruising
speed must be reset when the cruise control is turned on again.
When the ignition switch is turned off, the
system is also automatically turned off. To
use the cruise control again, press the
“ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

259

07 04.26

XS17023

SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED
5−speed models—The transmission must
be in the “D” position or the shift range
position must be in “4” (fourth range) or
“5” (fifth range) in “S” mode before you
set the cruising speed.
6−speed models—The transmission must
be in the “D” position or the shift range
position must be in between “4” (fourth
range) and “6” (sixth range) in “S” position
before you set the cruising speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “−SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed. If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,
or tap it down for a slower speed. Each
tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h
(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off
the accelerator pedal.

D When vehicle speed falls below 40
km/h (25 mph)

D When vehicle stability control is activated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the set speed, the cruise control is cancelled and the set speed is
erased from memory.

If you need acceleration—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.

The “CRUISE” indicator light remains on
to indicate that the system is still in operation.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control automatically cancels
out other than for the above cases, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.

The cruise control may be temporarily
cancelled by the driver or by the system
itself under certain circumstances. Temporary cancellation allows the set cruising
speed to remain in memory.
The cruise control can be temporarily cancelled by doing the following:

D Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” direction and releasing it

D Depressing the brake pedal

To turn the cruise control off, press the
“ON−OFF”
button.
Make
sure
the
“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL
If the cruise control is temporarily cancelled, the cruising speed can be resumed
by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”
direction.
Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25
mph).

Under certain circumstances, the cruise
control is temporarily cancelled:

260

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

Push the lever up in the “+RES” direction
and hold it. Release the lever when the
desired speed is attained. While the lever
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.

If the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes
when using the cruise control, press the
“ON−OFF” button to turn the system off
and then press it again to turn it on.

However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the “−SET” direction.
RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED
Push the lever down in the “−SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.

If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.

D The indicator light does not come on.
D The indicator light flashes again.
D The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the
lever down in the “−SET” direction.
Even if you downshift from “D” to “S” with
the cruise control on, engine braking will
not be enabled because the cruise control
is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle
speed, reset to a slower speed with the
cruise control lever or depress the brake
pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise
control is cancelled.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

261

07 04.26

262

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 8

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio and hands−free phone systems

Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio/video system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hands−free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

264
265
293
295
296
339
347

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

263

07 04.26

Reference

XS18005a

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
(with compact disc changer controller)

XS18001a

XS18002a

Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗
controller)

Type 3: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗
controller)
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

NOTICE
To clean radio panel, wipe it with a
soft, lint−free cloth (for avoidance of
damage to radio panel’s paint).

264

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Using your audio system—
—Some basics
This section describes some of the basic
features on Toyota audio systems. Some
information may not pertain to your system.
Your audio system works when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.

CAUTION
For vehicle
Canadas:

sold

U.S.A.

and

D Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void
the user’s authority to operate this
device.

D Laser products
D Do not take this unit apart or at-

tempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that
uses a laser pickup to retrieve
information from the surface of
compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the
player or alter any of its parts
since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

D This product utilizes a laser. Use
of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

265

07 04.26

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off.
Push “AM”, “DISC·AUX”, “FM1”, “FM2”,
“AM·SAT”∗ or “LOAD” to turn on that function without pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn
on the compact disc player, a compact
disc must be loaded in the player.
You can turn on the compact disc player
by inserting a compact disc.
You can turn off the compact disc player
by ejecting the compact disc. If the audio
system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you
eject the compact disc. If the radio was
previously on, it will come on again.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
Push “AM”, “DISC·AUX”, “FM1”, “FM2”,
“AM·SAT”∗ or “LOAD” if the system is already on but you want to switch from one
function to another.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

266

LISTENING TO THE XMr SATELLITE
RADIO BROADCAST∗ (type 2 and type
3)
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota
satellite receiver and antenna (or equivalents) must be purchased and installed. A
subscription to the XMr Satellite Radio
service is also necessary.
How to subscribe to an XMr Satellite
Radio
An XMr Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts
provided under a separate subscription.
Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states.

How to subscribe:
You must enter into a separate service
agreement with the XMr Satellite Radio in
order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription fees apply
that are not included in the purchase price
of the vehicle and optional digital satellite
tuner. For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe
to the XMr radio, visit XMr on the web
at www.xmradio.com or call an XMr ’s Listener Care at (800) 967−2346. The XMr
Satellite Radio is solely responsible for
the quality, availability and content of the
satellite radio services provided, which are
subject to the terms and conditions of the
XMr Satellite Radio customer service
agreement.
Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “channel 000” on the radio. For
details, see “Displaying the radio ID” below.
All fees and programming are the responsibility of the XMr Satellite Radio and are
subject to change.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Satellite tuner technology notice:
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded
Type Approval Certificates from XMr Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility
with the services offered by the XMr Satellite Radio.
Displaying the radio ID
Each XMr tuner is identified with a unique
radio ID. You will need the radio ID when
activating XMr service or when reporting
a problem.
If you select the “CH 000” using the
“TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 alphanumeric characters appears. If you select another channel, display of the ID
code is canceled. The channel (000) alternates the display between the radio ID
and the specific radio ID code.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

TONE AND BALANCE
For details about your system’s tone and
balance controls, see the description of
your own system.

Tone

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

How good an audio program sounds to
you is largely determined by the mix of
the treble, midrange (JBL brand audio system∗ only), and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs
usually sound better with different mixes
of treble, midrange, and bass.

To remove an antenna, carefully turn it
counterclockwise.

You can adjust sound characteristics. Different sound characteristics can be recorded for each audio source.
∗:

If a JBL brand audio system is
installed, the “JBL” logo is shown on
the panel.

Balance
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure it is removed before driving your Toyota through an automatic
car wash.
YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER
(type 1)
When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up. The player will play
from track 1 through to the end of the
disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.
8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles
Your compact disc player does not need
an adaptor to play compact disc singles.
Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3
in.) in diameter−smaller than standard
discs.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

267

07 04.26

After you eject a compact disc single, do
not insert a standard 12 cm (4.7 in.) disc
until “DISC” disappears from the display.

NOTICE
Do not use an adaptor for compact
disc singles—it could cause tracking
errors or interfere with the ejection of
compact discs.

XS18007

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH
CHANGER (type 2 and type 3)
When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”
button, wait for the load/eject status light
to turn green, then gently push the disc
in with the label side up. This compact
disc player can store up to six discs. The
player will play from track 1 through to
the end of the disc. Then it will play from
track 1 of the next disc.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

268

NOTICE
z Do not stack up two discs for insertion, or it will cause damage to
the compact disc player or changer.
Insert only one compact disc into
slot at a time.
z Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Controls and features
"Type 1
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

XS18006a

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

269

07 04.26

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
This radio can store one AM and two FM
stations for each button. (The display will
show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)
(Eject button)
Push the compact disc eject button to
eject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
AM
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.
AUDIO/CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)
Each
time
you
push
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob,
the
mode
changes. To adjust the tone and balance,
turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.

270

Switching over the Speed Automatic
Sound Levelizer (ASL) level
ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can
be turned on by turning the knob. In addition, turning the knob allows you to select
from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and
tone settings. The ASL system automatically adjusts volume and tone in accordance with the driving speed. This helps
ensure an optimal listening experience
even if noise levels rise while driving.
DISC·AUX (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a
compact disc.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track number currently being played.
To switch between CD and AUX (external
device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is only available when
AUX adapter is connected to the system.
When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”
will appear on the display.
Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.
“NO DISC”: Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

your

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.
If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,
it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA
data has been inserted. Remove the disc
from the player and insert an MP3/WMA
data disc.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
Ɲ DISC Ɯ
With compact disc changer only—
Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.

FM1 FM2

RAND (Random)

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on
the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”
or “FM2” will appear on the display. This
system allows you to set twelve FM stations, two for each of the preset button.

Compact disc player

MP3/FOLDER (Folder up/down)
To skip up or down to a different folder:
Push
“Ɯ”
or
“Ɲ”
side
of
the
“MP3/FOLDER” several times until the
number of the folder you want to listen to
appears on the display.
To jump to the first file in the first folder:
Push and hold the “Ɲ” side of the button
until you hear a beep.
When playing a disc featuring both audio
data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio
data (CD−DA) is played.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.

There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
With compact disc changer only—
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

271

07 04.26

MP3/WMA player

RPT (Repeat)

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—
you can either listen to all of the files on
the compact discs in random order. You
can also listen to the files in a single
folder in random order.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can
repeat a single file or an entire folder.

To randomly play the files in a folder:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display.
To randomly play all of the files on the
compact disc:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “
” will
appear on the display and the player will
play all of the files on the disc in random
order. To turn off the random playback
feature, push this button again.

272

There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
” will appear on the display. When
“
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
With compact disc changer only—
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

Repeating a file:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the file is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the file ends, it will repeat automatically.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Repeating a folder:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all of the files in the folder. When the last
file in the folder ends, the folder will repeat from the beginning. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SCAN

Compact disc player

MP3/WMA player

Radio

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

There are two scan features—you can either scan the files in a folder on a specific disc or scan the first file of all the
folder.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appear on the display
and the player will scan all the tracks on
the disc you are listening to. To stop
scanning, push this button again. If the
player scanned all the tracks on the disc,
it will stop scanning.

Scanning the files on a folder:
Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”
will appear on the display and the player
will scan all the files in the folder you are
listening to. To select a file, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the
disc have been scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first file of all the folders:
Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
“
” will appear on the display and
the player will scan the first file of the
next folder. To select a folder, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the folders have
been scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.

You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear
on the display and the player will scan the
first track of the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player
has scanned all the discs, it will stop
scanning.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

273

07 04.26

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

MP3/WMA player

TEXT

Radio

Use this button to file up or down to a
different file.

Compact disc player

In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to
find the station after that.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” several times until the file you
want to listen to appears on the display.
If you want to return to the beginning of
the current file, push the “Ɲ” side of the
button one time.

Compact disc player

ST (Stereo reception) display

Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

274

This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

MP3/WMA player
This button is used to change the display
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the
MP3/WMA file is playing. The display
changes in the order from the elapsed
time to folder name to file name to album
title to track title to artist name, then back
to the elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while an
MP3/WMA file that does not contain text
data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on
the display.
If the entire text data is not displayed,
push and hold it until you hear a beep.
The rest of the text data will appear.
TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)
Radio
Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the frequency. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
MP3/WMA

player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to
file down.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

275

07 04.26

"Type 2
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

XS18003a

276

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
This radio can store one AM and two FM
stations for each button. (The display will
show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)
XMr Satellite Radio∗—
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio channels.
To preset a channel to a button: Tune in
the desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the channel to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the button for the channel you want. The preset
button number and channel number will
appear on the display.
This radio can store three XMr channels
for each button. (The display will show
“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push
“AM·SAT”∗ button.)
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or all
compact discs.
To eject the current compact disc, push
and release the compact disc eject button.
To eject a specific disc, push “Ɲ” (preset
button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset button 4) until the
number of the disc you want to eject is
displayed. Push and release the eject button.
To eject all discs at a time, press and
hold the eject button until you hear a
beep. The last compact disc played before
pushing the button will be ejected first. If
the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
AM·SAT (AM band and XMr Satellite Radio∗)
Push the “AM·SAT”∗ button to turn on the
radio and select the AM or XMr band.
“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will appear on the display.
Error messages
If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,
your audio system will display following
error messages.
“ANTENNA”:

D The XMr antenna is not connected.

Check whether the XMr antenna cable
is attached securely.

D A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or

the surrounding antenna cable. See a
Toyota certified dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

277

07 04.26

“UPDATING”:

D You have not subscribed to the XMr

Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact the XMr Satellite Radio for
subscription information. When a contact is canceled, you can choose the
“CH000” and all free−to−air channels.

D The premium channel you selected is

not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does
not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the
premium channel, contact the XMr Satellite Radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XMr signal is too
weak at the current location. Wait until
your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.
“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio
or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.
“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is
not broadcasting any programming. Select
another channel.

278

“− − −”: The channel you selected is no
longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds
until the radio returns to the previous
channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.

The XMr Listener Care Center is also
available on the phone, please call (800)
967−2346 during the following hours:
Monday—Saturday: 6 a.m.—2 a.m. Eastern Time
Sunday: 8 a.m.—8 p.m. Eastern Time

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can
be turned on by turning the knob. In addition, turning the knob allows you to select
from LOW, MID and HIGH volume and
tone settings. The ASL system automatically adjusts volume and tone in accordance with the driving speed. This helps
ensure an optimal listening experience
even if noise levels rise while driving.

∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

AUDIO/CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)
Each
time
you
push
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob,
the
mode
changes. To adjust the tone and balance,
turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed Automatic
Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a
compact disc.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
To switch between CD and AUX (external
device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is only available when
AUX adapter is connected to the system.
When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”
will appear on the display.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Error messages

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

MP3/WMA player

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.

Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.

To skip up or down to a different folder:
Push
“Ɯ”
or
“Ɲ”
side
of
the
“TYPE/FOLDER” several times until the
number of the folder you want to listen to
appears on the display.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

FM1 FM2

“NO DISC”: Eject the disc. Set the disc
again.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc. Set the disc
again.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

your

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,
it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA
data has been inserted. Remove the disc
from the player and insert an MP3/WMA
data disc.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

To jump to the first file in the first folder:
Push and hold the “Ɲ” side of the button
until you hear a beep.
When playing a disc featuring both audio
data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio
data (CD−DA) is played.

TYPE/FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)
XMr Satellite Radio∗—
When you push the “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of
the “TYPE/FOLDER” button while receiving
a XMr channel, the current channel category appears on the display.
When the channel category appears, push
either
“Ɲ”
or
“Ɯ”
side
of
the
“TYPE/FOLDER” button to switch to the
next or previous category.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

279

07 04.26

LOAD

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc player. This
player can store up to six discs.

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.

To load one compact disc only, quickly
push and release the button. When the
indicators on both sides of the slot turn
green, insert a compact disc. After the
disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will
close.

RAND (Random)

There are two random playback features—
you can either listen to all of the files on
the compact discs in random order. You
can also listen to the files in a single
folder in random order.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
To load multiple compact discs, push and
hold the button (until you hear a beep
when the audio system is on). When the
indicators on both sides of the slot turn
green, insert a compact disc. After the
disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will
close. After a few seconds, the shutter
will automatically open again and the indicators will turn green so the next disc can
be inserted. The same process can be
applied for loading the rest of the discs.
If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”
will appear on the display.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.

280

Compact disc player
There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

RPT (Repeat)

MP3/WMA player

SCAN

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can
repeat a single file or an entire folder.

Radio

There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

Repeating a file:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the file is playing.
” will appear on the display. When
“
the file ends, it will repeat automatically.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Repeating a folder:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all of the files in the folder. When the last
file in the folder ends, the folder will repeat from the beginning. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

281

07 04.26

To scan the preset channels:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the
display. The radio will tune in the next
preset channel up the band, stay there for
5 seconds, and then move to the next
preset channel. To stop scanning, push
this button again.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:
Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
” will appear on the display and
“
the player will scan the first file of the
next folder. To select a folder, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the folders have
been scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.

To scan the currently selected channel
category:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” appears on the display. The
radio will find the next channel in the
same channel category up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then scan again.
To stop scanning, push this button again.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear
on the display and the player will scan the
first track of the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the changer has scanned all the discs, it will stop
scanning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

Compact disc player
There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

282

MP3/WMA player
There are two scan features—you can either scan the files in a folder on a specific disc or scan the first file of all the
folder.
Scanning the files on a folder:
Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”
will appear on the display and the player
will scan all the files in the folder you are
listening to. To select a file, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the
disc have been scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.

Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to
find the station after that.
XMr Satellite Radio∗—
To select the next channel within the current channel category, push the “Ɯ” or
“Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.
Repeat until a desired channel is found.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Compact disc player

TEXT

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

XMr Satellite Radio∗1 —

This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.

Push
“Ɯ”
or
“Ɲ”
side
of
the
“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of
the track you want to listen to appears on
the display. If you want to return to the
beginning of the current track, quickly
push the down side of the button one
time.
MP3/WMA player
Use this button to file up or down to a
different file.
Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” several times until the file you
want to listen to appears on the display.
If you want to return to the beginning of
the current file, push the “Ɲ” side of the
button one time.
ST (Stereo reception) display
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

When you push the “TEXT” button, the
display changes as follows:
CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM
TITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME
Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be
displayed. (Some information will not be
fully displayed.)
The message display will be canceled if
any button that affects the display is
pushed.
If there is no song/program title or artist
name/feature associated with the channel
at that time, “− − − − −” will appear on the
display.
This XMr tuner supports “Audio Services”
(Music and Talk) of only XMr Satellite
Radio and “Text Information”∗2 linked to
the respective audio services.
∗1 :

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

∗2 :

Text Information includes, Channel
Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
Category Name.

To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

283

07 04.26

MP3/WMA player

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

This button is used to change the display
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text
data.

Radio

To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the
MP3/WMA file is playing. The display
changes in the order from the elapsed
time to folder name to file name to album
title to track title to artist name, then back
to the elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while an
MP3/WMA file that does not contain text
data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on
the display.
If the entire text data is not displayed,
push and hold it until you hear a beep.
The rest of the text data will appear.

284

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the frequency. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
XMr Satellite Radio∗—
Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the channel. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the channel.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

MP3/WMA

player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to
file down.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

"Type 3
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

XS18004a

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

285

07 04.26

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
This radio can store one AM and two FM
stations for each button. (The display will
show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)
XMr Satellite Radio∗—
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio channels.
To preset a channel to a button: Tune in
the desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the channel to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.

286

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
(Eject button)

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
AM·SAT (AM band and XMr Satellite Radio∗)
Push the “AM·SAT”∗ button to turn on the
radio and select the AM or XMr band.
“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will appear on the display.
Error messages
If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,
your audio system will display following
error messages.
“ANTENNA”:

D The XMr antenna is not connected.

Check whether the XMr antenna cable
is attached securely.

D A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or

the surrounding antenna cable. See a
Toyota certified dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

“UPDATING”:

D You have not subscribed to the XMr

D The premium channel you selected is

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.

∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

Switching over the Speed Automatic
Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

287

07 04.26

Error messages

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

MP3/WMA player

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.

Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.

To skip up or down to a different folder:
Push
“Ɯ”
or
“Ɲ”
side
of
the
“TYPE/FOLDER” several times until the
number of the folder you want to listen to
appears on the display.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

FM1 FM2

“NO DISC”: Eject the disc. Set the disc
again.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc. Set the disc
again.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

your

288

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

LOAD

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc player. This
player can store up to six discs.

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random playback features—
you can either listen to all of the files on
the compact discs in random order. You
can also listen to the files in a single
folder in random order.

289

07 04.26

RPT (Repeat)

MP3/WMA player

SCAN

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can
repeat a single file or an entire folder.

Radio

There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

290

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear
on the display and the player will scan the
first track of the next disc. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the changer has scanned all the discs, it will stop
scanning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

Compact disc player
There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

291

07 04.26

Compact disc player

TEXT

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

XMr Satellite Radio∗1 —

This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.

292

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

∗2 :

Text Information includes, Channel
Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
Category Name.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Audio remote controls
(steering switches)
MP3/WMA player

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

This button is used to change the display
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text
data.

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the frequency. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
XMr Satellite Radio∗—

XS18008a

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the channel. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the channel.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

MP3/WMA

player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to
file down.

Some parts of the audio system can be
adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. Volume control switch
2. “MODE” switch
3. “ƜƝ” switch

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

293

07 04.26

1. Volume control switch
Push “+” side to increase the volume. The
volume continues to increase while the
switch is being pushed.
Push “−” side to decrease the volume.
The volume continues to decrease while
the switch is being pushed.
2. “MODE” switch
Push “MODE” switch to select an audio
mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to
use.
To turn the audio system on, push the
“MODE” switch.
To turn the audio system off, push and
hold the “MODE” switch until the system
turns off.
3. “ƜƝ” switch

To seek a station:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Do this
again to find the next station. If you push
the switch on either side during the seek
mode, seeking will be cancelled.

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until the disc you want to listen to
is set.

To step up or down the frequency, push
and hold the switch even after you hear
a beep. When you release from the
switch, the radio will begin seeking up or
down for a station. Do this again to find
the next station.

To select a desired file:
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch until the file you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current file, push
the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

To select a desired folder:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this
until the folder you want to listen to is
set.

To select a preset channel, push the “Ɯ”
or “Ɲ” side of the switch. Repeat until a
desired channel is found.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

Radio

Compact disc player

This switch has the following features—

Use this switch to skip up or down to a
different track in either direction.

To select a preset station:
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch. Do this again to select
the next preset station.

294

With compact disc changer only—

MP3/WMA player

With compact disc changer only—
To select a desired disc:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this
until the disc you want to listen to is set.

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch until the track you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current track, push
the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

AUX adapter
If you install an audio system other than
a genuine audio system, you will not be
able to use the AUX adapter.

NOTICE

XS18009

To reduce the chance of audio noise,
do not leave mini plug connected to
AUX adapter without auxiliary playback device connected.

An AUX adapter is installed on the instrument panel.
By inserting a mini plug into the AUX
adapter, you can listen to music from a
portable audio device through the vehicle’s
speaker system.
To use the AUX adapter, switch to the
AUX mode (external device mode) by
pressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When the
AUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appear
on the display. To adjust the volume, turn
the “PWR·VOL” knob.
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet or cigarette
lighter, noise may occur during playback.
If this happens, use the power source of
the portable audio device.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

295

07 04.26

Rear seat entertainment system—
The rear seat entertainment system consists of the following components.
1. Power outlet main switch
2. Front audio system
3. DVD player
4. Rear seat entertainment system display
5. Rear seat entertainment system controller
6. A/V input adapter
7. Power outlet

XS18030b

Separate seats type

296

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

The rear seat entertainment system consists of the following components.
1. Power outlet main switch
2. Front audio system
3. DVD player
4. Rear seat entertainment system display
5. Rear seat entertainment system controller
6. Power outlet
7. A/V input adapter

XS18031b

Bench seat type
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

297

07 04.26

—Display
The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy
audio and DVD video separately from the
front audio system.
The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated when the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
The rear passengers can enjoy DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dts−CD
and MP3.
The rear seat entertainment system can
play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD
text, dts−CD or MP3 only when a disc is
loaded in the DVD player.
You can enjoy videos and sound when
your personal audio system is connected
to the input terminal adapter. For details,
refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment
system with a wireless headphone. The
wireless headphone can be used within
rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the
headphone will mute. For details, refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions.

You can purchase a wireless headphone
at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

D Do not operate a motor vehicle

while using headphones. Doing so
may cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.

XS18017

D With DVD player:
Conversational speech on some
DVDs is recorded at a low volume
to emphasize the impact of sound
effects. If you adjust the volume
assuming that the conversations
represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may
be startled by louder sound effects
or when you change to a different
audio source. Be sure to adjust the
volume with this in mind.

To open the display, push the lock release
button.

Make sure the volume is not increased, before you turn on the
headphone.

With some wireless headphone generally
available in the market, it may be difficult
to catch sound properly. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine wireless
headphone.

298

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

NOTICE
z Benzene or alkaline solutions may
damage the coated surface of the
screen.

XS18018

XS18019

z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not turn on the rear
seat entertainment system longer
than necessary when the engine is
not running.

INFORMATION
Pull the display down to an easily viewable angle (between 90_ and 125_)

NOTICE
The screen should be cleaned with a
dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed
by hand or wiped with a hard cloth,
the surface of the screen may be
scratched.

To close, push the display up until you
hear a click.
The illumination of the screen is automatically turned off when the display is
closed. However, the rear seat entertainment system is not turned off.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, close the display when
it is not in use.

z Wipe off fingerprints on the surface
of the display using a glass cleaning cloth.
z The displayed image may become
darker and moving images may be
slightly distorted when the display
is cold.
z When you look at the screen
through polarized material such as
polarized sunglasses, the screen
may be dark and hard to see. If so,
change the angle of the screen,
look at the screen from different
angles, adjust the screen settings
on the “Display” screen, or take off
your sunglasses.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

299

07 04.26

—Rear seat entertainment
system controller
The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated with the rear seat entertainment system controller and buttons on the
DVD player unit. The system cannot be
operated by touching the switches on the
screen directly.

CAUTION

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER
(for new vehicle owners)
A battery is already set in the controller with an insulating sheet, which prevents the battery from being discharged. Before using the controller,
remove the insulating sheet according
to the following procedure.

Z17448

Do not disassemble or modify the
controller. It may cause an accident,
fire or electric shock.

NOTICE
Keep the controller away from direct
sunlight, high heat and high humidity.
These conditions could cause the
case to deform or the battery to explode or leak.

300

1. Remove the cover of the controller
as shown.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

USING THE CONTROLLER
To use the rear seat entertainment system controller, direct the signal output
portion of the controller to the signal
reception portion of the rear seat entertainment system display.

Z17449

The controller does not operate properly
when the signal reception portion of the
display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION
2. Remove the insulating sheet.

XS18020

To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, stow the controller in
the seatback pocket when it is not in
use.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

301

07 04.26

NOTICE
Observe the followings, otherwise the
controller may be damaged.
z Do not drop or strongly knock the
controller against hard objects.
z Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the controller.
z Do not leave the controller exposed
to high temperatures (such as on
the instrument panel) for a long
time.

302

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Control buttons
"Controller
1. “DVD” button
This button turns on the DVD mode.
2. “VIDEO” button
This button causes the display to use
the video signal from an external video
device.
3. “OFF” button
This button turns off the rear seat entertainment system.
4. Joystick

Z18004y

This joystick selects a control switch,
mode switch on the screen or the
menu for the disc.
5. “ENT” button
This button inputs the selected switch
or the selected menu for the disc.
6. “FOLDER

” button

This button selects a desired folder.
7. “FOLDER

” button

This button selects a desired folder.
8. “

” button

This button fast forwards a screen
when the DVD player is operated.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

303

07 04.26

9. “

” button

This button stops a screen when the
DVD player is operated.
10. “SET UP” button
This button indicates the initial set up
screen when the DVD player is operated.
11. “MENU” button
This button indicates the menu screen
for DVD video when the DVD player is
operated.
12. “AUDIO” button
This button indicates the changing audio screen when the DVD player is
operated.
13. “SUB TITLE” button
This button indicates the changing subtitle screen when the DVD player is
operated.
14. “DISPLAY” button
This button adjusts the color, tone,
contrast and brightness of the screen.
15. “SIZE” button
This button changes the display mode
when the DVD player is operated or
the video mode is on.

304

16. “ANGLE” button

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

This button selects the angle of the
screen when the DVD player is operated.
17. “SEARCH” button
This button indicates the title search
screen when the DVD player is operated.
18. “TOP MENU” button
This button indicates the title selection
screen for DVD video when the DVD
player is operated.
19. “

” button

This button reverse a screen when the
DVD player is operated.
20. “

” button

This button plays or pauses a screen
when the DVD player is operated.
21. “TRACK/CHAPTER

For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed battery or components.

NOTICE
z When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.
z Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.

” button

This button selects track/chapter.
22. “TRACK/CHAPTER

” button

This button selects track/chapter.
23. “OPTION” button
This button indicates the control
switches on the screen when the DVD
player is operated.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

NOTICE
z Be sure that the positive side and
negative side of the controller battery should be faced correctly.

Z17448

Z17458

z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause rust.
z Do not touch or move any components inside of the controller, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
of the controller battery insertion.

Replace the battery according to the following procedure:
1. Remove the cover of the controller as
shown.

2. Remove the discharged batteries and
put in the new batteries as shown.
Install the cover.

z Close the battery case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the
controller operates properly. If the controller still does not operate properly, contact
your Toyota dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

305

07 04.26

"Buttons on the DVD player unit
1. “DVD” button
This button turns on the rear seat entertainment system and selects the
mode.
2. “VIDEO” button
This button causes the display to use
the video signal from an external video
device.
3. “

TRACK·CHAPTER

” button

This button skips directly to a desire
track or chapter.

XS18021

4. “

” button

This button plays or pauses a screen
when the DVD player is operated.
5. “OPTION” button
This button indicates the control
switches on the screen when the DVD
player is operated.
6. Joystick/“ENT” button
The joystick selects a control switch
mode switch on the screen or the
menu for the disc.
The “ENT” button inputs the selected
switch or the selected menu for the
disc.

306

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Turning the rear seat
entertainment system on and
off
7. “DISC” indicator light

To turn on the system, push the “DVD”
button or “VIDEO” button.

This light indicates that the disc is
loaded.
8. “

When the “DVD” button is pushed, the
disc load screen changes to the DVD
player operation screen.

” button

This button ejects a disc.

Z17453

When the “VIDEO” button is pushed, the
images and sounds from the personal audio machine are output.
The “DVD” button is effective only when a
disc is inserted.

Controller

XS18022

DVD player unit

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

307

07 04.26

—Front audio system
operation
The rear DVD player can be operated
through the front audio system.

Z17455

To turn off the system, push the “OFF”
button.
When the front audio system is turned off,
the rear audio system and the DVD player
will be turned off simultaneously.

308

Z18033

Vehicles with navigation system—The rear
seat
entertainment
system
can
be
switched ON and OFF by pushing the
“Rear” switch on the front audio system.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Rear system lock
The audio system controls in the instrument panel allow the operation of the rear
seat entertainment system by rear seat
passengers to be disabled.
Turning on the rear system lock prevents
small children from using the remote controller or operation panel of the DVD player unit to operate the rear seat entertainment system during driving.
Turn the audio system on. Push the
“AUDIO CONTROL” knob repeatedly until
“RSE” is displayed. Then, turn the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob until “ON” is displayed,
and then push the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob.

Z18031E

Z17443

Vehicles with navigation system—
Push the “INFO” button to change the
screen to “Screen Setting”.
Push the “ON” switch on the “Screen
Setting” screen to turn on the “Rear
system lock”. Then push “OK”.

When the rear system lock is on and any
button is pushed on the remote controller
or the operation panel, the screen shown
above is displayed for approximately 6
seconds.
Even when the rear system lock is turned
on during play mode, the images and
sounds continue without interruption.
The condition of the rear system lock is
maintained, even when the ignition switch
is turned off.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

309

07 04.26

—DVD player
If a disc which is not playable is inserted,
“DISC CHECK” will also appear on the
screen. For appropriate discs for this player, see “Audio/video system operating
hints” on page 339 in this Section.

The DVD player can play audio CDs/
MP3 CDs, DVD video discs, CD texts,
dts−CDs and video CDs.
For appropriate discs for this player, see
“Audio/video system operating hints” on
page 339 in this Section.
The DVD player works when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

The player will play the track or chapter,
and it will play from the beginning of the
track or chapter again after it reaches the
end.

XS18023

To turn on the DVD player, a disc must
be loaded in the player.

CAUTION

To turn off the player, eject the disc.
Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.

INSERTING THE DISC

If “DISC CHECK” appears on the
screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,
damaged or it was inserted upside down.
Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

“DISC” indicator light turns on while the
disc is loaded.

If “REGION ERROR” appears on the
screen: It indicates that the DVD region
code is not set properly.
If “DVD ERROR” appears on the
screen: There is a problem inside the
player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

310

Insert the compact disc into the slot
with the label side up.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot
be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”
and disc number appear on the screen.

This product is a class 1 laser product. Use of controls or adjustments
or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not open covers and do not repair
by yourself. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the DVD player. Do not insert
anything other than a disc into the
slot.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—DVD player operation
switches
8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles
Your compact disc player needs an adaptor to play compact disc singles. Compact
disc singles are about 8 cm (3 in.) in diameter−smaller than standard discs.

XS18024

EJECTING THE DISC
Push the “

” button.

Z17461

The DVD player can be operated with the
controller buttons directly.
1. “DVD” button
2. “SET UP” button
3. “MENU” button
4. “AUDIO” button
5. “SUB TITLE” button
6. “ANGLE”

button

7. “SIZE” button
8. “SEARCH” button
9. “TOP MENU” button
10. “

”, “

” and “

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

” buttons

311

07 04.26

The player can also be operated with the
switches on the screen.

Z17456

Controller

XS18025

DVD player unit

312

To operate the switches on the screen,
select the switch by the joystick and push
the “ENT” button. You cannot select the
switches on the screen by touching them
directly.
When the switch is selected by the joystick, the outline of the switch changes to
blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the
switch will be highlighted in green.

Z17462

Controller

XS18026

DVD player unit

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES
ON AND OFF
To turn on the operation switches, push
the “OPTION” button on the controller.

Z18008

Z17402

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Z17401

Second
switch)

page

(DVD

video

Top page (video CD)

Z18009

operation

Second page (video CD)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

313

07 04.26

There are operation switches on the “Page
1” and “Page 2” screens.
To change the screen, push the “Page 1”
or “Page 2” switch on the screen.

Z17404

Z18010

If “ ” appears on the screen when
you select a switch, it indicates that
the switch cannot work.

On the screen

Z17462

Controller

314

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—DVD player operation

XS18026

NOTE: The playback condition of some
DVD video discs may be determined by
the DVD video software producer. This
DVD player plays discs as the software
producer intended. Therefore, some
functions may not work properly. Be
sure to read the instruction manual for
the DVD video disc separately provided.
For detailed information about DVD
video discs, see “—DVD video disc
information” on page 335 in this
Section.
Precautions for DVD video discs

DVD player unit

To turn off the switches on the screen,
push the “OPTION” button on the controller once again or push the “Hide Buttons”
on the screen.

When recording on a DVD video, video
CD or audio tracks may not record in
some cases while the menu is displayed.
As audio will not play in this case, verify
that the video tracks are playing and then
activate playback.

CAUTION
Conversational speech on some DVDs
is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects.
If you adjust the volume assuming
that the conversations represent the
maximum volume level available for
the DVD, you may be startled by
louder sound effects or when you
change to a different audio source.
Loud sounds may have a significant
impact on the human body or pose a
driving hazard. Keep this in mind
when you adjust the volume.

The title/chapter number and playback
time display may not appear while playing
back certain DVD video discs.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

315

07 04.26

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE
DISC ON OR OFF
To turn on the menu screen for the disc,
push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switch
on the screen. You can also turn on the
menu screen by pushing the “MENU” or
“TOP MENU” button on the controller.
For the operation of the menu screen, see
the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Z18011

316

Z18012

You can select the menu for the disc by
the joystick and the “ENT” button on the
controller.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

OPERATING THE “
AND “

”, “

”

” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

“
” switch/button: Push this switch/button to pause the disc or to cancel the
pause and return to normal playing.
“ ” switch/button: This switch/button
stops a screen when the DVD player is
operated.
“

Z18013

” and “

” switches/buttons: Push

” or “
” switch/button
and hold the “
to fast forward or reverse. When you release the switch/button, the DVD player
will resume playing.

Z17409

Push the “
” switch/button while pausing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion
video replay.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

317

07 04.26

SKIPPING
SCREEN

THE

PREDETERMINED

SELECTING THE TITLE
To display the searching title screen, push
the “Search” switch on the screen. You
can also display the screen by pushing
the “SEARCH” button on the controller.

To skip to the predetermined screen, push
the “Return” switch. The DVD player starts
playing from the beginning of the predetermined screen.
For further details of the predetermined
screen, see the separate manual for the
DVD disc.

Z17410

318

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,
and then the changing subtitle language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”
button on the controller.

Z17411

Select the title number by using the
joystick and push the “ENT” button to
enter the number. The player starts playing disc for that title number. The selected
title number will appear on the screen.

Z17413

Push the “Back” switch to return to the
menu screen.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

319

07 04.26

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE
Push the “Audio” switch on the screen
and then the changing audio language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “AUDIO” button
on the controller.

Z17414

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,
another language stored on the disc is selected.

Z17415

To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide
Buttons” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
The selected subtitle language will appear
on the screen.

320

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN
Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,
and then the changing angle screen will
appear. You can also display the screen
by pushing the “ANGLE” button on the
controller.

Z17416

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,
another language stored on the disc is selected.

Z17417

To turn off the audio language screen,
push the “Hide Buttons” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
The selected audio language will appear
on the screen.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

321

07 04.26

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING
Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,
and then the initial setting screen will appear. You can also display the screen by
pushing the “SET UP” button on the controller. You can change the initial setting.

Z17413

The angle can be selected for discs that
”
are multi−angle compatible when the “
mark appears on the screen. Each time
you push the “Angle” switch, the angle
changes. The angle number which you
can select will appear on the screen.

After the setting is done, the player plays
from the beginning of the chapter or the
track.

Z17419

To turn off the screen, push the “Hide
Buttons” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.

322

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Z18017

Setup Menu screen

There are initial setting switches on the
“Setup Menu” screen.
After you change the initial setting, push
the “Enter” switch. The initial setting
switch will be turned off and return to the
picture previously.
When the “Default” switch is pushed, all
menus are initialized.

Z18019

Z18018

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE
Push the “Audio Language” switch on the
“Setup Menu” and the “Select Audio
Lang.” screen appears.
Select the language you want to hear by
pushing the appropriate switch on the
screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find the language you want
to hear, push the “Others” switch. The
“Enter Audio Lang. Code” screen will appear.

To select an audio language, use the joystick to enter the appropriate 4−digit language code. For details of the language
codes, see the language code list.
If a code which is not on the list is entered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the
“Incorrect Code” screen will appear. Enter
the code of the language you want to hear
again.
To return to the “Select Audio Lang.”
screen, push the “Back” switch.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

323

07 04.26

Z18020

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”
screen, push the “Subtitle Language”
switch on the “Setup Menu” screen.
Select the language you want to read by
pushing the appropriate switch on the
screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find the language you want
to read, push the “Others” switch. The
“Enter Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will appear.

324

Z18021

Z18022

To enter the code of the language you
want to read, use the joystick to enter the
appropriate 4−digit language code. For details about the language codes, see the
language code list.
Push the “ENT” button on the controller. If
numbers which are not on the list are entered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the
“Incorrect code” screen will appear. Enter
the language code you want to read
again.
To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”
screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE
To display the “Select DVD Lang.” screen,
push the “DVD Language” switch on the
“Setup Menu” screen.
Select the language you want to read on
the screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to
read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter
DVD Lang. Code” screen will appear.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Z18023

Z18024

Z18025

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR
OFF

SETTING
LEVEL
RESTRICTIONS

The angle mark can be turned on for
discs that are multi−angle compatible.

You can restrict the play back screen by
setting the viewer restrictions. You can
prevent the restriction with a password.
Some discs do not supply a restriction.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”
switch on the screen, the angle mark
turns on or off alternately.

VIEWER

To set the level of viewer restriction, push
the “Parental Lock” switch on the “Setup
Menu” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”
screen will appear.

To return to the “Select DVD Lang.”
screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

325

07 04.26

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE
Pushing the “SIZE” button on the controller causes the display modes to change
sequentially as follows:

Z18026

Enter the password and push the “ENT”
button. The “Select Restriction Level”
screen will appear.
You cannot change the setting without inputting the password. When you forget or
change the password, push the “A” side
of the joystick ten times to initialize the
password.

Z18027

Normal

Wide1

Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller
the level number, the stricter the age limit.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
“Setup Menu” screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
push the “Back” switch.

326

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Wide2

07 04.26

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

0125

Aymara

0610

Fiji

Code

Language

0126

Azerbaijani

0615

Faroese

0514

English

0201

Bashkir

0625

Frisian

1001

Japanese

0205

Byelorussian

0701

Irish

0618

French

0207

Bulgarian

0704

Scots−Gaelic

0405

German

0208

Bihari

0712

Galician

0920

Italian

0209

Bislama

0714

Guarani

0519

Spanish

0214

Bengali

0721

Gujarati

2608

Chinese

0215

Tibetan

0801

Hausa

1412

Dutch

0218

Breton

0809

Hindi

1620

Portuguese

0301

Catalan

0818

Croatian

1922

Swedish

0315

Corsican

0821

Hungarian

1821

Russian

0319

Czech

0825

Armenian

1115

Korean

0325

Welsh

0901

Interlingua

0512

Greek

0401

Danish

0905

Interlingue

0101

Afar

0426

Bhutani

0911

Inupiak

0102

Abkhazian

0515

Esperanto

0914

Indonesian

0106

Afrikaans

0520

Estonian

0919

Icelandic

0113

Amharic

0521

Basque

0923

Hebrew

0118

Arabic

0601

Persian

1009

Yiddish

0119

Assamese

0609

Finnish

1023

Javanese

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

327

07 04.26

1101

Georgian

1320

Maltese

1911

Slovak

1111

Kazakh

1325

Burmese

1912

Slovenian

1112

Greenlandic

1401

Nauru

1913

Samoan

1113

Cambodian

1405

Nepali

1914

Shona

1114

Kannada

1415

Norwegian

1915

Somali

1119

Kashmiri

1503

Occitan

1917

Albanian

1121

Kurdish

1513

(Afan) Oromo

1918

Serbian

1125

Kirghiz

1518

Oriya

1919

Siswati

1201

Latin

1601

Punjabi

1920

Sesotho

1214

Lingala

1612

Polish

1921

Sundanese

1215

Laothian

1619

Pashto, Pushto

1923

Swahili

1220

Lithuanian

1721

Quechua

2001

Tamil

1222

Latvian

1813

Rhaeto−Romance

2005

Telugu

1307

Malagasy

1814

Kirundi

2007

Tajik

1309

Maori

1815

Romanian

2008

Thai

1311

Macedonian

1823

Kinyarwanda

2009

Tigrinya

1312

Malayalam

1901

Sanskrit

2011

Turkmen

1314

Mongolian

1904

Sindhi

2012

Tagalog

1315

Moldavian

1907

Sangho

2014

Setswana

1318

Marathi

1908

Serbo−Croatian

2015

Tonga

1319

Malay

1909

Sinhalese

2018

Turkish

328

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

2019

Tsonga

2020

Tatar

2023

Twi

2111

Ukrainian

2118

Urdu

2126

Uzbek

2209

Vietnamese

2215

Volapük

2315

Wolof

2408

Xhosa

2515

Yoruba

2621

Zulu

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” button on the controller. The status screen
will appear on the screen.

Z17464

SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK
To select the chapter/track, push the
“CHAPTER/TRACK
”
button
or
” button on the
“CHAPTER/TRACK
controller until the number of the
chapter/track you want to select appears
on the screen.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

329

07 04.26

—DVD player operation (video
CD/audio CD/CD text/MP3)

Z17489

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER
(video CD only)
Push the “Select Number” switch and then
the disc menu number search screen will
appear. You can also display the screen
by pushing the “SEARCH” button on the
controller.

Z17433

Z18009

Enter the disc menu number by using the
joystick and push the “ENT” button. The
player starts playing the disc from the entered disc menu number. The entered disc
menu number will appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
menu screen.

OPERATING THE “
”, “
” AND
“
” SWITCHES (video CD only)
“
” switch: Push this switch to pause
the disc or to cancel the pause and return
to normal playing.
“
” and “
” switches: Push this
switch to fast forward or reverse. If you
want to return to the beginning of the current track, release the switch.
Video CD only—
Push the “

” switch/button while paus-

ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion
video replay.

330

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Z17435

Z17490

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video
CD only)

CHANGING MENU
(video CD only)

TRACK

CHANGING
A
MULTIPLEX
TRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the “Return” switch to turn on the
menu screen for the disc.

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”
switch while the disc menu is displayed.
The next or previous page will appear on
the screen.

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a
multiplex transmission. The mode changes
from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back
to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”
switch.

For the operation of the menu screen, see
the manual for the video CD.

PAGE

Z18006

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”
switch while the player is playing video.
The next or previous track will be
searched and played.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

331

07 04.26

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video
CD only)

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” button on the controller. The control screen
will appear on the screen.

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen
and then the initial setting screen will appear. You can also display the screen by
pushing the “SET UP” button on the controller. You can change the initial setting.
(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”
on page 322 in this Section for details.)

Z18028

CD text only—
The disc title and track title will appear on
the screen when pushing the “DVD” button.
Details of the specific switches, controls
and features are described below.

After the setting is done, the player plays
from the beginning of the chapter or the
track.

1. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “RPT” switch while the track
is playing. When the track ends, it will
automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this switch again.

CD Text

2. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Z18029

CD MP3

332

Push the “RAND” switch. The player
will play the tracks on the disc in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this switch again.
3. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “SCAN” switch. The player
will scan all the tracks on the disc. To
stop scanning, push this switch again.
When the player has scanned all the
tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Screen adjustment
MP3 only—
Folder and file names will appear on the
screen when the “DVD” button is pushed.
The details of the specific switches, controls, and features are described below.
1. “RPT” switch
When the “RPT” switch is pushed while
a track is played, the track file will be
played repeatedly until the switch is
pushed again. When the switch is
pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, all the
files in a folder will be played repeatedly. To turn off repeat play mode,
push the switch again.
2. “RAND” switch
When the “RAND” switch is pushed,
the files in a current folder will be
played in random order. When the
switch is pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, all the files in the disk will be
played in random. To turn off random
play mode, push the switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch
When the “SCAN” switch is pushed, all
the files in a current folder will be
scanned. Only the first 10 seconds of
each file are played sequentially until
all the files are scanned. When the
switch is pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, the first 10 seconds of each initial file of all the folders in the disk will
be played sequentially until the entire
initial files are scanned. To stop scanning, push the switch again.
4. “FLD

You can adjust the color, contrast, tone
and brightness of the screen.
Push the “DISPLAY” button on the controller and the “Display” screen will appear.
The screen may turn purple to deflect the
sunlight. This is not a malfunction.

” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial
file of the next folder will be played.
5. “

FLD” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial
file of the previous folder will be
played.
6. “DETAIL” switch
When the switch is pushed while a
track is played, the detailed file information of the track will be displayed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

333

07 04.26

—Selecting the video mode
After adjusting the screen, push the “ENT”
button or “DISPLAY” button to return to
the previous screen.

Z18030

Z17478

Operate the joystick up and down to select Brightness, Contrast, Tone, or Color
and left and right to make adjustments.
− or “RED”

+ or
“GREEN”

Brightness

Darkens

Brightens

Contrast

Weakens
the contrast

Strengthens
the contrast

Tone

Weakens
the tone

Strengthens
the tone

Color

Strengthens
the red
color

Strengthens
the green
color

334

The audio machine connected to the input
terminal adapter can be played in the video mode.
To select the video mode, push
“VIDEO” button on the controller.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

the

07 04.26

—DVD video disc information
DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS
This DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL
or SECAM cannot be used.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs
have a region code indicating where you
can use. If the DVD video disc is not
labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in
this DVD player. If you attempt to play an
inappropriate DVD video disc in this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on
the screen. Even if the DVD video disc
does not have a region code, in some
cases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:
Indicates NTSC format
of color TV.

Indicates the number
of audio tracks.

Indicates the number
of language subtitles.

Indicates the number
of angles.
Indicates the screen
to be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates regions in
which this video disc
can be played.
ALL: all countries
Number: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY
DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc
that holds video. DVD video discs have
adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies.
The picture data is compressed by 1/40
on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of
data assigned to the picture is changed
depending on the picture format has also
been adopted. Audio data is stored using
PCM and Dolby digital, which enables
higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi−angle and multi−language features will
also help you enjoy the more advanced
technology of DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits
what can be viewed in conformity with the
level of restrictions of the country. The
level of restrictions varies depending on
the DVD video disc. Some DVD video
discs cannot be played at all, or violent
scenes are skipped or replaced with other
scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can
be played.
Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children
and G−rated movies can be played.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

335

07 04.26

—A/V input adapter
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can
be played.
Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the
same scene at different angles.
Multi−language feature: You can select
the language of the subtitles and audio.
Region codes: Region codes are provided
on DVD players and DVD discs. If the
DVD video disc does not have the same
region code as the DVD player, you
cannot play the disc on the DVD player.
For region codes, see page 335.
Audio: This DVD player can play liner
PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio
format DVD. Other decoded type cannot
be played.
Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs are divided in parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and
audio programs stored on DVD video
discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one
album, or one audio program is assigned
as a title.

Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Dolby Digital”,
“Pro Logic”, and the double−D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Confidential unpublished works.
E1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All
rights reserved.

The rear entertainment system plays videos and sound when an audio−video
equipment is connected to the A/V input
adapter. For details, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected
by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision
Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title
comprises plural chapters.

336

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Power outlet
To use the adapter, open the cover.
The A/V input adapter is composed of 3
input adapters.

XS18032

Separate seats type

XS18033

Bench seat type

Yellow: Image input adapter
Red: Audio input adapter
White: Audio input adapter

XS10094

NOTICE
Close the cover
adapter is not in
eign object other
plug may cause
short circuit.

when the A/V input
use. Inserting a forthan the appropriate
electrical failure or
Separate seats type

XS10092

Bench seat type

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

337

07 04.26

This power outlet is designed for use as
a power supply for the audio device connected to the input terminal adapter.

NOTICE
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.

The key must be in the “ON” position for
the power outlet to be used.
The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

XS18029

z Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the outlet
may cause electrical failure or short
circuit.

The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even if
their power consumption is under 115
VAC/100W. These appliances may not
operate properly.

D Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.

D Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measuring instruments, etc.

338

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Audio/video system operating
hints
D Other appliances requiring an extremely

NOTICE

stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

To ensure correct audio system operation:

Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.

z Be careful not to spill beverages
over the system.
z Do not put anything other than a
compact disc into the slot.
z Do not put anything other than a
DVD video, DVD audio, video CD,
dts−CD or audio CD into the DVD
player.
z The use of a cellular phone inside
or near the vehicle may cause a
noise from the speakers of the system which you are listening to.
However, this does not indicate a
malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
your radio—it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
have a limited range. The farther you are
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for two signals to reach
your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.
Static and fluttering—These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

339

07 04.26

Station swapping—If the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.
AM
Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere—especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference—When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a
radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static—AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
—Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
—Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
—Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
—Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

XMr∗
Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.

340

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC
PLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

D Type 2 and type 3—The player is in-

tended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.)
discs only.

D Extremely high temperatures can keep

your compact disc player and DVD
player from working. On hot days, use
the air conditioning to cool the vehicle
interior before you use the players.

Audio CDs

XS18016
DVD video
discs

D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may

make your compact disc player and
DVD player skip.

D If moisture gets into your compact disc

player and DVD player, the players
may not play even though they appear
to be working. Remove the disc from
the player and wait until it dries.

CAUTION
Compact disc players and DVD players use an invisible laser beam which
could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be
sure to operate the player correctly.

Video CDs

Compact disc player

D Use only compact discs marked as

shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
SACD
dts−CD
Copy−protected CD
CD−ROM

DVD player

D Use only discs marked as shown
above. The following products may not
be playable on your DVD player.
SACD
Copy−protected CD
CD−ROM
DVD−R
DVD+R
DVD−RW
DVD+RW
DVD−ROM
DVD−RAM

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

341

07 04.26

NOTICE
z Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in
the illustrations. The use of such
discs may damage the player or
changer, or it may be impossible to
eject the disc.

Special shaped discs

Low quality discs

z This system is not designed for use
of Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Disc
because it may cause damage to
the player or changer.

Z17058

Transparent/translucent discs

342

Labeled discs

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

MP3/WMA FILES

D MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA
(Windows Media Audio) are audio compression standards.

D The MP3/WMA player can play MP3

and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R and
CD−RW discs.

Correct

The unit can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level
2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file
system.

Wrong

D When naming an MP3 or WMA file,
D Handle the discs carefully, especially

when you are inserting them. Hold
them on the edge and do not bend
them. Avoid getting fingerprints on
them, particularly on the shiny side.

D Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)

D Remove discs from the compact disc

player when you are not playing them.
Store them in their plastic cases away
from moisture, heat, and direct sunlight.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−
free cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the
center to the edge of the disc (not in
circles). Dry it with another soft, lint−free
cloth. Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or anti−static device.

add the appropriate file extension (.mp3
or .wma).

D The MP3/WMA player plays back files

with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as
MP3 or WMA files. To prevent noise
and playback errors, use the appropriate file extensions.

D Multi−session compatible CDs can also
be played.

D MP3 files are compatible with the ID3

Tag Ver.1.0, Ver.1.1 and Ver.2.2, and
Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot display disc title, track title and artist
name in other formats.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

343

07 04.26

D WMA files can contain a WMA tag that

is used in the same way as an ID3
tag. WMA tags carry information such
as track title, artist name.

D The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded
at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system
can play MP3 files with sampling frequencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.
However, the emphasis function is not
available for files recorded at these frequencies.)

D The sound quality of MP3/WMA files

generally improves with higher bit
rates. In order to achieve a reasonable
level of sound quality, discs recorded
with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are
recommended.
Playable bit rates
MP3 files:
MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbps
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbps
WMA files:
Ver7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbps
Ver9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

D The MP3/WMA player does not play

back MP3/WMA files from discs recorder using packet write data transfer
(UDF format). Discs should be recorded using “pre−mastering” software
rather than packet−write software.

D M3u playlists are not compatible with
the audio player.

D MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
formats are not compatible with the audio player.

Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.mp3

RS18193
Folder 3
006.mp3

D The MP3 player is compatible with
VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

D When playing back files recorded as

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play
time will not be correctly displayed if
fast−forward or reverse operations are
used.

D It is not possible to check folders that
do not include MP3/WMA files.

D MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev-

els deep can be played. However, the
start of playback may be delayed when
using discs containing numerous levels
of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating discs with no more than
two levels of folders.

D It is possible to play up to 192 folders
or 255 files on one disc.

344

001.mp3
002.mp3

MP3 player (rear seat entertainment system)

001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma

RS18193
Folder 3
006.mp3
MP3/WMA player (front audio system)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D The play order of the compact disc
with the structure shown on the left is
as follows:

MP3 player (rear seat entertainment system)
001.mp3

002.mp3 . . .

006.mp3

MP3/WMA player (front audio system)
001.mp3

002.wma . . .

006.mp3

D MP3 player (rear seat entertainment

system)—It is possible to play up to
253 folders on one disc.

D MP3/WMA player (front audio sys-

tem)—It is possible to play up to 192
folders or 255 files on one disc.

D The order changes depending on the

PC and MP3/WMA encoding software
you use.

D Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannot

CD−R and CD−RW discs

D CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not been
subject to the “finalizing process” (a
process that allows discs to be played
on a conventional CD player) cannot
be played.

be played using the DDCD (Double
Density CD) system.

D It may not be possible to play CD−
R/CD−RW discs recorded on a music
CD recorder or a personal computer
because
of
disc
characteristics,
scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,
condensation, etc. on the lens of the
unit.

D It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and
the environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the
appropriate application manufacturers of
the applications.)

D CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damaged
by direct exposure to sunlight, high
temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play
some damaged discs.

D If you insert a CD−RW disc into the
MP3/WMA player, playback will begin
more slowly than with a conventional
CD or CD−R disc.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

345

07 04.26

TERMS

ISO 9660 format—

WMA—

Packet write—

This is the international standard for the
formatting of CD−ROM folders and files.
For the ISO 9660 format, there are two
levels of regulations.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression format developed by Microsoft. It compresses files into a size smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding
formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8, and
9.

This is a general term that describes the
process of writing data on−demand to
CD−R, etc., in the same way that data is
written to floppy or hard discs.
ID3 Tag—
This is a method of embedding track−related information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track
title, the artist’s name, the album title, the
music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can
be freely edited using software with ID3
tag editing functions. Although the tags
are restricted to the number of characters,
the information can be viewed when the
track is played back.
WMA Tag—
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag.
WMA tags carry information such as track
title, artist name.

346

Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (8 character file names, with a 3 character file extension. File names must be composed of
one−byte capital letters and numbers. The
“_” symbol may also be included.)
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark “.” and
file extension). Each folder must contain
fewer than 8 hierarchies.
m3u—
Playlists created using “WINAMP” software
have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3—
MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Hands−free phone system—
—Reference
Phone Setup (see page 353)

Security (see page 358)

D Pair phone

D Set PIN

To use the hands−free system, you
need to register your phone in the system.

D Change name
The registered phone names can be
changed.

D Delete
The registered phone can be deleted.

D List phone
The registered phone names can be
checked.

D Select phone
The registered phones can be selected.

D Set passkey
The passkey can be changed.

D Delete Speed Dial

The PIN can be set or changed.

D Phone book lock
The phone book can be locked.

D Phone book unlock
The locked phone book can be unlocked.

The registered speed dial can be deleted.

D List names
The registered names can be checked.

D Set Speed Dial
Speed dials can be set
Redial (see page 370)

System Setup (see page 362)

Callback (see page 371)

D Adjust Guidance Volume

Making a phone call (see page 373)

Guidance volume can be adjusted.

D Initialize

Receiving a phone call (see page 375)
Talking on the phone (see page 376)

Phone Book (see page 362)

D Add Entry
Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered.

D Change Name
The registered names can be changed.

D Delete Entry
The registered names can be deleted.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

347

07 04.26

—Some basics
This system supports Bluetoothr, a
wireless system that allows you to
make or receive calls without taking
your hands from the steering wheel and
without using cables to connect the
phone and system.
The phone must be paired to the system
before using the hands−free feature. If
your cellular phone does not support Bluetoothr, this system will not function.

CAUTION

XS18010a

The system may not function in the following conditions and places:

D The cellular phone is turned off.
D The current position is outside the
communication area.

D The cellular phone is not connected.
D The cellular phone has a low battery.
D The cellular phone is hiding behind the

seat or in the glove box and console
box.

D The cellular phone touches or is cov-

While you are driving, do not use a
cellular phone or connect the Bluetoothr phone.

ered with metal materials.

This system supports the following service.

D HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver.1.0.
D OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver.1.1.

NOTICE
Do not leave your cellular phone in
the car. The temperature indoor may
be high and damage the phone.

If your cellular phone does not support
HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetoothr
phone, and take OPP service individually.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

348

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

When transferring ownership of the vehicle:
A lot
when
When
hicle,

of personal data is registered
you use the hands−free system.
transferring ownership of the veinitialize the system.

If you initialize it, the former state will
never come back again. Pay much attention when initializing the data.
You can initialize the following data in the
system.

D
D
D
D
D

FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A
IC ID: 1551A−BTAU01A
MADE IN MEXICO

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS−210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Phone book data
Dialed numbers and received calls
Speed dial
Bluetoothr phone data
Security code

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE: This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
—Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
—Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
—Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
—Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

349

07 04.26

—Control and features
"Steering switches and microphone
CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC
radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This
equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it
should be installed and operated with at
least 20 cm and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs).

XS18011a

Steering switches

XS18013a

Overhead console (Type B)

1. Volume control switch

Co−location: This transmitter must not
be co−located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.

To increase the volume: Push “+”.
To decrease the volume: Push “−”.

XS18012a

The volume continues increasing or decreasing while the switch is being pushed.
When driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) or
more, the volume automatically increases
without switch adjustment. When your
speed falls below 70 km/h (43 mph), the
volume automatically returns to its original
level.

Overhead console (Type A)

350

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

2. Talk switch
Pushing the talk switch turns the hands−
free system on and initiates the speech
command system.
Pushing and holding the talk switch ends
the speech command system.
3. Off−hook switch
Pushing the off−hook switch
hands−free system on.

turns

the

When receiving a call, pushing the off−
hook switch allows you to talk on the
phone.
4. On−hook switch
When the hands−free system is on, pushing the on−hook switch turns the hands−
free system off.
5. Microphone
The microphone is used when talking on
the phone or using the speech command
system.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

351

07 04.26

"Audio unit
1. “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
Turning the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob displays the menu items, names, numbers,
etc. to be selected. To select an item,
push the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob. Due to
safety concerns, the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob does not function while the vehicle
is in motion.
2. Display

XS18014

Displays such items as the reception level, a party’s name and phone number. See
“DISPLAY” described on the following
page for further details about the display.
3. “TEXT” button
When the party’s name or phone number
is too long to be displayed, pushing and
holding the “TEXT” button displays the remaining characters.
4. Preset buttons
Pushing the preset button displays the
registered speed dial numbers.

352

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Phone Setup
2. Reception level display

XS18015a

Displays the reception level of the radio
wave signals. This may not match the
display on the cellular phone. The reception level of some cellular phones may not
be displayed.
The number of bars is greater when the
signal received is stronger.

DISPLAY
1. Bluetoothr display
Displays when a Bluetoothr connection is
made. If there is no display, the
Bluetoothr connection has not been made
and communication between the phone
and system is not possible. When using
the hands−free system, make sure that
“BT” is displayed. The display is updated
in real time.

D Pair Phone
To use the hands−free system, you need
to register your phone in the system.
Once you have registered it, you can
make a hands−free call. Up to 6 phones
can be registered.

D Select Phone

3. Message display
Displays phone numbers,
ments, menu items, etc.

The phone setup menu includes the following:

names,

com-

When the system connects to Bluetoothr,
the phone previously used is automatically
selected. Select a different phone if necessary. Only the selected phone can be
used with the hands−free system.

D Change Name
The registered
changed.

phone

names

can

phone

names

can

D List Phones
The registered
checked.

The following can be performed during the
name playback:

D Select phone
D Change name
D Delete

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

353

07 04.26

D Set Passkey

To pair phones

The passkey can be changed. A 4 to 8
digit code can be input as a passkey.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Pair
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Pair Phone” is displayed
and push the knob.

D Delete
The registered phones can be deleted.
To enter the phone setup menu
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Setup” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Setup. Please push the talk switch and
say security, or phone setup.” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Phone Setup” is displayed and push
the knob.
“Phone setup. Push the talk switch and
say pair phone, select phone, change
name, list phones, set passkey or delete.”
is heard.
“XXX (phone name) already selected.” is
heard and “XXX (phone name)” is displayed.
If no phone has been registered, the system may not function properly.

354

“The phone is paired and ready for use.
Returning to the main menu.” is heard and
“Paired” is displayed.
The system may not function in the following cases:

“Pair. Push the talk switch and say a
name for the phone.” is heard.

D If 6 phones have already been regis-

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Record Name” is displayed, push the
knob and say “XXX (desired phone
name)”.

D If the vehicle is moving.
D If the system cannot communicate with

“Push the talk switch and say confirm.
Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“XXX Ready for phone pairing. Please use
the phone to connect it to the hands−free
system. The passkey for the phone is....”
is heard.
After “HANDS FREE” is displayed, a passkey∗ is displayed and “Searching.” is
heard.

tered.

the phone.

∗:

Passkey is a password required to register a phone to the system.

INFORMATION
z To use the hands−free system, you
need to register your phone in the
system. Once you have registered
it, you can make a hands−free call.
Up to 6 phones can be registered.
z For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
cellular phone.
z The passkey can be changed. See
page 357 for changing the passkey.

4. Input the passkey displayed on the
screen into the phone.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

To select a phone
1. Push the talk switch and say “Select
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Select Phone” is displayed
and push the knob.
“Select phone. Push the talk switch and
say the phone name or say list phones.”
is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the desired phone name is displayed
and push the knob.

When the phone is selected by using
the knob:
“XXX selected. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If the phone is not found.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

To change a name
1. Push the talk switch and say “Change
name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Change Name” is displayed
and push the knob.
“Change name. Push the talk switch and
say the phone name to change.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the phone name that you want to
change is displayed and push the
knob.

When the phone is selected by a voice
command:
“XXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXX” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob
until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.
“XXX selected. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

355

07 04.26

When the phone is selected by a voice
command:

When the phone is selected by using
the knob:

The system may not function in the following cases:

“XXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXX” is displayed.

D If no phone has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

To list phones

“Push the talk switch and say a new
name.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Record Name” is displayed, push the
knob and say “XXX (desired phone
name)”.

“List phones. To select a name, push the
talk switch during the name playback.” is
heard.

“XXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is
heard.

“Push the talk switch and say select
phone, change name, or delete.” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

“Name changed. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard and “Changed” is displayed.

356

voice command.

1. Push the talk switch and say
phones”,
or
turn
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
Phones” is displayed and push
knob.

“List
the
“List
the

2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

Select one of the following:

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

When using the knob:

Select phone

To set a passkey

Push the talk switch and say “Select
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Select Phone” is displayed and
push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say
passkey”,
or
turn
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
Passkey” is displayed and push
knob.

For further details on selecting a phone,
see page 355.
Change name
Push the talk switch and say “Change
name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Change Name” is displayed
and push the knob.
For further details on changing a name,
see page 355.
Delete
Push the talk switch and say “Delete”, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Delete” is displayed and push the knob.
For further details on deleting a phone,
see page 358.
If no phone has been registered, the system may not function properly.

“Set
the
“Set
the

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
select
a
number.
Push
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.

“Set Passkey. The passkey is required for
the phone pairing process. Push the talk
switch and say a new passkey.” is heard
and passkey is displayed.

“Passkey changed. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
select a number.

2. When the passkey is set, push the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.

The system may not function in the following cases:

D If the passkey has less than 4 digits.
D If the passkey has more than 8 digits.

When using a voice command:
“XXXX (new passkey) Push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, continue
adding numbers, or say go back or
delete.” is heard and “XXXX (new
passkey)” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob
until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.
“Passkey changed. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

357

07 04.26

—Security
To delete a phone
1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
until “Delete” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Delete. Push the talk switch and say the
phone name to delete.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the phone name you want to delete is
displayed and push the knob.
When using a voice command:
“XXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXX” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob
until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.
“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.”
is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.

The system may not function in the following cases:

D If no phone has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

The security menu includes the following:

D Set PIN (Personal Identification Number)

The PIN can be set or changed.

D Phone book lock
The phone book can be locked.
When the phone book is locked, the following functions cannot be used:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Dial by name and number
Redial
Callback
Speed Dial
Phone Setup
PhoneBook
Set PIN
Phone book unlock

The locked phone book can be unlocked.

When using the knob:
“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.”
is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.

358

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

To enter the security menu

To set a PIN

When using a voice command:

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.

Push the talk switch and say “Set PIN”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Set PIN” is displayed and push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “XXX
(new PIN number)”.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Setup” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Setup. Please push the talk switch and
say security, or phone setup.” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Security” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Security. Push the talk switch and say
set PIN, phone book lock, or phone book
unlock.” is heard.

“There is no PIN number set. Please
register a PIN number. Please push the
talk switch and say a four−digit PIN
number.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.” is heard and “Completed”
is displayed.
When using the knob:
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
select
a
number.
Push
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.
2. Repeat the above procedure until the
entire four−digit number is set.
3. When the PIN is set,
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.

push

the

4. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.” is heard and “Completed”
is displayed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

359

07 04.26

If the PIN is to be changed:

To lock the phone book

When using a voice command:

“There is a PIN number in place. Push
the talk switch and say the correct PIN
number.” is heard and “Current PIN?” is
displayed.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Phone
book
lock”,
or
turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Phbk
Lock” is displayed and push the knob.

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
use the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to input the current PIN number.

“There is a PIN number in place. Push
the talk switch and say the correct PIN
number.” is heard and “PIN?” is displayed.

“Please push the talk switch and say a
four−digit PIN number.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
select a number.

2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX
(new PIN number)”.
“The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.” is heard and “Completed”
is displayed.
If the current number is not correct, the
system may not function properly.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob
until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now locked. Returning to the main menu.”
is heard and “Locked” is displayed.
When using the knob:
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
select
a
number.
Push
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.
2. When the PIN number is set, push the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now locked. Returning to the main menu.”
is heard and “Locked” is displayed.

360

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

The system may not function in the following cases:

D If the current number is not correct.
D If the phone book has already been
locked.

D If the PIN number does not exist.
To unlock the phone book
1. Push the talk switch and say “Phone
book
unlock”,
or
turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Phbk
Unlock” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Phonebook unlock. There is PIN number
in place. Push the talk switch and say the
correct PIN number.” is heard and
“Current PIN?” is displayed.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
select a number.

When using a voice command:
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob
until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now unlocked. Returning to the main
menu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is displayed.
When using the knob:
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
select
a
number.
Push
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.

The system may not function in the following cases:

D If the current number is not correct.
D If the phone book has already been
unlocked.

INFORMATION
A shortcut to each of the following
functions is available. Enter the
phone book menu, push the off−hook
switch, and say either of the following:
z Phone book lock
z Phone book unlock

2. When the PIN number is set, push the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now unlocked. Returning to the main
menu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is displayed.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

361

07 04.26

—System Setup
The system setup menu includes the following:

D Adjust Guidance Volume
D Initialize
To enter the system setup menu
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Setup” is displayed and push the
knob.
3. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“System Setup” is displayed and push
the knob.
“System setup. Please select guidance
volume or initialize.” is heard.
To adjust the guidance volume
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Guidance Vol” is displayed and push
the knob.
“Guidance will be at this volume” is heard
and the present volume level is displayed.
2. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
adjust the volume and push the knob.

362

—Phone Book
To initialize
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Initialize” is displayed and push the
knob.
“System initialization. This will erase all
user information in the hands free system;
including paired phones, phone book
entries, and call history. Select confirm to
initialize. Otherwise, select go back.” is
heard.
2. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“System initialization. This will erase all
user information in the hands free system;
including paired phones, pone book
entries, and call history. Select confirm to
initialize. Otherwise, select go back.” is
heard.

The phone book menu includes the following:

D Add Entry
Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered.

D Change Name
The registered names can be changed.

D Delete Entry
The registered names can be deleted.

D Delete Speed Dial
The registered speed dial can be deleted.

D List Names
The registered names can be checked.

D Set Speed Dial
Speed dials can be set.

3. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Initialized. Returning to the main menu.”
is heard.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

To enter the phone book menu

To add entry

(a) By voice

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.

The add entry includes the following:

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Phonebook” is displayed and push the
knob.

(b) By Phone

1. Push the talk switch and say “By
voice”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “By Voice” is displayed and
push the knob.

(a) By Voice
(c) Call History

“Voice entry. Push the talk switch and say
the number.” is heard.

(d) Manual Input

“Phone book. Please push the talk switch
and say add entry, change name, delete
entry, list names set speed dial or delete
speed dial.” is heard.

Push the talk switch and say “Add entry”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Add Entry” is displayed and push the
knob.

If the phone book is locked, the system
may not function properly.

“Add Entry. How will the number be
entered. Push the talk switch and say by
voice, by phone, or call history.” is heard.

2. Push the talk switch and say the dial
number that you want to register.
“To store, push the talk switch and say
confirm.
Otherwise,
continue
adding
numbers, or say go back or delete.” is
heard and number is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instruction.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

363

07 04.26

If “Confirm” is said, then input a voice
tag.
“Push the talk switch and say a name.”
is heard.
1. Push the talk switch and say the name
of the dial number that you want to
register.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is
heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

Confirm

(b) By Phone

Push the talk switch and say “Confirm”, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “By
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “By Phone” is displayed and
push the knob.

“Returning to the phone book.” is heard.
Speed Dial
1. Push the talk switch and say “Set
speed
dial”,
or
turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Speed
Dial” is displayed and push the knob.
“Set speed dial. Push the preset button to
assign to XXXX” is heard.
2. Push the desired preset button.

“Stored. To register this as a speed dial
entry, push the talk switch and say set
speed dial. Otherwise, say confirm.” is
heard and “Stored” is displayed.

“Preset... is now assigned. Returning to
the phone book.” is heard.

3. Select one of the following:

D If the phone book is full.
D If the dial number has more than 24

D Confirm
D Speed Dial

The system may not function in the following cases:

digits.

“Phone entry. Prepare to send the
information from the phone. When ready,
push the talk switch and say confirm.” is
heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Send the information at this time.” is
heard.
After the system has received the name
and phone number, “Push the talk switch
and say confirm. To select an alternate
number, say next or previous. Otherwise,
say go back.” is heard and “XXX (name)”
and “XXX (number)” is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions,
push the talk switch and say “Confirm”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
until the dial number that you want to
register is displayed and push the
knob.
Next, input a voice tag.

364

For further details, see page 363.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Outgoing

(d) Manual Input

1. Push the talk switch and say “Call
history”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Call history” is displayed
and push the knob.

1. Push
the
talk
switch
and
say
“Outgoing”,
or
turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob
until
“Outgoing” is displayed and push the
knob.

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Manual Input” is displayed and push
the knob.

“Call history. Push the talk switch and say
incoming or outgoing.” is heard and “Call
History” is displayed.
2. Select one of the following:

“Most recent outgoing call was XXXX” is
heard and the outgoing number is displayed.

D Incoming
D Outgoing

“Push the talk switch and say confirm.
Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” is
heard.

Incoming
1. Push
the
talk
switch
and
say
“Incoming”,
or
turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob
until
“Incoming” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Most recent incoming call was XXXX” is
heard and the incoming number is displayed.
“Push the talk switch and say confirm.
Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” is
heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 363.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see 363.

2. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
select
a
number.
Push
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.
3. When the number is set, push the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 363.

INFORMATION
z The system can recognize single
digits from zero to nine # (pound),
∗ (star), and + (plus). Numbers that
are ten or greater are not recognized.
z To speed up input, it is a good idea
to group all digits into a continuous
string. However, you can enter each
digit individually or group digits together in preferred string lengths.
The display corresponding to each operation appears on the screen as follows:

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

365

07 04.26

To list names

Input operation—

Display: “995”

You say: “Nine, nine, five”

Repeating the above operation deletes
the last digits in reverse order of input.

Voice output: “995 to store push the
talk
switch
and
say
confirm.
Otherwise, continue adding numbers,
or say go back, or delete.”
Display: “995”
You say: “Seven, three, four”
Voice output: “734 to store push the
talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, continue adding numbers, or
say go back, or delete.”
Display: “995734”
Repeat the above procedure until the
entire number that you want to register is input.

Delete operation—
You say: “Delete”

The voice tags can be edited during the
name playback.
1. Push the talk switch and say “List
names”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “List Names” is displayed
and push the knob.

Display: “Delete”

“List names. To select a name, push the
talk switch during the name playback.” is
heard.

The display will return to the initial
screen that allows a number to be
input.

“XXXX selected.” is heard and “Selected”
is displayed.

Voice output: “Deleted. Push the talk
switch and say the number.”

2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

If you push the off−hook switch during the
name playback, you can dial the number
of the selected name.

Go back operation—
You say: “Go back”
Voice output: “Go back. The last
numbers said have been removed.
Push the talk switch and say the
number.”

366

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Editing the voice tags

Delete Entry

To delete entry

The following can be performed:
Change Name

Push the talk switch and say “Delete
entry”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Delete Entry” is displayed and
push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete
entry”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Delete Entry” is displayed
and push the knob.

Delete Entry

For further details, see page 367.

“Delete entry. Push the talk switch and
say the name to delete.” is heard.

D
D
D
D

Dial

Speed Dial

“Push the talk switch and say dial, change
name, delete entry, or set speed dial.” is
heard and “Selected” is displayed.
Dial
Push the talk switch and say “Dial”, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.
Change Name
Push the talk switch and say “Change
name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Change Name” is displayed
and push the knob.
For further details, see page 368.

Speed dial
Push the talk switch and say “Set speed
dial”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
until “Speed Dial” is displayed and push
the knob.
For further details, see page 369.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the name that you want to delete is
displayed and push the knob.
When using a voice command:
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob
until
“Confirm” is displayed and push knob.
“Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” is
heard and “Deleted” is displayed.
When using the knob:
“Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” is
heard and “Deleted” is displayed.
The system may not function is the following cases:

D If no name has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

367

07 04.26

To delete speed dial

To change name

When using a voice command:

1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete
speed
dial”,
or
turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Del Spd
Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Change
name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Change Name” is displayed
and push the knob.

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.

“Delete speed dial. Push the preset button
to delete from speed dial.” is heard.

“Change name Push the talk switch and
say the name to change” is heard.

2. Select the preset button that you want
to delete.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to
change is displayed and push the
knob.

“To delete preset... push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.”
is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Deleted.” is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.
“Returning to the phone book.” is heard
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If not speed dial has been registered.
D If the preset button has not been assigned.

368

1. Follow voice guidance instruction, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Push the talk switch and say a new
name.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Record Name” is displayed, push the
knob and say “XXX (new name)”.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is
heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Name changed. Returning to the phone
book.” is heard and “Changed” is displayed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

When using the knob:

To set speed dial

When using a voice command:

“Push the talk switch and say a new
name.” is heard.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Set
Speed
dial”,
or
turn
the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Speed
Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

“XXXX To register this as a speed dial
entry, push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, push the talk switch
and say go back.” is heard and “XXXX” is
displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Record Name” is displayed, push the
knob and say “XXX (new name)”.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is
heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instruction, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Name changed. Returning to the phone
book.” is heard and “Changed” is displayed.
The system may not function is the following cases:

D If no name has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

“Set speed dial. Push the talk switch and
say a name.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Push and hold the preset button to assign to XXXX” is heard.
2. Push the desired preset button.
“preset... is now assigned. Returning to
the phone book.” is heard.
When using the knob:
“Push the preset
XXXX” is heard.

button

assign

Push and hold the desired preset button.
“preset... is now assigned. Returning to
the phone book.” is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If not name has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

369

07 04.26

—Redial
INFORMATION
A shortcut to each of the following
functions is available. Push the off−
hook switch and talk switch, and say
one of the following:
z Phone book add entry
z Phone book change name
z Phone book delete entry
z Phone book delete speed dial
z Phone book list names
z Phone book set speed dial

The following can be performed:

Dial

D Dial
D Delete
D Store

Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the number that you want to dial is displayed and push the knob. After that, do
the one of the following:

To enter the redial

D Push the off−hook switch.
D Push the talk switch and say “dial”.
D Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Redial” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Redial. Most recent outgoing call was
XXXX” is heard and outgoing history is
displayed.
“Please push the off−hook switch to dial.
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.”
is heard.

“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

Delete
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to delete
is displayed and push the knob.
2. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
until “Delete” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Delete. Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Deleted.” is heard.

370

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Callback
Store

The following can be performed:

INFORMATION

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.

z Up to five outgoing calls can be
stored in the system.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
until “Store” is displayed and push the
knob.

z When five outgoing calls are stored
in memory, the oldest outgoing call
is deleted to make room in memory
for new calls.

“Store. Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is
heard.

z Only the latest outgoing call is
stored when the same telephone
number is dialed.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

z A shortcut to “Redial” is available.
Push the off−hook switch twice.

Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 363.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D Dial
D Delete
D Store
To enter the callback
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Callback” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Callback. Most recent incoming call was
XXXX” is heard and incoming history is
displayed.
“Please push the off−hook switch to dial.
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.”
is heard.

D If there is no outgoing history.
D If the phone book is locked.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

371

07 04.26

Dial

Store

Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the number that you want to dial is displayed and push the knob. After that, do
the one of the following:

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.

z Up to five incoming calls can be
stored in the system.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
until “Store” is displayed and push the
knob.

z When five incoming calls are stored
in memory, the oldest incoming call
is deleted to make room in memory
for new calls.

D Push the off−hook switch.
D Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.
D Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

Delete
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to delete
is displayed and push the knob.

“Store. Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is
heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
until “Delete” is displayed and push the
knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

“Delete. Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard.

The system may not function in the following cases:

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

INFORMATION

For further details, see page 363.

D If there is no incoming history.
D If the phone book is locked.

“Deleted.” is heard.

372

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Making a phone call
If the cellular phone is not registered, this
system cannot be used. See page 353 for
registering a cellular phone. Make sure
that “BT” is displayed and get the cellular
phone ready to use.
There are 3 way to make a phone call
with this system.

D Speed dial
A phone call can be made with a preset
button in which a phone number is registered. See page 369 for setting the preset
buttons.

D Dial by Name
The system dials the numbers corresponding to the spoken names registered in the
system.

D Dial by Number
The system dials to the spoken numbers.

To speed dial

When using a voice command:

1. Push the preset button where the desired number is set. The name or telephone number is displayed.

“XXXX Push the off−hook switch to dial.
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, or go back.” is heard. After that, do
the one of the following:

2. Push the off−hook switch to dial.
To dial by Name
1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial by
name”.
“Dial by name. Please push the talk
switch and say the stored name, or say
list names.” is heard and “Dial by Name”
is displayed.
2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
until the phone name that you want to
dial is displayed and push the knob.

D Push the off−hook switch.
D Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.
D Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

When using the knob:
It calls the number.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If there is no number registered in the
preset button.

D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

To make a phone call
Push the off−hook switch
hands−free system on.

turn the

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

373

07 04.26

INFORMATION
z The phone numbers registered in
the phone book can be retrieved.
z The system does not recognize that
the voice tag is not registered in
the registered cellular phone. For
details about voice tags, see “To
add entry” on page 363.
z A shortcut to “Dial by name” is
available. Push the talk switch and
say “Dial XXX (name you want to
dial)”.

To dial by Number
1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial by
Number”.
“Dial by number. Please push the talk
switch and say the number.” is heard and
“Dial by Num” is displayed.
2. Push talk switch and say “XXXX”.
“Push the off−hook switch to dial.
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, go back, or delete.” is heard.
To dial the number, do the one of the
following:

D Push the off−hook switch.
D Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.
D Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

If the number exceeds 24 digits, the system may not function properly.

INFORMATION
z The system can recognize single
digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
∗ (star), and + (plus). Numbers that
are ten or greater are not recognized.
z To speed up input, it is a good idea
to group all digits into a continuous
string. However, you can enter each
digit individually or group digits together in preferred string lengths.
The display corresponding to each operation appears on the screen as follows:
Input operation—
You say: “Nine, nine, five”
Voice output: “995 push the off−hook
switch to dial. Otherwise, push the
talk switch and say dial, go back, or
delete.”
Display: “995”
You say: “Seven, three, four”
Voice output: “734 push the off−hook
switch to dial. Otherwise, push the
talk switch and say dial, go back, or
delete.”

374

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Receiving a phone call
Display “995734”

Cancel operation—

Repeat the above procedure until the
entire number that you want to dial is
input.

Do either one of the following:

Go back operation—

z Push the talk switch and say
“Cancel” after the beep at anytime
during the operation except while a
call in connected.

You say: “Go back”
Voice output: “Go back,
numbers entered have been
Push the talk switch and
adding numbers otherwise
go back, or delete.”

the last
removed.
continue
say dial,

z Push the on−hook switch at anytime
during the operation.

When receiving a phone call, a ring tone
is audible and the system changes into
the telephone mode.
When receiving a phone call, the display
is as follows. The display differs depending on whether or not the vehicle is in
motion.
When the vehicle is stopped:
Number, name, or “Incoming” is displayed.
When the vehicle is in motion:
“Incoming“ is displayed.

Display: “995”

Do either one of the following:

Repeating the above operation deletes
the last digits in reverse order of input.

D Pushing the on−hook switch refuses

Delete operation—
You say: “Delete”
Voice output: “Deleted. The entire
number to dial has been deleted.
Please push the talk switch and say
the number.”
Display: “Dial by Num”
The display will return to the initial
screen that allows a number to be
input.

D Pushing the off−hook switch allows you
to talk on the phone.
the call.

To adjust the ring volume, push “+” or “−”
on the steering volume controls. Volume
adjustment cannot be done using the audio system.
Repeatedly pushing “−” on the steering
volume controls mutes the ring.
When receiving an international phone
call, the name of the party may not be
displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

375

07 04.26

—Talking on the phone
To transfer a call to the phone:
The received call can be transferred from
the hands−free system to the cellular
phone that is connected to Bluetoothr. For
details, refer to the user’s guide for the
cellular phone.

While talking on the phone, the display is
as follows. The display differs depending
on whether or not the vehicle is in motion.
When the vehicle is stopped:
Number is displayed.

To transfer a call from the phone:
Pushing the off−hook switch while talking
on the cellular phone that is connected to
Bluetoothr allows you to talk hands−free.
To transfer a call to the phone:

When the vehicle is in motion:
“Talking“ is displayed.
When the call is finished, push the on−
hook switch.

The call can be transferred from the
hands−free system to the phone that is
connected to Bluetoothr. For details, refer
to the user’s guide for the cellular phone.

In the following situations, your voice may
not reach the party.

D Talk alternately with the other party on

the phone. If you talk at the same
time, the voice may not reach each
other. (It is not a malfunction.)

D Keep the volume of receiving voice
down. Otherwise, echo is coming up.
When you talk on the phone, speak
clearly towards the microphone.

D
D
D
D

When driving on a rough road.
When driving at high speeds.
When the window is open.
When the air conditioning vents face
the microphone.

D When the sound of the air conditioning
fan is loud.

376

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

1− 9

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Manual air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel and rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

378
382
382
386
390
390
393
394

377

07 04.26

Manual air conditioning system—
—Controls
1.
2.
3.
4.

Fan speed selector
“A/C” button
Air intake selector
Temperature selector (passenger side
temperature control)
5. Air flow selector
6. Temperature selector (driver side
temperature control)

XS19019

378

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Fan speed selector

Temperature selector (passenger side)

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to
the right to increase, to the left to decrease.

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to
cool.

Temperature selector (driver side)

Independent setting—
When the passenger side selector is
in a position other than the “SYNC”
position, the temperature only on passenger side can be adjusted using the
selector. This function is canceled
when the passenger side temperature
selector is turned to the “SYNC” position.

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—
to the right to warm, to the left to cool.
“MAX A/C” position—Turning the temperature selector knob to the “MAX A/C” position turns on the air conditioning and sets
the air intake selector to RECIRCULATE
for quick cooling.

Simultaneous setting—
When the passenger side selector is
in the “SYNC” position, the temperatures on both driver and passenger
sides can be simultaneously adjusted
using the driver side selector. This
function is canceled when the passenger side temperature selector is
turned to the right.

G18021

Air flow selector
Turn the knob to select the vents used for
air flow.
1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the
instrument panel vents and the rear
vents.
2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents, the instrument panel vents and
the rear vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

379

07 04.26

4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
Turning the air flow selector to the
floor/windshield position turns on the
defogging/defrosting function with the
purpose of clearing the windshield.
In this position, air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically
to clear the windshield quickly. If you
want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the windshield more quickly.
5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the
windshield vents.
Turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position turns on the defogging/defrosting function and the air conditioning with the purpose of clearing
the windshield.
In this position, air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically
to clear the windshield quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.

380

In this position, the air conditioning
turns on regardless of the “A/C button
indicator comes on or goes off. This is
not a malfunction.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “Air flow selector settings” described
below.

XS19014

Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
1. Recirculate (indicator light is on)—Recirculates the air inside the vehicle.
2. Fresh (indicator light is off)—Draws
outside air into the system.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If the ambient temperature drops, the air
intake mode will automatically change
from RECIRCULATE to FRESH after a few
minutes. This automatic change control
mode can be cancelled by pushing and
holding the button for longer than 2 seconds. The automatic change control mode
will be reactivated if the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

381

07 04.26

—Air flow selector settings

—Operating tips
D To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open long enough for the
hot air to escape. This operation allows
the air conditioning to cool the interior
more quickly.

D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

∗2

D On humid days, do not blow cold air
∗2

XS19021
∗2

∗1

on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.

D Keep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

∗1

D On cold days, set the fan speed to

∗1

high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.

D When driving on dusty roads, close all
∗2
∗1

:driver side

382

:passenger side

∗1

∗ 1:
∗ 2:

Double cab and Crew Max models
Crew Max models

windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting except “OFF”.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D If following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.

Heating

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards red zone
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards blue zone
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON

D For quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been
warmed.

D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.

D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

383

07 04.26

D On humid days, do not blow cold air

Defogging
Condition: Moisture is on the inside of the
windshield.
For best results, set controls to:

XS19013a

D For quick cooling, turn the temperature
selector knob to the “MAX A/C” position. The air conditioning will automatically turn on and the air intake selector
will be set to RECIRCULATE.

Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards blue zone
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF

384

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards red zone to heat;
blue zone to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Turning the air flow selector to the windshield or floor/windshield position turns on
the defogging function with the purpose of
clearing the windshield.
When turning the air flow selector to windshield or floor/windshield position, air intake selector mode changes to FRESH
automatically to clear the windshield
quickly. If you want to return the setting
to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again. However,
if the air flow selector is in the windshield
position, it is not possible to return to
RECIRCULATE.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.

on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.

D When side windows fog up, turn the
side vents toward the windows.

Defrosting
Condition: Moisture is on the outside of
the windshield.
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards red zone
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Turning the air flow selector to the windshield or floor/windshield position turns on
the defrosting function with the purpose of
clearing the windshield.
When turning the air flow selector to windshield or floor/windshield position, air intake selector mode changes to FRESH
automatically to clear the windshield
quickly. If you want to return the setting
to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again. However,
if the air flow selector is in the windshield
position, it is not possible to return to
RECIRCULATE.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.

D To heat the vehicle interior while de-

frosting the windshield, choose floor/
windshield air flow.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

385

07 04.26

Automatic air conditioning system
(on some Double cab and Crew Max models)—
—Controls

XS19020a

386

1. Fan speed selector
2. “AUTO” button
3. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
on—individual setting on driver and front
passenger)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
off—simultaneous setting on driver and
front passenger)
4. “A/C” button
5. Air flow selector
6. Windshield air flow button
7. Temperature selector
(“PASS TEMP”)
(individual setting on front passenger
side only)
8. “DUAL” button
9. Air intake selector
10. “OFF” button

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

“AUTO” button

“DUAL” button

—“PASS TEMP” knob

For automatic
tioning, press
“AUTO” button
the automatic
selected.

Push the button to change the mode of
the temperature setting.

This knob changes the temperature on the
front passenger side only.

With the indicator on—Individual temperature setting for driver and front passenger
With the indicator off—Simultaneous
temperature setting for driver and front
passenger

“OFF” button

operation of the air condithe “AUTO” button. The
will turn on, indicating that
operation mode has been

In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.
When you press the “AUTO” button with
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal
circulation may be applied for maximum
cooling.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
Fan speed selector
Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to
the right to increase, to the left to decrease.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode.

Push the button to turn off the air conditioning system.

Temperature selectors
Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to
cool.
“LO” appears when you adjust to maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
adjust to maximum warming.
—“TEMP” knob
With the “DUAL” button indicator on—This
knob changes the temperature on the driver side only.
With the “DUAL” button indicator off—This
knob changes the temperature on the driver side and front passenger side simultaneously. This function will be cancelled
when the “PASS TEMP” knob is turned.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

387

07 04.26

4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
Windshield air flow button

XS19016a

Air flow selector
Turn the knob to select the vents used for
air flow.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
another air flow mode.
1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents and the rear
vents.
2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents, the instrument panel vents and
the rear vents.

When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents.
Pressing the button once again returns the
air flow mode to the last one used.
Pressing the windshield button turns on
the defroster−linked air conditioning. At
this time, the air conditioning turns on
regardless of the “A/C” button indicator
comes on or goes off. This is not a malfunction. This is to clean up the front view
more quickly.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “Air flow selector settings” described
below.

XS19015a

Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
1. RECIRCULATE (indicator light is on)—
Recirculates the air inside the vehicle.
2. FRESH (indicator light is off)—Draws
outside air into the system.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.

388

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

389

07 04.26

—Air flow selector settings

—Operating tips
D To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.

D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

∗
∗

XS19022a

D On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of windshield.

D Keep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

∗

D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.

D When driving on dusty roads, close all
∗

:driver side

390

:passenger side

∗: Crew Max models

windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed to any setting except off.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D If following another vehicle on a dusty

Heating

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—ON

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards red zone
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards blue zone
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON

D For quick heating, select recirculated

D For quick cooling, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been
warmed.

air for a few minutes.

D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.

D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

391

07 04.26

Ventilation

Defogging and defrosting

For best results, set controls to:

—The inside of the windshield

For automatic operation—

For best results, set controls to:

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards blue zone
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF

D On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.

For automatic operation—

—The outside of the windshield

Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield button turns on
the defroster−linked air conditioning. At
this time, the air conditioning turns on
regardless of the “A/C” button indicator
comes on or goes off. This is not a malfunction. This is to clean up the front view
more quickly.

392

For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation—
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield button turns on
the defroster−linked air conditioning. At
this time, the air conditioning turns on
regardless of the “A/C” button indicator
comes on or goes off. This is not a malfunction. This is to clean up the front view
more quickly.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Instrument panel and rear
vents
D To heat the vehicle interior while de-

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel and rear vents. The
instrument panel and rear vents may be
opened or closed as shown.

frosting the windshield, choose floor/
windshield air flow.

XS19024
Close

Open

Side and center vents

Open

XS19023a
Close

Rear vents (Crew Max models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

393

07 04.26

—Checking and replacing the
air conditioning filter

Air conditioning filter—

XS19017

The air conditioning filter information
label is placed inside of the glove box
as shown and indicates that a filter has
been installed.

The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter may need to be
replaced if the air flow of the air conditioning and heater experiences extreme
reductions in operating efficiency, or if
the windows begin to fog up easily.

XS19007

The air conditioning filter is behind the
glove box.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,
inspect and replace the air conditioning
filter according to
the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with
heavy traffic flow, such as inner city or
desert areas, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement.”)

The air conditioning filter prevents dust
from entering the vehicle through the air
conditioning vent.

394

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS19008

1. Open the glove box, and slide off
the damper as shown.

XS19009c

XS19010a

2. Push in each side of the glove box
to disconnect the claws.

3. Remove the filter cover while pushing in both ends of the cover.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

395

07 04.26

XS19011a

4. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet.
Inspect the filter on the surface.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

XS19012

When installing the filter in the filter
outlet, keep the arrow pointing up.

INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance.

396

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Information before driving your Toyota
Off−road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Long reach iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear step bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

436
437
437
439
440
440
441
442
443
444
444
448
448
449
450
450
451
463
464
466

435

07 04.26

Off−road vehicle precautions

XS20003

This vehicle has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to
the height of its center of gravity to
make it capable of performing in a wide
variety of off−road applications. Specific
design characteristics give it a higher
center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature
causes this type of vehicle to be more
likely to rollover. And, it has a significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles. An advantage of the
higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. It is not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than
low−slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off−road
conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at
excessive speeds may cause rollover.

CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

D Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers, if at all possible. Failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover causing death or serious
injury.

D Avoid loading any items on the roof
that will raise the vehicle’s center
of gravity.

D Always slow down in gusty cross-

winds. Because of its profile and
higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side
winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to
have much better control.

436

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D When driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause
loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension and
chassis.

D Do not drive horizontally across

steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off−road vehicle) can tip over sideways much
more easily than forward or backward.

Break−in period

Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

FUEL TYPE

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break−in. But following a few simple tips
for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add
to the future economy and long life of
your vehicle:

Your new vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

D Avoid full throttle acceleration when
starting and driving.

D Avoid racing the engine.
D Try to avoid hard stops during the first

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your
Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
not.

D Do not drive for a long time at any

At a minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
in Canada.

D Do not tow a trailer during the first 800

NOTICE

300 km (200 miles).

single speed, either fast or slow.
km (500 miles).

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three−
way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

437

07 04.26

OCTANE RATING
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an Octane
Rating lower than 87 may result in engine
knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to
engine damage.
If your engine knocks...
If you detect heavy knocking even when
using the recommended fuel, or if you
hear steady knocking while holding a
steady speed on level roads, consult your
Toyota dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice
light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.

438

GASOLINE
ADDITIVES

CONTAINING

DETERGENT

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to
avoid build−up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
contains detergent additives to keep clean
and/or clean intake systems.
QUALITY GASOLINE
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,
Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of four categories
that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 3 or 4 has
been adopted. The WWFC improves air
quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer
satisfaction through better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is
available in many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
blended gasoline where the oxygenate
content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
rating no lower than 87.
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Fuel pump shut off system
GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

NOTICE
z Do not use gasohol other than
stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
z If driveability problems occur (poor
hot starting, vaporizing, engine
knock, etc.), discontinue the use.
z Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.

GASOLINE QUALITY
In a very few cases, you may experience
driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY
100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the
risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls
or an airbag inflates upon collision. To
restart the engine after the fuel pump shut
off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start
it.

CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle
before restarting the engine. If you
find that fuel has leaked onto the
ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. In
this case, do not restart the engine.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

439

07 04.26

Operation in foreign countries

Three−way catalytic converters

If you plan to drive your Toyota in
another country...

The three−way catalytic converter is an
emission control device installed in the
exhaust system.

First, comply with the vehicle registration
laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
number).

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the
exhaust gas.

XS20001

CAUTION

D Keep people and combustible mate-

rials away from the exhaust pipe
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
engine

D Do not idle or park your vehicle
over anything that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.

XS20002a

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

440

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Engine exhaust cautions
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases
flowing into the three−way catalytic
converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
this and other damage, observe the
following precautions:
z Use only unleaded gasoline.
z Do not drive with an extremely low
fuel level; running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−
way catalytic converter.
z Do not allow the engine to run at
idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
z Avoid racing the engine.
z Do not push−start or pull−start your
vehicle.
z Do not turn off the ignition while
the vehicle is moving.

z Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
electrical system, electronic ignition
system/distributor ignition system
or fuel systems could cause an extremely high three−way catalytic
converter temperature.

CAUTION

D Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.

It contains carbon monoxide, which
is a colorless and odorless gas. It
can cause unconsciousness or even
death.

z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, take your
vehicle in for a check−up as soon
as possible. Remember, your Toyota
dealer knows your vehicle and its
three−way catalytic converter system best.

D Make sure the exhaust system has

z To ensure that the three−way
catalytic converter and the entire
emission control system operate
properly, your vehicle must receive
the periodic inspections required by
the Toyota Maintenance Schedule.
For
scheduled
maintenance
information, refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.

D Do not run the engine in a garage

no holes or loose connections. The
system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something,
or notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust, have the system
checked immediately.
or enclosed area except for the
time needed to drive the vehicle in
or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.

D Do not remain for a long time in a

parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

441

07 04.26

Facts about engine oil
consumption
D To allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.

D If you smell exhaust fumes in the

vehicle, open the windows and
close the rear window to ensure
plenty of fresh air enters the vehicle. If you can smell exhaust
fumes even though there are no
other vehicles in the surrounding
area, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer. Continued inhalation of exhaust fumes can lead
to death by gas poisoning.

D Toyota does not recommend occu-

pying the rear cargo area when it
is fitted with a slide−in camper,
camper shell or other type cover
while the engine is running. This
caution applies to both driving and
stopped or parked situations with
the engine running. Particular care
should be taken to prevent exhaust
gases from entering camper bodies,
trailers or other enclosures on or
around your vehicle. If exhaust
fumes are detected, open all windows and thoroughly ventilate the
area.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
Engine oil has the primary functions of
lubricating and cooling the inside of the
engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal
engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.

D Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
of this oil into the combustion chamber.
This oil as well as some part of the oil
film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion
gases during the combustion process.

D Oil is also used to lubricate the stems

442

of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Iridium−tipped spark plugs [4.7
L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine]
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed by high−speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls
have not become conditioned.
When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK
One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil
function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.

CY20008

NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check,
see “Checking the engine oil level” on
page 543 in Section 7−2.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped
spark plugs.

NOTICE
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.
Do not adjust gaps for engine performance smooth driveability.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

443

07 04.26

Long reach iridium−tipped
spark plugs [5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
engine]

Long reach
type

XS20015

Brake system
The tandem master cylinder brake system
is a hydraulic system with two separate
sub−systems. If either sub−system should
fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your
stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
Your engine is fitted with long reach
iridium−tipped spark plugs.

NOTICE
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.
Do not adjust gaps for engine performance smooth driveability.

CAUTION

D Do not pump the brake pedal if the

engine stalls. Each push on the
pedal uses up your reserved vacuum.

D Even if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will
increase.

BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to
power−assist the brakes. If the engine
should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal
pedal pressure. There is enough reserved
vacuum for one or two stops—but no
more!

For details about the spark plug type, see
“Service specifications” on page 582 in
Section 8.

444

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to help prevent lock−up of the wheels
during a sudden braking or braking on
slippery road surfaces. This assists in
providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under
these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
In this situation, to let the anti−lock
brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
tends to activate the anti−lock brake system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in
the engine compartment for a few seconds
when the engine is started or just after
the vehicle begins to move. This means
that the anti−lock brake system is in the
self−check mode, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may
occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:

D You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedal
pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You
may also hear the motor sound in the
engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.

D At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may
move a little forward.

CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock
brake system: Although the anti−lock
brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti−lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.
Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate
speed and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Compared with vehicles without an
anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

D Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
covered roads.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

445

07 04.26

“ABS” warning light

D Driving with tire chains installed.
D Driving over the steps such as the
joints on the road.

D Driving on roads where the road

LS20017

surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed
resulting in a longer stopping distance.

The light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
the anti−lock brake system and the brake
assist system work properly, the light
turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter,
if either of the systems malfunctions, the
light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
following systems do not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally.

D
D
D
D
D

Type A

LS20018

Anti−lock brake system
Brake assist system
Traction control system
“AUTO LSD” system
Vehicle stability control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels will lock up during a
sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

Type B

446

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, or remains on.

D The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE
SYSTEM
Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type
parking brake system. This type of brake
system needs burnishing of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Toyota dealer perform the burnishing.

When you slam the brakes on, the
brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold
down the brake pedal firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time,
you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

447

07 04.26

Brake pad wear limit
indicators

Rear step bumper
The rear step bumper is for rear end
protection and easier step−up loading.

CAUTION

XS20004

XS20005

D Do not allow more than one person

to get on the rear step bumper at
a time. It is designed for only one
person.

D Never drive the vehicle with anyone
on the rear step bumper.

D Do not stand on the rear step
The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.

bumper while the vehicle is moving.

Type A

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not
replaced when necessary.

XS20007

Type B

448

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Your Toyota’s identification—
—Vehicle identification number

XS20006

The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.

—Engine number

XS20010

LS20011

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also on the Certification Label.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

LS20014

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

449

07 04.26

Theft prevention labels

Suspension and chassis

Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 47
mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

XS20008a

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.

450

The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to another, will be impossible.

CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Tire information—
—Tire symbols

XS20011

This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire
size” on page 453.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” on page 452.
3. Uniform tire quality grading—
For details, see “—Uniform tire
quality grading” on page 454.
4. The location of the treadwear
indicators—For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 551.
5. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

451

07 04.26

—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
7. “TUBELESS”
or
“TUBE
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not
have a tube inside the tire and air
is directly filled in the tire. A tube
type tire has a tube inside the tire
and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
8. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 551.
9. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For details about recommended
cold
tire
inflation
pressure, see “Tires” on page 586.
10.Summer tire or all season
tire—An all season tire has “M+S”
on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer
tire. For details, see “Types of
tires” on page 466.

452

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

XS20014

This illustration indicates typical DOT
and Tire Identification Number (TIN).
1. “DOT” symbol
2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
4. Tire size code
5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Tire size

XS20012

This illustration indicates typical tire
size.
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,
T=Temporary use)
2. Section width (in millimeters)
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section
width)
4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,
D=Diagonal)
5. Wheel diameter (in inches)
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one
letter)

—Name of each section of tire

SU21026a

1. Section width
2. Tire height
3. Wheel diameter

SU21027

1. Bead
2. Sidewall
3. Shoulder
4. Tread
5. Belt
6. Inner liner
7. Reinforcing rubber
8. Carcass
9. Rim lines
10.Bead wires
11. Chafer

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

453

07 04.26

—Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared
in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
DOT quality grades—All passenger
vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A

454

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is
a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1−1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning)
traction.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Temperature A, B, C—The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No.109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for
this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

455

07 04.26

—Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that
condition

Maximum inflation pressure

the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is
shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)
of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as
factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—
(a) curb weight;
(b) accessory weight;
(c) vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) production options weight

Normal occupant weight

68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column
of Table 1 that follows

456

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Tire related term

Meaning

Occupant distribution

distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over
2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Rim

a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)

nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width

nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

457

07 04.26

Tire related term

Meaning

Weather side

the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Bead

the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation

a breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

Bias ply tire

a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass

the tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears
the load

Chunking

the breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord

the strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation

the parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking

any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord
material

a pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim
is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed
to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures
than the corresponding standard tire

458

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Tire related term

Meaning

Groove

the space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

the layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

Innerliner separation

the parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire

a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight
trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that
tire

Maximum permissible inflation presthe maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
sure
Measuring rim

the rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice

any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord
material

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

459

07 04.26

Tire related term

Meaning

Outer diameter

the overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,
including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles,
and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less

Ply

a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords

Ply separation

a parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

a mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures
than the corresponding standard tire

Section width

the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,
excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

that portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation

the parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

460

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Tire related term

Meaning

Snow tire

a tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to
the ASTM E−1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction
test as described in ASTM F−1805−00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel
Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow−and Ice−Covered Surfaces, and
which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
) on at least one sidewall

Test rim

the rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

Tread

that portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

Tread rib

a tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation

pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators(TWI)

the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication
of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel−holding fixture

the fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

461

07 04.26

Table 1– Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, number Vehicle normal load, number of occu- Occupant distribution in a normally
pants
loaded vehicle
of occupants
2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third
seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third
seat, 1 in fourth seat

462

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load
capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity. Follow
the load limits shown below. Total
load capacity and seating capacity
are also described on the tire and
loading information label. For location
of the tire and loading information
label, see “Checking tire inflation
pressure” on page 548.
Total load capacity:
Total load capacity means combined
weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage. Tongue load is included
when trailer towing. For the total load
capacity about your vehicle, see
“Vehicle capacity weight” on page 576
in Section 8.

Seating capacity:
Regular cab models
With separate seats
Total 2
With bench seats
Total 3
Double cab and Crew Max models
With separate seats
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
With bench seats
Total 6 (Front 3, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum
number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 68 kg (150
lb.) per person. Depending on the
weight of each person, the seating capacity given may exceed the total
load capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants
are within the seating capacity,
do not exceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity:
Towing capacity means the maximum
allowable gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo weight) that your
vehicle is able to tow. For the towing
capacity about your vehicle, see
“Towing capacity” on page 579 in Section 8.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight)
and the number of occupants. For details, see “Capacity and distribution”
that follows.
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than
each load limit. That may cause
not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering
ability and braking ability, which
may cause an accident.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

463

07 04.26

Cargo and luggage—
—Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in
the vehicle, observe the following:
D Put cargo and luggage in the rear
deck when at all possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
D Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as far
forward as possible helps maintain
balance.
D For better fuel economy, do not
carry unneeded weight.
CAUTION
D To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during
braking, do not stack anything
behind the front seats higher
than the seatbacks. Keep cargo
and luggage low, as close to
the floor as possible.

464

—Capacity and distribution
D Never allow anyone to ride in
the rear deck. It is not designed
for passengers. They should
ride in their seats with their
seat belts properly fastened.
Otherwise, they are much more
likely to suffer death or serious
bodily injury, in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.
D Do not drive with objects left
on top of the instrument panel.
They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they
may move during sharp vehicle
acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the
vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occupants.

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is
650
lbs.
(1400–750
(5x150)=650 lbs.)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

(5) Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
For details about trailer towing, see
“Trailer towing” on page 475 in Section 3.

SU21020
Cargo
capacity

Total load
capacity
Example on Your Vehicle
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of A kg (lb.) are riding
in your vehicle with the total load capacity of B kg (lb.), the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C kg (lb.) as follows:
B kg (lb.) – A kg (lb.) = C kg (lb.)
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D
kg (lb.) get on, the available cargo
and luggage load will be reduced E
kg (lb.) as follows:
C kg (lb.) – D kg (lb.) = E kg (lb.)

As shown in the above example, if the
number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load equaling the
combined weight of occupants who
got on later must be reduced. In other
words, if the increase in the number
of occupants causes the excess of
the total load capacity (combined
weight of occupants plus cargo and
luggage load), you have to reduce the
cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity,
see “Vehicle load limits” on page 463
in this Section.
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load
is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to
unbalance of the vehicle, causing
an accident.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

465

07 04.26

Types of tires
Determine what kind of tires your
vehicle is originally equipped with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the
same traction performance as snow
tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow−covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow−covered or icy
roads, we recommend using snow
tires. If installing snow tires, be sure
to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be
adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year
round.

466

All season tires, however, do not have
adequate
traction
performance
compared with snow tires in heavy or
loose snow. Also, all season tires fall
short in acceleration and handling
performance compared with summer
tires in highway driving.
The details about how to distinguish
summer tires from all season tires are
described on page 451.
CAUTION
D Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as
this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting
in loss of control.
D Do not use tires other than the
manufacture’s
designated
tires, and never mix tires or
wheels of the sizes different
from the originals.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION
STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off−road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

468
468
469
471
472
473
474
475
490

467

07 04.26

Before starting the engine
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,
seat cushion angle, head restraint
height and steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view
mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.

468

How to start the engine—
—Cranking hold function
Once you turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position and release it, the cranking hold function continues to crank the
engine in “ON” position until it starts.
The function stops cranking the engine
after about 25 seconds maximum if the
engine has not started yet. When you
crank the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it.
If you hold the ignition switch in “START”
position, the function will keep cranking
for about 30 seconds maximum.

(a) Before cranking
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you
need to restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A starter safety device will
prevent the starter from operating if the
selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
the floor until driving off.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Tips for driving in various
conditions
D Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.

(b) Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to
follow the instructions in “(a) Before
cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start
a cold or hot engine as follows:
With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
crank the engine by turning the ignition
switch to the “START” position. Release it
when the engine starts.
Engine should be warmed up by driving,
not in idle. For warming up, drive with
smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.
If the engine stalls...

NOTICE

This will allow you much better control.

z Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.
z Do not race a cold engine.
z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.

D Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
onto high, sharp−edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire damage such
as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps
or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.

D When parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
parking brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block the
wheels.

Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.
If the engine will not start...
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page
493 in Section 4.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

469

07 04.26

D Washing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To
see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

D Four−wheel drive models—Toyota rec-

ommends not using four−wheel drive on
dry hard−surfaced roads, because four−
wheel driving will cause unnecessary
noise and wear, and poor fuel economy.

D Four−wheel drive models—In cold tem-

peratures, noise may occur when driving in two−wheel drive before the transfer is warmed up. Therefore, first drive
in four−wheel drive until the transfer is
warmed up.

470

D Do not drive in excess of the speed

CAUTION

D Before driving off, make sure that

the parking brake is fully released
and the brake system warning light
(parking brake reminder light) is
off.

D Do not leave your vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is running.

D Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. It can cause
dangerous overheating, needless
wear, and poor fuel economy.

D To drive down a long or steep hill,

reduce your speed and downshift.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.

D Be careful when accelerating, up-

limit. Even if the legal speed limit
permits it, do not drive over 140
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
has high−speed capability tires.
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control
and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle
are high−speed capability tires or
not before driving at such speeds.

D Do not continue normal driving

when the brakes are wet. If they are
wet, your vehicle will require a
longer stopping distance, and it
may pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle
securely.

shifting, downshifting or braking on
a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause
the vehicle to skid or spin.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Driving in the rain
Driving on a slippery road surface
Drive carefully when it is raining, because
visibility will be reduced, the windows may
become fogged−up, and the road will be
slippery.

When encountering flooded roads

CAUTION

D Sudden braking, acceleration and

because the road surface will be especially slippery.

steering when driving on a slippery
road surface may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to
control the vehicle, resulting in an
accident.

D Refrain from high speeds when driving

D Sudden changes in engine speed,

D Drive carefully when it starts to rain,

on an expressway in the rain, because
there may be a layer of water between
the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

such as sudden engine braking,
may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

D After

driving through a puddle,
lightly depress the brake pedal to
make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads
may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on
only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control
may be affected, resulting in an accident.

Do not drive on a road that has flooded
after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause
serious damage to the vehicle.

NOTICE
Driving on a flooded road may cause
the engine to stall as well as cause
serious vehicle malfunctions such as
shorts in electrical components and
engine damage from water immersion.
In the event that you drive on a
flooded road and the vehicle is
flooded, be sure to have your Toyota
dealer check brake function, changes
in quantity and quality of oil and fluid
used for the engine, transmission,
transfer (4WD vehicles), differentials,
etc. and lubricant condition for the
propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the
function of all joints and bearings.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

471

07 04.26

Off−road driving precautions
When driving your vehicle off−road, please
observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help
prevent the closure of areas to off−road
vehicles.

D U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where
off−road vehicles are permitted to travel.

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

b. Respect private property. Get owner’s
permission before entering private property.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed.
Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.
d. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should
be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and
Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining
to driving your vehicle off−road, consult
the following organizations.

D State and Local Parks and Recreation
Departments

Land Management

CAUTION

D Drive carefully when off the road.

Do not take unnecessary risks by
driving in dangerous places.

D Do not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off−road. A
bad bump could jerk the wheel and
injure your hands. Keep both hands
and especially your thumbs on the
outside of the rim.

D Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.

D After driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or
trapped on the underbody. Clear off
any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering
to the underbody, a breakdown or
fire could occur.

D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

D When driving off−road or in rugged

D State Motor Vehicle Bureau
D Recreational Vehicle Clubs
472

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Winter driving tips
NOTICE
z If driving through water, such as
when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the river bed for
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.
z Take all necessary safety measures
to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does
not occur.
z Water entering the engine air intake
will cause severe engine damage.
z Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in
shift quality, locking up of your
transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.
z Water can wash the grease from
wheel bearings, causing rusting and
premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission
and transfer case, reducing the gear
oil’s lubricating qualities.

z Sand and mud that has accumulated
in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency
and may damage brake system components.
z Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off−road
driving that has taken you through
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly protected against freezing.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology is
a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)
See “Checking the engine coolant level”
on page 546 in Section 7−2 for details of
coolant type selection.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).

NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

473

07 04.26

Dinghy towing
Check the condition of the battery and
cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
any battery, so it must be in top shape
to provide enough power for winter starting. Section 7−3 tells you how to visually
inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer
and most service stations will be pleased
to check the level of charge.
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for the cold weather.
See page 544 in Section 7−2 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter
months may cause harder starting. If you
are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased
to help.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the
locks to keep them from freezing. To open
a frozen lock, try heating the key before
inserting it.
Use a washer fluid containing an anti−
freeze solution.
This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.

474

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when
there is a possibility it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into
“P” and block the front wheels. Do not
use the parking brake, or snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking
brake mechanism may freeze, making it
hard to release.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating
under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
can make steering difficult. During bad
winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving,
we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.

XS30007

Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Some of the things you might put in the
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
passenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability
and driving economy (fuel consumption,
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your
local Toyota dealer for further details before towing.

NOTICE
When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Toyota dealer for further information on additional requirements
such as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS

CAUTION
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme
care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer’s characteristics
and operating conditions.
The vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance,
and the hitch.
Follow all the instructions described
in this section. Failure to do so could
cause an accident resulting in death
or serious injury.

Before towing, make sure the gross
trailer
weight,
gross
combination
weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
weight and trailer tongue load are all
within the limits.
The gross trailer weight and tongue load
can be measured with platform scales
found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

475

07 04.26

Reference
Vehicle weight
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable gross vehicle weight.
The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue load (or the king pin
weight).
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable gross axle weight.
The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable gross combination weight.
The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional
equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).
The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.
Towing Capacity is the maximum allowable gross trailer weight.
Towing Capacity is calculated considering base vehicle with necessary vehicle equipment and 150 pound driver.
Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the towing capacity, Gross Trailer weight
includes the trailer, cargo and necessary equipment for towing.
The tongue load is the load placed on the trailer hitch ball.
The king pin weight is the load placed on the fifth wheel trailer hitch mount.

476

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

GCWR, Towing capacity

Model code∗7
GSK50L−TRADKA
GSK51L−THADKA

Engine

kg (lb.)
Cab type

1GR−FE∗1

Driving
system
2WD∗4

UCK50L−TRADKA
UCK51L−THADKA
UCK55L−TRADKA

2WD∗4
2UZ−FE∗2
4WD∗5

UCK56L−THADKA

Regular

USK50L−TRTDKA
USK51L−THTDKA

2WD∗4

USK56L−THTDKA
∗1 :
∗2 :
∗3 :
∗4 :
∗5 :
∗6 :

4WD∗5

Towing capacity

With towing
package

Without towing package

With towing
package

Without towing package

Standard

—

4535 (10000)

—

2310 (5100)

Long

—

4535 (10000)

—

2265 (5000)

Standard

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3855 (8500)

3175 (7000)

Long

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3810 (8400)

3125 (6900)

Standard

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3715 (8200)

3035 (6700)

Long

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3670 (8100)

2990 (6600)

Standard
Long

3UR−FE∗3

USK55L−TRTDKA

GCWR
Bed type

Standard
Long

7030 (15500)
6800

(15000)∗6

7255 (16000)
7030 (15500)
6800

(15000)∗6

7255 (16000)

6350 (14000)
6350 (14000)
6350 (14000)
6350 (14000)

4715 (10400)
4490 (9900)∗6
4895 (10800)
4580 (10100)
4350 (9600)∗6
4760 (10500)

4035 (8900)
3990 (8800)
3945 (8700)
3900 (8600)

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
Four−wheel drive models
With P275/55R20 tires
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

477

07 04.26

∗7 :

The model code is indicated on the Certification label. See “Your Toyota’s identification” on page 449 in Section 2 for the Certification label location.

478

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

kg (lb.)
Model code∗6

Engine

GSK51L−CRASKA

1GR−FE∗1

Cab
type

UCK52L−CHASKA
UCK56L−CRASKA

Grade

With towing
package

Without towing
package

With towing
package

Without towing
package

2WD∗4

Standard

SR5

—

4535 (10000)

—

2175 (4800)

SR5

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3670 (8100)

3035 (6700)

Limited

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3670 (8100)

2990 (6600)

SR5

6120 (13500)

—

3625 (8000)

—

SR5

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3535 (7800)

2900 (6400)

Limited

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3535 (7800)

2855 (6300)

SR5

6120 (13500)

—

3490 (7700)

—

SR5

7255 (16000)

6350 (14000)

4805 (10600)

3900 (8600)

Limited

7255 (16000)

6350 (14000)

4805 (10600)

3900 (8600)

SR5

7255 (16000)

—

4760 (10500)

—

SR5

7255 (16000)

6350 (14000)

4670 (10300)

3760 (8300)

Limited

7255 (16000)

6350 (14000)

4670 (10300)

3760 (8300)

SR5

7255 (16000)

—

4625 (10200)

—

2WD∗4

4WD∗5

UCK57L−CHASKA

Double

USK52L−CHTSKA
USK56L−CRTSKA
USK56L−CRTLKA
USK57L−CHTSKA

Standard
Long

USK51L−CRTSKA
2WD∗4

USK51L−CRTLKA

Standard
Long

2UZ−FE∗2

UCK56L−CRALKA

Towing capacity

Bed type

UCK51L−CRASKA
UCK51L−CRALKA

GCWR

Driving
system

Standard
Long

3UR−FE∗3
4WD∗5

Standard
Long

∗1 :
∗2 :
∗3 :
∗4 :
∗5 :
∗6 :

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
Four−wheel drive models
The model code is indicated on the Certification label. See “Your Toyota’s identification” on page 449 in Section 2 for the Certification label location.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

479

07 04.26

kg (lb.)
Model code∗5

Engine

Cab
type

UCK51L−PSASKA
UCK51L−PSALKA
UCK56L−PSASKA

2UZ−FE∗1
4WD∗4
Crew
Max

USK51L−PSTSKA
USK56L−PSTSKA
USK56L−PSTLKA

GCWR
Bed type

2WD∗3

UCK56L−PSALKA
USK51L−PSTLKA

Driving
system

Short
2WD∗3

3UR−FE∗2
4WD∗4

Towing capacity

Grade

With towing
package

Without towing
package

With towing
package

Without towing
package

SR5

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3625 (8000)

2945 (6500)

Limited

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3625 (8000)

2945 (6500)

SR5

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3490 (7700)

2810 (6200)

Limited

6120 (13500)

5440 (12000)

3490 (7700)

2810 (6200)

SR5

7255 (16000)

6350 (14000)

4715 (10400)

3810 (8400)

Limited

7255 (16000)

6350 (14000)

4715 (10400)

3810 (8400)

SR5

7255 (16000)

6350 (14000)

4580 (10100)

3670 (8100)

Limited

7255 (16000)

6350 (14000)

4580 (10100)

3670 (8100)

∗1 :
∗2 :
∗3 :
∗4 :
∗5 :

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
Four−wheel drive models
The model code is indicated on the Certification label. See “Your Toyota’s identification” on page 449 in Section 2 for the Certification label location.

480

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

Gross trailer weight

Tongue load

D The gross trailer weight must never

exceed towing capacity described in
the table on page 477.

D The gross combination weight must

never exceed the GCWR described
in the table on page 477.

XS20010

D The gross vehicle weight must nev-

Tongue load

er exceed the GVWR indicated the
Certification Label as shown.

D The gross axle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR indicated the Certification Label as
shown.

D Exceeding

the towing capacity,
GVWR, GCWR or GAWR can cause
an accident resulting in death or
serious personal injuries.

XS30012
Gross trailer weight

Certification Label

100 = [9 to 11]%

Conventional towing

Gross trailer weight

King pin weight

XS30013a
King pin weight
Gross trailer weight

100 = [15 to 25]%

Fifth wheel towing
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

481

07 04.26

CAUTION

D A recommended tongue load or
king pin weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or
towing as described below.

D In order

to ensure the recommended values shown below, the
trailer must be loaded by referring
to the following instructions.
1. Conventional Towing
The tongue load is 9 to 11 % of
the Gross Trailer weight.

D Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-

2. Fifth wheel Towing
The king pin weight is 15 to 25
% of the Gross Trailer weight.
Current fifth−wheel trailer designs
are not compatible with Short bed
(Crew Max models).

ent weight capacities established by
the hitch manufacturer. Even though
the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the
operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in death
or serious personal injuries.

If the gross trailer weight is over
907 kg (2000 lbs), it is necessary
to use a sway control device with
sufficient capacity.
If the gross trailer weight is over
2268 kg (5000 lbs), it is necessary
to use a weight distributing hitch
with sufficient capacity.
If using a weight distributing
hitch when towing, keep your vehicle level with the ground.

482

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

HITCHES

TRAILER BALL

D If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you

Follow these easy steps to properly determine the correct trailer ball for your application:

should consult with your Toyota dealer.

D Use only a hitch recommended by the
hitch manufacturer and the one which
conforms to the gross trailer weight
requirement.

D The hitch must be bolted securely to
the vehicle frame and installed according to the hitch manufacturer’s instructions.

D The hitch ball and king pin should have
a light coat of grease.

D Toyota recommends removing the trail-

er hitch whenever you are not towing
a trailer to reduce the possibility of
additional damage caused by the hitch
if your vehicle is struck from behind.
After removing the hitch, seal any
mounting holes in the vehicle body to
prevent entry of pollutants such as exhaust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size
for the trailer coupler. Most couplers
are stamped with the required trailer
ball size. The sizes you will most likely
find stamped on the coupler are:
Trailer class
IV
II and III
I

LS30011

Typical trailer ball size
2 5/16 in.
2 in.
1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to
match or exceed the gross trailer
weight rating of the trailer. The trailer
ball load rating should be printed on
the top of the ball.

1
2
3
4

Trailer ball load rating
Ball diameter
Shank length
Shank diameter

3. When mounted in the ball mount, the
threaded ball shank must protrude beyond the bottom of the lock washer
and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer
ball shank must be matched to the ball
mount hole diameter size.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

483

07 04.26

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO
TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

XS30001

BUMPER TOWING (steel bumper only)
The rear bumper of your vehicle is
equipped with a hole to install a trailer
ball.
For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer
ball setup on must be the proper height
for the coupler on the trailer.

XS30002

FIFTH WHEEL TRAILER

NOTICE
When towing a fifth wheel trailer, be
careful not to hit the cabin or deck
by the trailer while making a sharp
turn.

The gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus cargo weight) when towing with the bumper must never exceed 2268 kg (5000 lb.).

484

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

D Toyota

XS30003

CAUTION

recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

D If the gross trailer weight exceeds

D A safety chain must always be used

D Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-

between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.

453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are
required.
draulic system as it would lower its
braking effectiveness.

D Never tow a trailer without using a

safety chain securely attached to
both the trailer and the vehicle. If
damage occurs to the coupling unit
or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer wandering over into another
lane.

XS30004

1. Coupler
2. Trailer ball
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

485

07 04.26

Connector
cover

SERVICE CONNECTOR
BRAKE CONTROLLER
package)

FOR TOWING
(with towing

Your vehicle is equipped with a service
connector for the trailer brake controller
as shown.
Access the service connector.
1. Remove the scuff plate.
2. Remove the clip (screw type) and trim
board.

XS30014a

Trim board

Scuff
plate

TIRES

D Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are
properly inflated. See page 548 in Section 7−2 and page 586 in Section 8 for
instructions.

D The trailer tires should be inflated to
the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the gross
trailer weight.

Remove the connector cover from the service connector before connecting the connector.
Link the connector to the trailer brake
controller via the sub wire harness stored
in the glove box. The detailed explanation
of the sub wire harness circuit is packed
together with the sub wire harness.
Be sure to position the trailer brake controller where it does not prevent the driver
from operating the pedal.

Clip

486

Toyota recommends that the sub wire harness be stored in the glove box when it
is not in use.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

TOWING
LIGHTS

CONNECTOR

FOR

TRAILER

D Your vehicle is equipped with wire har-

XS30005

4−Pin connector

ness sockets for trailer lights under the
rear bumper. Use them to connect and
operate the trailer lights. However, the
trailer lights must comply with federal,
state/provincial and local regulations.
See your local recreational vehicle
dealer or rental agency for the correct
type of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation of the
turn signals and stop lights each time
you hitch up. Direct splicing may damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction of your lights.
The towing connector can be also connected to the trailer brake and trailer
sub battery.

XS30006

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

D If your vehicle is new or equipped with

any new power train components (such
as the engine, transmission, differential
and wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer
until it has been driven for over 800
km (500 miles). After the vehicle has
been driven for over 800 km (500
miles), you can start towing. However,
drive the vehicle at a speed of less
than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a
trailer for another 800 km (500 miles).
In addition, avoid full throttle acceleration.

MAINTENANCE

D If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. For this
information,
please
refer
to
the
scheduled maintenance information in
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

D Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

4−Pin, 7−Pin connector

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

487

07 04.26

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

D Check that your vehicle remains level

when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down
condition, and check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes.

D Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
loaded so that it cannot shift.

D Check that your rear view mirrors con-

form to any applicable federal state/
provincial or local regulations. If not,
install the rear view mirrors required
for towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle−
trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading.
Keep these in mind when towing:

D Speed limits for towing a trailer vary

by state or province. Do not exceed
the posted towing speed limit.

488

D Before starting out, check operation of

the lights and all vehicle−trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Before actually towing a trailer, practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from
traffic until you learn the feel.

D Backing with a trailer is difficult and

requires practice. Grip the bottom of
the steering wheel and move your hand
to the left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that
when backing without a trailer.) Also,
just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
turning. Have someone guide you when
backing to reduce the risk of an accident.

D Because stopping distance may be in-

creased, following distance should be
increased when towing a trailer. For
each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow
at least one vehicle and trailer length
between you and the vehicle ahead.
Avoid sudden braking as you may skid,
resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or
slippery surfaces.

D Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.

The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
tight turn. Slow down before making a
turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
braking.

D Remember that when making a turn,

the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
making a larger than normal turning
radius with your vehicle.

D Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect handling of your vehicle
and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large
trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
straight ahead. If you make no extreme
correction with the steering or brakes,
the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

D Be careful when passing other ve-

hicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do
not forget the length of your trailer and
be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D In order to maintain engine braking effi-

ciency when driving on a long steep
downgrade, do not use the transmission in “D”. Select an appropriate shift
range in “S” mode (See “Automatic
transmission” on page 209 in Section
1−7).

D Because of the added load of the trail-

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over
30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” on page 497 in
Section 4.

D Always place wheel blocks under both

the vehicle and trailer wheels when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a trailer, but if it
cannot be avoided, do so only after
performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

CAUTION

D Do not use cruise control when you

are towing down long, steep grades
or with heavy loads.

D Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.

D Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
When restarting out after parking on a
slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position,
start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal, and slowly pull or back away
from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply
your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

489

07 04.26

How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer
Improving fuel economy is easy—just take
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last
longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and
repairs:

D Avoid long engine idling. If you have

D Keep your tires inflated at the cor-

ving. Use a gear position suitable for
the road on which you are travelling.

rect pressure. Underinflation causes
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page
548 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

D Do not carry unneeded weight in
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
heavier load on the engine, causing
greater fuel consumption.

D Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once
the engine is running smoothly, begin
driving—but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may
take a little longer.

D Put the selector lever into the “D”

when engine braking is not required.
Driving with the selector lever in a
position other than “D” will reduce the
fuel
economy
(For
details,
see
“Automatic transmission” on page 209
in Section 1−7.)

D Accelerate

slowly and smoothly.
Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high
gear as quickly as possible.

490

a long wait and you are not in traffic,
it is better to turn off the engine and
start again later.

D Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-

D Avoid continuous speeding up and
slowing down.
wastes fuel.

Stop−and−go

driving

D Avoid

unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
to time the traffic signals so you only
need to stop as little as possible or
take advantage of through streets to
avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear
on your brakes.

D Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
whenever possible.

D Do not rest your foot on brake pedal. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.

D Keep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire
wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

D Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
weight but also helps prevent corrosion

D Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in

top shape. A dirty air cleaner,
improper valve clearance, dirty plugs,
dirty
oil
and
grease,brakes
not
adjusted,
etc.
all
lower
engine
performance and contribute to poor fuel
economy. For longer life of all parts
and lower operating costs, keep all
maintenance work on schedule, and if
you
often
drive
under
severe
conditions, see that your vehicle
receives more frequent maintenance.
(For
scheduled
maintenance
information,
please
refer
to
the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

D Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater
the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast
down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is running.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

491

07 04.26

SECTION
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . .

492

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

493
497
497
497
498
511
511
516
518
518

07 04.26

If your vehicle will not start—
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure
you have followed the correct starting procedure given in “How to start the engine”
on page 468 in Section 3 and that you
have sufficient fuel. If your vehicle is
equipped with the engine immobilizer system, also check whether the other keys
will start the engine. If they work, your
key may be broken. Have the key
checked at your Toyota dealer. If none of
your keys work, there may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your
Toyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engine
immobilizer system)” on page 18 in Section 1−2.)
If the engine is not turning over or is
turning over too slowly—
1. Check that the battery terminals are
tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
on the interior lights or personal lights.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c) Jump starting” for further
instructions.

(b) Starting a flooded engine
NOTICE
Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. It may damage the vehicle or
cause a collision when the engine
starts. Also the three−way catalytic
converter may overheat and become a
fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal
speed but will not start—
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position and try starting the
engine again.
2. If the engine will not start, the engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
engine” for further instructions.
3. If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking.
If this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the “START” position with the accelerator
pedal fully depressed. Keep the key and
accelerator pedal in these positions for 15
seconds and release them. Then try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start after 15 seconds of cranking, release the key, wait
a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

493

07 04.26

(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and
damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns,
electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be
followed precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this
procedure, we strongly recommend that
you seek the help of a competent mechanic or towing service.

CAUTION

D Batteries

contain
sulfuric
acid
which is poisonous and corrosive.
Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling
acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.

D If you should accidentally get acid

on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to
apply water with a sponge or cloth
while en route to the medical office.

494

D The gas normally produced by a

battery will explode if a flame or
spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do
not smoke or light a match while
jump starting.

NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
are sure that the booster battery is
correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
When boosting, use the battery of
matching or higher quality. Any other
battery may be difficult to jump start
with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the
battery for several minutes.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster and discharged batteries. Lay a cloth over the open vents
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During
jump starting, run the engine at about
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Discharged battery

LS40034
Positive
terminal
(“+” mark) Jumper
cable

Booster
battery

Jumper cable

LS40035
Discharged battery

Positive terminal
(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the order a, b, c, d.
a. Connect the clamp of the positive
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal on the discharged battery.
b. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the positive (red) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal on the booster
battery.

Negative terminal
(“−” mark)

XS40001
Booster
battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative
(black) jumper cable to the negative (–)
terminal on the booster battery.
d. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the negative (black) jumper cable to
a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
point of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
The recommended connecting points
are shown in the following illustrations:

Connecting point for 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE)
engine

XS40002

Connecting point for 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
engine
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

495

07 04.26

XS40003a

Connecting point for 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
engine

Do not connect the cable to or near
any part that moves when the engine
is cranked.

CAUTION
When making the connections, to
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.

496

5. Charge the discharged battery with the
jumper cables connected for approximately 5 minutes. At this time, run the
engine in the vehicle with the booster
battery at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.
6. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
for several minutes with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.

If the first start attempt is not successful...
Check that the clamp on the jumper
cables are tight. Recharge the discharged
battery with the jumper cables connected
for several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.
If another attempt is not successful, the
battery may be depleted. Have it checked
at your Toyota dealer.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.
9. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent (for example, lights left on),
you should have it checked at your Toyota
dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If your engine stalls while
driving

If you cannot increase engine
speed

If your engine stalls while driving...

If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position, and try starting the
engine again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your
vehicle will not start” on page 493 in this
Section.

CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

If your vehicle overheats
If your engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear
a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
engine has probably overheated. You
should follow this procedure...
1. Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Put the transmission in “P”
and apply the parking brake. Turn off
the air conditioning if it is being used.
2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
Wait until the steam subsides before
opening the hood. If there is no coolant
boiling over or steam, leave the engine
running.

CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

497

07 04.26

If you have a flat tire—
3. Visually check to see if the engine
drive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose.
Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
However, note that water draining from
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used.

CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep
hands and clothing away from the
moving fan and engine drive belts.
4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the
coolant is leaking, stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the engine and radiator are
hot. Serious injury could result from
scalding hot fluid and steam blown
out under pressure.
7. After the engine coolant temperature
has cooled to normal, again check the
coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary, bring it up to half full again. Serious coolant loss indicates a leak in the
system. You should have it checked as
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place
well away from the traffic. Avoid
stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot
with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your
emergency flashers.
3. With the transmission in “P” firmly
set the parking brake.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions
thoroughly.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and
there are no obvious leaks, you may
help the engine cool down more quickly
by running it at about 1500 rpm for a
few minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,
add coolant to the reservoir while the
engine is running. Fill it about half full.
For the coolant type, See “Coolant type
selection” on page 546 in Section 7−2.

498

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe
the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury:
D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Otherwise,
personal injury may occur.
D Do not start or run the engine
while your vehicle is supported
by the jack.
D Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking
brake and put the transmission
in “P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being
changed if necessary.

D Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising
the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the
vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and
cause death or serious injury.
D Never get under the vehicle
when the vehicle is supported
by the jack alone.
D Use the jack only for lifting
your vehicle during wheel
changing.
D Do not raise the vehicle with
someone in the vehicle.
D When raising the vehicle, do
not place any objects on top
of or underneath the jack.
D Raise the vehicle only high
enough to remove and change
the tire.

NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a
deflated tire. Driving even a
short distance can damage a
tire and wheel beyond repair.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

499

07 04.26

—Required tools and temporary
spare tire

—Temporary spare tire
The temporary spare tire is designed for temporary emergency
use only.
See also the tire information on page
548 through 557 in Section 7−2 for
details on the treadwear indicators
and other service information.

D Replace the temporary spare
tire with the standard tire as
soon as possible.
D Avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden deceleration and sharp
turns with the temporary spare
tire.

XS40043

CAUTION
D The temporary spare tire was
designed especially for your
Toyota. Do not use it on any
other vehicle.
D Do not use more than one temporary spare tire at the same
time.
D The pressure for the temporary
spare tire must be 230 kPa (2.3
kgf/cm2 or 2.3 bar, 33 psi).
D Do not exceed 80 km/h (50
mph) when driving with the
temporary spare tire.

500

NOTICE
The temporary spare tire does
not have a tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. If
you replace one of the road
tires with the spare, the tire
pressure warning light may be
illuminated. Tire pressure warning system should be operated
properly by re−install the road
tire containing the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters.

Regular cab models
(behind the right seatback)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS40009a

Double cab models
(under the right rear
without storage box)

XS40038a

seats

XS40044

Double cab models
(under the right rear seats with
storage box)

Crew Max models
(behind the right rear seatback)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

501

07 04.26

1. Get the required tools and temporary spare tire.
1 Tool bag
2 Jack
To prepare yourself for an emergency,
you should familiarize yourself with
the use of the jack, each of the tools
and their storage locations.
When storing the tool bag, make sure
it is securely by the tightening strap.

502

Storage box lid
Jack cover
panel

XS40037b

XS40036b

Before getting the required tools
(Double cab models with the storage box)
1. Remove the right storage box lid
by following the procedure below:
1 Turn the knob to the open position.
2 Lift the lid to an upright position.
3 Slide the lid forward until it disengages from the box.

2. Remove the jack cover panel as
shown in the illustration.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

LS40036

Turn the jack joint by hand.
To remove: Turn the joint in direction
1 until the jack is free.
To store: Turn the joint in direction 2
until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it flying forward during a collision
or sudden braking.

XS40006

XS40008

To remove the temporary spare tire:
1. Put a jack handle extension and
jack handle end together as shown
in the illustration.
1 Jack handle extension No.1
2 Jack handle extension No.2
3 Wheel nut wrench
CAUTION
Make sure they are each securely
fixed.

2. Insert the end of the jack handle
extension No.1 into the lowering
screw and turn it counterclockwise.
3. After the tire is lowered completely
to the ground, remove the holding
bracket.
When storing the temporary spare
tire, put it in place with the outer side
of the wheel facing up. Then secure
the tire, taking care that the tire goes
straight up without catching on any
other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden
braking.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

503

07 04.26

—Blocking the wheel

—Loosening wheel nuts

XS40011

XS40015b

Keep winding until three clicks are
heard.

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling when it is
jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a
wheel block in front of one of the front
wheels or behind one of the rear
wheels.

504

3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before
raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
to loosen. To get maximum leverage,
fit the wrench to the nut so that the
handle is on the right side, as shown
above. Grab the wrench near the end
of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does
not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew them about one−half turn.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Positioning the jack
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose
and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious accident.

XS40016b
Front

XS40007

Rear

4. Position the jack at the correct
jack point as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on
a level and solid place.
JACK POINTS:
Front—Under the frame side rail
Rear—Under the rear axle housing

Put a wheel nut wrench, jack handle
extension and jack handle end together as shown in the illustration.
1 Jack handle end
2 Jack handle extension No.1
3 Jack handle extension No.2
4 Wheel nut wrench
CAUTION
Make sure they are each securely
fixed.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

505

07 04.26

—Raising your vehicle

LS40037

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack
handle end with the extension into the
jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise with the handle. As the jack
touches the vehicle and begins to lift,
double−check that it is properly positioned.

XS40017a

CAUTION
Front of
vehicle
5. After making sure that no one
is in the vehicle, as the jack
touches the vehicle and begins
to lift, double−check that it is
properly positioned.
Rear side only—
When positioning the jack under the
rear axle housing, make sure the
groove on the top of the jack fits with
the rear axle housing.

506

6. After making sure that no one
is in the vehicle, raise it high
enough so that the temporary
spare tire can be installed.
Remember you will need more ground
clearance when putting on the temporary spare tire than when removing
the flat tire.

Never get under the vehicle when
the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Changing wheels

XS40018

7. Remove the wheel nuts and
change tires.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and
align the holes in the wheel with the
bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get
at least the top bolt started through
its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it
back over the other bolts.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

XS40019

XS40020

Before putting on wheels, remove any
corrosion on the mounting surfaces
with a wire brush or such. Installation
of wheels without good metal−to−metal contact at the mounting surface can
cause wheel nuts to loosen and
eventually cause a wheel to come off
while driving.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end
inward) and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press back on the
tire back and see if you can tighten
them more.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

507

07 04.26

—Lowering your vehicle
Tighten each nut a little at a time in
the order shown. Repeat the process
until all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loosen and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.

CAUTION

XS40021

D When lowering the vehicle,
make sure all portions of your
body and all other persons
around will not be injured as
the vehicle is lowered to the
ground.

9. Lower the vehicle completely
and tighten the wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle end with the extension counterclockwise with handle
to lower the vehicle, making sure the
handle remains firmly fitted onto the
jack handle extension.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and
turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.
Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands,
such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.
508

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

D Have the wheel nuts tightened
with a torque wrench to the following torques, as soon as
possible
after
changing
wheels. Retighten the wheel
nuts within 160 km (100 miles)
of driving. Otherwise, the nuts
may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause
a serious accident.
Due to the higher torque
specification for these wheel
nuts, if in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them
checked by your Toyota dealer or at a service station.

Taper type
(Steel wheels)

Torque specification:
Taper type (Steel wheels)—
209 N·m (21.3 kgf·m, 154 ft·lbf)
Flat washer type
(Aluminum wheels)—
131 N·m (13.4 kgf·m, 97 ft·lbf)∗
∗ : When temporarily used on spare
tire/wheel, apply 209 N·m (21.3
kgf·m, 154 ft·lbf)

XS40047

Flat washer type
(Aluminum wheels)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

509

07 04.26

—After changing wheels
10.Check the air pressure of the replaced tire.
Adjust the air pressure to the specification designated on page 586 in
Section 8. If the pressure is lower,
drive slowly to the nearest service
station and fill to the correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation valve cap as dirt and moisture
could get into the valve core and
possibly cause air leakage. If the cap
is missing, have a new one put on as
soon as possible.
11. Restow all the tools, jack and
flat tire securely.
As soon after changing wheels as
possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
torque specified on page 509 with a
torque wrench. Have a technician repair the flat tire and replace the temporary spare tire with it.

510

Initial adjustment of the tire
pressure warning system is
necessary after your have replaced
your tires or wheels. See “Tire
pressure warning system” on page
251 in Section 1−7.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the
tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility
of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

XS40035

Aluminum wheels:
Before stowing the flat tire, remove
the center wheel ornament by pushing
from the reverse side.
Be careful not to lose the wheel ornament.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If your vehicle needs to be
towed—

If your vehicle becomes stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt
to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
“AUTO LSD” system, you can use it in
this situation. (For details, see “AUTO
LSD system” on page 244 in Section
1−7.)

CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the
rocking operation the vehicle may
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or objects.

NOTICE

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

If you rock your vehicle, observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other
parts.
z Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever
or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
z Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
z If your vehicle remains stuck after
rocking the vehicle several times,
consider other ways such as towing.

—From front

—From rear

XS40023
(b) Using flat bed truck

Two−wheel drive models

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

511

07 04.26

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
—From front

—From rear

XS40024
(b) Using flat bed truck

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you have it done by your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service. In
consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b).
Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or
commercial tow truck service, tow your
vehicle carefully in accordance with the
instructions given in “—Emergency
towing” on page 514 or 515 in this
Section.

Two−wheel drive models—
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
From front—
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the front
with the rear wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to
the transmission.

Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Four−wheel drive models

512

Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

From rear—Place the ignition switch in
the “ACC” position.

NOTICE
z When lifting wheels, take care to
ensure adequate ground clearance
for towing at the opposite end of
the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the
bumper and/or underbody of the
towed vehicle will be damaged during towing.
z Do not tow with the key removed or
in the “LOCK” position, as the
steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight while towing.

Four−wheel drive models—
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
From front—
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the front
with the rear wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to
the transmission.

From rear—We recommend using a towing dolly under the front wheels. If you do
not use a towing dolly, place the ignition
switch in the “ACC” position, put the
transmission in “N” and the front drive
control switch knob in “2WD”.

NOTICE
Do not tow with the key removed or
in the “LOCK” position when towing
from the rear without a towing dolly.
The steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight.
(b) Using flat bed truck

(b) Using flat bed truck

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

513

07 04.26

—Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

XS40027

XS40029

If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to one of the emergency towing
eyelet under the front of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle.

NOTICE
Type A

All models—

Only use specified towing eyelet;
otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.

NOTICE

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.

Do not tow with sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.

XS40030

Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard−surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.

Type B

514

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Emergency towing eyelet
precautions
D Before emergency towing, check that

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and towing cable
or chain. The eyelet and towing cable
or chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

the eyelet is not broken or damaged
and that the installation bolts are not
loose.

D Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to eyelet.

D Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady
and even force.

D To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.

NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing eyelet provided.
Before towing, release the parking brake
and put the transmission in “N”. The
ignition switch must be in the “ACC”
(engine off) or “ON” (engine running)
position.
Four−wheel drive models—Put the front
drive control switch knob in “2WD”.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

515

07 04.26

—Tips for towing a stuck
vehicle
CAUTION
If the emergency towing eyelet is
used to get out when your vehicle
becomes stuck in the mud, sand or
other condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its
own power, make sure to observe the
precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive stress will be placed
on the towing cable or chain, which
could cause breakage to the cable or
chain. As a result, serious injury or
damage may occur.

If you cannot shift automatic
transmission selector lever

The following methods are effective to
use when your vehicle is stuck in the
mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. In addition, keep away from the vehicles and
towing cable or chain when towing.

XS40033

D Remove the sand and soil in the front
and the back of the tires.

D Place stones or wood under the tires.
Floor shift type

D If the towing vehicle can hardly

move, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service
for assistance.

D Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.

D Keep away from the vehicle during

XS40031

towing.

Column shift type

516

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

If you cannot shift the selector lever
out of “P” position to other positions
even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to
“LOCK” position. Make sure
parking brake is applied.

the
the

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalent
into the hole to push down the shift
lock override button. You can shift
out of “P” position only while pushing the button.

XS40034

4. Shift into “N” position.
5. Insert the cover.
6. Start the engine. For your safety,
keep the brake pedal depressed.

2. Pry up the cover with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.

Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Floor shift type

XS40032

Column shift type

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

517

07 04.26

If you lose your keys
You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number. If your vehicle is equipped
with the engine immobilizer system, the
dealer will also need your master key.
Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—Even if you lose only one key, contact your Toyota dealer to make a new
key. If you lose all your master keys, you
cannot make new keys; the whole engine
immobilizer system must be replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on
page 18 in Section 1−2.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

518

If you lose your wireless
remote control transmitter
You can purchase a new wireless remote control transmitter at your Toyota
dealer.
Have the registered identification numbers
of your transmitters deleted from your vehicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to avoid the possibility of theft or
an accident. Then, have the identification
number of your new transmitter registered.
At the same time, you must bring all of
the remaining transmitters to have them
registered again as well.
You can use the wireless remote control
system with the new transmitter. Contact
your Toyota dealer for detailed information.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

519

07 04.26

SECTION
CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion prevention and appearance care
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

520

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Protecting your Toyota from
corrosion
Toyota, through its diligent research, design and use of the most advanced
technology available, helps prevent corrosion and provides you with the finest quality vehicle construction. Now, it is up to
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help
ensure long−term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion
to your vehicle are:

D The accumulation of road salt, dirt and
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under
the vehicle.

D Chipping

of paint, or undercoating
caused by minor accidents or by
stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your vehicle under certain environmental conditions:

D Road salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the presence of salt in the air near the sea−
coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

D High humidity accelerates corrosion especially when temperatures range just
above the freezing point.

D Wetness or dampness to certain parts

of your vehicle for an extended period
of time, may cause corrosion even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.

D High ambient temperatures can cause

corrosion to those components of the
vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep
your vehicle, particularly the underside, as
clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as
soon as possible.

D High pressure water or steam is effec-

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to simply wet the
mud and debris without removing. The
lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
as trapped water in these areas can
cause corrosion.

D Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.

your

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
page 522 in this Section for more tips.

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of
course, necessary to keep your vehicle
clean by regular washing, but to prevent
corrosion, the following points should be
observed:

Check the condition of your vehicle’s
paint and trim. If you find any chips or
scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone
through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.

To help prevent corrosion on
Toyota, follow these guidelines:

D If you drive on salted roads in the
winter or if you live near the ocean,
you should hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month to minimize corrosion.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

521

07 04.26

Washing and waxing your
Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be
transported in proper containers. If a spill
or leak should occur, immediately clean
and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud
shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size
shields, which come as near to the ground
as possible, are the best. We recommend
that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be
happy to assist in supplying and installing
the shields if they are recommended for
your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
water or snow, your garage may be so
damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your
garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.

522

Washing your Toyota
Keep your
washing.

vehicle

clean

regular

The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and
parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.

D When driving in a coastal area
D When driving on a road sprinkled with
antifreeze

D When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,
bird droppings and carcass of an insect

D When driving in areas where there is

a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or
chemical substances

D When the vehicle becomes remarkably
dirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota
Work in the shade and wait until the
vehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

D When cleaning under floor or chassis, be careful not to injure your
hands.

D Exhaust gases cause the exhaust

pipe to become quite hot. When
washing the vehicle, be careful not
to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the
underside of the vehicle or the wheel
wells.
2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
the soap and water remove the dirt.
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−
pressure car wash, for example) at or
near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler
door opened. If the water enters the air
vent, you may experience trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
organic substances. If any organic substances splash an ornament, be sure to
wash them off with water and check if the
ornament is damaged.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
or neutral detergent.

NOTICE
z Do not use corrosive chemical−
based cleaners on your wheels.
(Example: hydrofluoric acid)
z Do not use steam cleaners or the
chemicals therein to clean your
wheels.
z Do not use scouring pads, wire
brushes, or coarse abrasives to
clean your wheels.
z Do not use alcohol, solvents, gasoline, or other non−neutral detergents, because they may alter the
wheel’s appearance and resistance
to corrosion.
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
faces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use
organic substances or scrub them with a
hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

Waxing your Toyota

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
surface does not repel water well.

3. Rinse
thoroughly—dried
soap
can
cause streaking. In hot weather you
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not
rub or press hard—you might scratch
the paint.

NOTICE

Polishing and waxing is recommended
to maintain the original beauty of your
Toyota’s finish.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are
using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
the chrome trim as well as the paint.

z Do not use organic substances
(gasoline, kerosene, benzine or
strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage.

Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure
that the nozzles do not become blocked
when waxing. If a nozzle becomes
blocked, contact your Toyota dealer to
have the vehicle serviced.

z Do not scrub any part of the vehicle with a hard brush, which may
cause damage.

NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

523

07 04.26

Cleaning the interior
Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the
surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause
damage to the lenses. If you accidentally
put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or
wash it off.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water
does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.

CAUTION

D Be careful not to splash water or

spill liquid on the floor. This may
prevent the side airbags and curtain
shield airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.

D Do not wash the vehicle floor with

water, or allow water to get onto
the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get
into audio components or other
electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
and water.

524

First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming−
type vinyl cleaners are also available
which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.

NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.
Carpets
Use a good foam−type
clean the carpets.

shampoo

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Do not apply water—the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
and follow them closely.
Seat belts
The seat belts may be cleaned with
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear,
fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE
z Do not use dye or bleach on the
belts—it may weaken them.
z Do not use the belts until they become dry.

NOTICE
z Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the
surface.
z If you use cleaners or polishing
agents, make sure their ingredients
do not include the substances mentioned above.
z If you use a liquid car freshener, do
not spill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the
ingredients mentioned
above. Immediately clean any spill
using the method mentioned above.

Windows

Leather Interior

The windows may be cleaned with any
household window cleaner.

The leather upholstery may be cleaned
with neutral detergent for wool.

Air conditioning control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel, console panel,
and switches

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.

NOTICE
z If a stain should fail to come out
with a neutral detergent, apply a
cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
z Never use organic substances such
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline or
alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could
cause discoloring.
z Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.
z Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
z Long exposure to direct sunlight
may cause the leather surface to
harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

525

07 04.26

z The interior of your vehicle is apt
to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
z Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.
If you have any questions about the
cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.

526

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

527

07 04.26

SECTION

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Vehicle maintenance and care
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . .

529
530
532
533

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

528

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for
fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day−to−day care, is
more important than ever before to ensure
smooth, and trouble−free, safe, and economical drivings.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure the specified maintenance, including
general maintenance service, is performed.
Note that both the new vehicle and
emission control system warranties specify
that proper maintenance and care must be
performed.
See
“Owner’s
Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”
for
complete
warranty
information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−
to−day care practices that are important to
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed
regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done
either by yourself or a qualified technician,
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be
pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the
repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied.
The owner may elect to use non−Toyota
supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of
equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

You
may
also
elect
to
have
maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and
system performed by any automotive
repair
establishment
or
individual
without invalidating this warranty. See
“Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for
complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Toyota technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
training programs. They learn to work on
Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
rather than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Toyota
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle—reliably and economically.
Your copy of the repair order is proof that
all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while
under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
to keep a copy of the repair order for any
service performed on your Toyota.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

529

07 04.26

General maintenance
What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy
to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented on page 535 in
Section 7.
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself
mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are
recommended. Please be aware that
do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your
warranty coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance
items that should be performed as frequently as specified. In addition to checking the items listed, if you notice any
unusual noise, smell or vibration, you
should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. It is recommended that any problem you notice be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine.
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Items listed below should be checked
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
tank. See page 563 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.

530

Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between
the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−
through reservoir when the engine is cold.
See page 546 in Section 7−2 for additional information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked with
leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 547 in
Section 7−2 for additional information.
Battery condition
Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See page 560 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See page 547 in Section 7−2 for additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
on a level spot. See page 543 in Section
7−2 for additional information.
Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The
level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”
range depending on the fluid temperature.
See page 548 in Section 7−2 for additional information.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Exhaust system

Seats

Brakes

If you notice any change in the sound of
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have
the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on
page 441 in Section 2.)

In a safe place, check that the brakes do
not pull to one side when applied.

Items listed below should be checked
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Check that all seat controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate
smoothly and that all latches lock securely
in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and
that the locks hold securely in any latched
position. For folding−down seatback (Regular cab and Crew Max models) and lift
up seat cushion (Double cab models),
check that the latches lock securely.

Lights

Seat belts

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle
is held securely with the selector lever in
“P” position and all brakes released.

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.

Check that the seat belt system such as
buckles, retractors and anchors operate
properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
uneven pedal effort or catching.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check the brake booster function.

Parking brake
Check that the pedal has the proper travel
and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be performed
from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Fluid leaks
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
found and corrected immediately.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

531

07 04.26

Does your vehicle need
repairing?
Doors and engine hood
Check that all doors including tailgate operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a
month. See page 548 in Section 7−2
for additional information.
Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts,
damage or excessive wear. See page
551 in Section 7−2 for additional information. When checking the tires,
make sure no nuts are missing, and
check the nuts for looseness. Tighten
them if necessary.

Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the
maintenance
schedule.
(For
scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.) See page 553
in Section 7−2 for additional
information.

Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that
indicate service is needed. Some important clues are as follows:

D
D
D
D

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from the air conditioning
after use is normal.)

D Change in exhaust sound (This may

indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)

D Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear

D Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
straight on a level road

D Strange noises related to suspension
movement

D Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy

feeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal almost touches floor; vehicle pulls to one
side when braking

D Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal

532

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs
If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation
of the emission control system. When the
OBD system determines that a problem
exists somewhere in the emission control
system, the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even
does
pass
have

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips, but the
error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
even the malfunction indicator lamp does
not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

if the malfunction indicator lamp
not come on, your vehicle may not
the I/M test as readiness codes
not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

533

07 04.26

SECTION

7− 1

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

534

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

535
538
538
540

07 04.26

Engine compartment overview
"4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
1. Windshield washer fluid tank
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Fuse block
7. Battery
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Power steering fluid reservoir

XS71001a

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

535

07 04.26

"4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
1. Windshield washer fluid tank
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Fuse block
7. Battery
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Power steering fluid reservoir

XS71002a

536

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

"5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
1. Windshield washer fluid tank
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Fuse block
7. Battery
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Power steering fluid reservoir

XS71003a

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

537

07 04.26

Do−it−yourself service
precautions

Fuse locations
Spare fuses

XS71005a

You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing
do−it−yourself
maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.

XS71004

XS71006a

538

If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
given in this Section.

For information on tools and parts for do−
it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools” on page 540 in this Section.
Utmost care
ing on your
injury. Here
you should
serve:

should be taken when workvehicle to prevent accidental
are a few precautions that
be especially careful to ob-

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CAUTION

D When the engine is running, keep

hands, clothing, and tools away
from the moving fan and engine
drive
belts.
(Removing
rings,
watches, and ties is advisable.)

D Right

after driving, the engine
compartment—the engine, radiator,
exhaust manifold, power steering
fluid reservoir and spark plug
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
and spark plugs may also be hot.

D If the engine is hot, do not remove

the radiator cap or loosen the drain
plugs to prevent burning yourself.

D Do not leave anything that may
burn easily, such as paper or rags,
in the engine compartment.

D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames around fuel or the
battery. Their fumes are flammable.

D Do not get under your vehicle with
just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.

D Use eye protection whenever you

NOTICE

D Used engine oil contains potentially

z Remember that battery and ignition
cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.

work on or under your vehicle
where you may be exposed to flying
or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged
and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your
skin, wash thoroughly with soap
and water.

D Do not leave used oil within the
reach of children.

D Dispose of used oil and filter only
in a safe and acceptable manner.
Do not dispose of used oil and filter in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your dealer or
a service station for information
concerning recycling or disposal.

D Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

z Add only “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate,
non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for
the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water (for Canada).
z If you spill some of the coolant, be
sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging the parts
or paint.
z Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the spark plug holes.
z Use only spark plugs of the specified type. Using other types will
cause engine damage, loss of performance or radio noise.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

539

07 04.26

Parts and tools
z Do not reuse iridium−tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or regapping.
z Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission
could be damaged.
z Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed, or excessive engine
wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.
z Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
z When closing the engine hood,
check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will
need to perform do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Toyota parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must
be metric.
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

D “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-

lent
See page 543 in Section 7−2 for details about engine oil selection.

Tools:

ENGINE

Parts (if level is low):

D SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
Tools:

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID

D Automatic

transmission
DEXRONrII or III

COOLANT

Parts (if level is low):

D “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−
life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water(for the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45% deionized water (for Canada).

540

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding oil)
THE

D Funnel (only for adding coolant)

brake fluid

Parts (if level is low):

CHECKING
LEVEL

Tools:

fluid

Tools:

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Tools:

D
D
D
D

Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional
clamp bolts)

wrench

(for

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

terminal

07 04.26

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES
Parts (if replacement is necessary):

D Fuse with same amperage rating as
original

ADDING WASHER FLUID
Parts:

D Water
D Washer fluid containing antifreeze
(for winter use)

Tools:

D Funnel
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
Parts:

D Bulb with same number and wattage

rating as original (See charts in
“Replacing light bulbs” on page 564 in
Section 7−3.)

Tools:

D Screwdriver
D Wrench

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

541

07 04.26

SECTION
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7− 2

Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

542

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

543
546
547
547
548
548
551
553
554
556
557

07 04.26

Checking the engine oil level
Low level

Full level

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level while holding a rag under the
end.

Full level

Low level

CAUTION

LS72004
Add oil

O.K.

XS72002
Too full

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

Low level

Full level

O.K.

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

O.K.

Too full

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

XS72001a
Add oil

Add oil

Be careful not to touch the hot exhaust manifold.

Too full

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle
should be on level ground. After turning
off the engine, wait a few minutes for
the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under
the end and wipe it clean.

NOTICE
Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.
If the oil level is below or only slightly
above the low level, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
the dipstick. We recommend that you use
a funnel when adding oil.
The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low and full on the
dipstick is indicated as follows:
1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp.qt.)

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be
correct.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

543

07 04.26

For the engine oil capacity, see “Service
specifications” on page 582 in Section 8.
When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE

Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

z Be careful not to spill engine oil on
the vehicle components.

Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil

z Avoid overfilling, or
could be damaged.

Recommended viscosity:
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE)
(2UZ−FE) engine
SAE 5W−30

the

engine

z Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE
10W−30 oil may be used. However, it
should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at
the next oil change.

and 4.7 L V8

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good
fuel economy, and good starting in cold
weather.

544

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

SOIL020
Outside temperature

Oil identification mark
SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20 engine oil may be
used. However, SAE 0W−20 is the best
choice for good fuel economy, and
good starting in cold weather.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you
should use.

To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all
Toyota engines.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

545

07 04.26

Checking the engine coolant
level
Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between
the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the
reservoir. If the level is low, add the
coolant. (For the coolant type, see
“Coolant type selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
with engine temperature. However, if the
level is on or below the “LOW” line, add
coolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”
line.
If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
cock and water pump.

Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage
your engine cooling system.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).

CAUTION

NOTICE

To prevent burning yourself, do not
remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.

546

Do not use plain water alone.

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine
coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology and has been specifically
designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Toyota vehicles.
Please contact
further details.

your

Toyota dealer

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

for

07 04.26

Checking the radiator and
condenser

Checking brake fluid

If either of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap by
hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted
line. This brings the fluid to the correct
level when you put the cap back on.

CAUTION

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.

To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.

XS72003

CAUTION
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator
and condenser, do not perform the
work by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear. So
be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.

Take care when filling the reservoir
because brake fluid can harm your
hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your
hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your hands or eyes, go to the
doctor.

NOTICE
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure
to wipe it off to prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

547

07 04.26

Checking tire inflation
pressure

Checking power steering fluid
If hot
O.K.

Open

If cold
O.K.

If hot
add

XS72005
If cold
add

Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONrII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is
hot (60_C—80_C or 140_F—175_F). You
may also check the level when the fluid
is
cold
(about
room
temperature,
10_C—30_C or 50_F—85_F) if the engine
has not been run for about five hours.

548

Clean all dirt from the outside of the reservoir tank and look at the fluid level. If
the fluid is cold, the level should be in the
“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the
fluid level should be in the “HOT” range.
If the level is at the low side of either
range, add automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONrII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,
turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box
case, vane pump and hose connections
for leaks or damage.

XS72011

CAUTION
The reservoir tank may be hot so be
careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Keep your tire inflation pressures
at the proper level.
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressures, tire sizes and the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(vehicle capacity weight) are described on page 576 in Section 8.
They are also described on the tire
and loading information label as
shown.
You should check the tire inflation
pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month. And do not forget the
spare!

The following instructions for
checking tire inflation pressure
should be observed:
D The
pressure
should
be
checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours and has
not been driven for more than 1.5
km or 1 mile since, you will get
an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
D Always use a tire pressure
gauge. The appearance of a tire
can be misleading. Besides, tire
inflation pressures that are even
just a few pounds off can degrade
ride and handling.
D Do not bleed or reduce tire
inflation pressure after driving.
It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
D Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passenger and luggage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.

Tire pressure
gauge

XS72006

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure
gauge to the tire valve.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure
is not within the prescribed range,
insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too
much air, press the center of the
valve and release the air to adjust.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

549

07 04.26

5. After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve
caps. Without the valve caps, dirt
or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage.
If the caps have been lost, have
new ones put on as soon as possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may
waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
550

CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation)—
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D Poor handling
D Possibility of blowouts from an
overheated tire
D Poor sealing of the tire bead
D Wheel deformation and/or tire
separation
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinflation)—
D Poor handling
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Checking and replacing tires
Treadwear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES
Check the tire’s tread for treadwear
indicators. If the indicators show,
replace the tires. The location of
treadwear indicators is shown by
the “TWI” or “Δ ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of each
tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built−in
treadwear indicators to help you know
when the tires need replacement.
When the tread depth wears to 1.6
mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators
will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves,
the tire should be replaced. The lower
the tread, the higher the risk of skidding.
The effectiveness of snow tires is
lost if the tread wears down below
4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire
should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage, it
should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do not
continue driving. Driving even a short
distance can damage a tire beyond
repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years
old must be checked by a qualified
technician even if damage is not
obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
This applies also to the temporary
spare tire and tires stored for future
use.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

551

07 04.26

REPLACING YOUR TIRES
When replacing a tire, use a tire of
the same size and construction,
and the same or greater maximum
load as the originally installed
tires. Also, on four−wheel drive
models, all the tires must be the
same brand and have the same
tread patterns.
Using any other size or type of tire
may seriously affect handling, ride,
speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow
chains.
Check that the maximum load of the
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)
of either the front axle or the rear
axle, whichever is greater. As for the
maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall
of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label.

552

For details about the sidewall of the
tire and the Certification Label, see
“Tire information” on page 451 in
Section 2 and “Your Toyota’s
identification” on page 449 in Section
2.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident
may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
D Do not mix radial, bias belted,
or bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
D Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended
size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics
resulting in loss of control.

D Do not use tires of different
brands, sizes and constructions. This may damage the
drive system and prevent the
vehicle stability control system
from functioning correctly.
D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use tires of different
brands, sizes, construction or
tread patterns, as this may
cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in
loss of control.
Toyota recommends all four tires,
or at least both of the front or rear
tires be replaced at a time as a set.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
498 in Section 4 for tire change procedure.
When a tire is replaced, the wheel
should always be balanced.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Rotating tires
An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Wheels
can get out of balance with regular
use and should therefore be balanced
occasionally.
The tire pressure warning system
must be initialized when the
specified tire inflation pressure is
changed due to tire replacement.
See “Tire pressure warning
system” on page 251 in Section
1−7.

NOTICE
z When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have them
repaired or replaced by the
nearest Toyota dealer or authorized tire dealer. Failure to
do so may cause the tire
pressure sensors to be damaged when the tires are removed or installed.
z Remove the air pressure sensors before replacing the
tires to prevent the sensors
from being damaged.

XS72010

To equalize the wear and help
extend
tire
life,
Toyota
recommends that you rotate your
tires according to the maintenance
schedule.
(For
scheduled
maintenance information, please
refer
to
the
“Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.) However,
the most appropriate timing for tire
rotation may vary according to
your driving habits and road
surface conditions.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

553

07 04.26

Installing snow tires and
chains
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
498 in Section 4 for tire change procedure.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out−
of−balance wheels, or severe braking.
The tire pressure warning system
must be initialized when rotating
tires, in case that the specified tire
inflation pressure is different
between front and rear. See “Tire
pressure warning system” on page
251 in Section 1−7.

WHEN TO
CHAINS

USE

SNOW

TIRES

Snow tires or chains are recommended
when driving on snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.

Do not use snow tires of different
brands, sizes, construction or tread
patterns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.
Also, on four−wheel drive models, all
the tires must be the same brand and
have the same tread patterns.
Do not use tires other than those mentioned above. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

D Do not use snow tires other than

the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

554

D Four−wheel drive models:

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.
Installing snow tires on the rear wheels
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of
vehicle control.
When storing removed tires, you should
store them in a cool dry place.
Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
to install them in the same direction when
replacing.

CAUTION

D Do not drive with the snow tires
incorrectly inflated.

D Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)
with any type of snow tires.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CHAIN INSTALLATION
Side chain

G72017

Cross chain

CAUTION

D Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is
lower.

When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain
manufacturer.

D Drive

If wheel covers are used, they will be
scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.

D Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel

carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.
braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

D When driving with chains installed,

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION
Use the tire chains of correct size.
Use the following type chains.
A Diameter of side chain:
B Diameter of cross chain:

Install the chains on the rear tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
chains on the front tires. Retighten
chains
after
driving
0.5—1.0
km
(1/4—1/2 miles).

mm (in.)
5.0 (0.20)
6.3 (0.25)

Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check local regulations before installing chains.

be sure to drive carefully. Slow
down before entering curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle.
Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE
Snow tires or chains may affect the
tire pressure warning system. See
“Tire pressure warning system” on
page 251 in Section 1−7.

NOTICE
If the wrong combination of tire and
chain is used, the chains could damage the vehicle body.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

555

07 04.26

Replacing wheels
As you might have difficulty in
identifying a flat or deflated tire, a tire
pressure warning system is provided on
this vehicle.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

When replacing the wheels, be sure to
install tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters on the wheels. Consult your
Toyota dealer about how to set up the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
loss of handling control.

CAUTION

D Have the tires, wheels or tire pres-

sure warning valves and transmitters replaced and ID codes registered by Toyota dealer. If you need
tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, purchase from Toyota
dealer.

D The tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter nuts should always be
tightened to a torque of 4 N·m (0.4
kgf·m, 2.9 ft·lbf).

D The use of non−genuine wheels may
result in the tire pressure warning
system failure or air−leak.

556

If you have wheel damage such as
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
wheel should be replaced.

WHEEL SELECTION
When replacing wheels, care should be
taken to ensure that the wheels are replaced by ones with the same load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may
adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent
wheels which have been straightened may
have structural damage and therefore
should not be used. Never use an inner
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

D Do not use wheels other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size,
as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use
brands, sizes
may cause
characteristics
control.

wheels of different
and types, as this
dangerous handling
resulting in loss of

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Wheel precautions
D When installing wheels, check that the
wheel nuts are tight after driving your
vehicle the first 160 km (100 miles).

D If

you have rotated, repaired, or
changed your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving
160 km (100 miles).

D Wheel nut torque.

Steel wheel:
209 N·m (21.3 kgf·m, 154 ft·lbf)
Aluminum wheel:
131 N·m (13.4 kgf·m, 97 ft·lbf)

D When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.

D Use only the Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for
wheels.

your

aluminum

D When balancing your aluminum wheels,

use only Toyota balance weights or
equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.

D As with any wheel, periodically check

your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

557

07 04.26

SECTION
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7− 3

Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

560
561
562
563
564

559

07 04.26

Checking battery condition—
—Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and
explosive hydrogen gas.

D Do not cause a spark from the battery with tools.

D Do not smoke or light a match near
the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.

D Avoid contact with eyes, skin or
clothes.

D Never ingest electrolyte.
D Wear protective safety glasses when
working near the battery.

D Keep children away from the battery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

D If electrolyte gets in your eyes,

flush your eyes with clean water
immediately and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge
or cloth while en route to the medical office.

560

—Checking battery exterior
D If electrolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the contact area. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

D If electrolyte gets on your clothes,

there is a possibility of its soaking
through to your skin, so immediately take off the exposed clothing and
follow the procedure above, if necessary.

D If you accidentally swallow electro-

lyte, drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable
oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.

Terminals

XS73001
Hold−down clamp
Ground cable

Check the battery for corroded or loose
terminal connections, cracks, or loose
hold−down clamp.
a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the outside of the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.
b. If the terminal connections are loose,
tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
overtighten.
c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
enough to keep the battery firmly in
place. Overtightening may damage the
battery case.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Checking battery fluid
NOTICE
z Be sure the engine and all accessories are off before performing maintenance.
z When checking the battery, remove
the ground cable from the negative
terminal (“−” mark) first and reinstall it last.

Type A
Green

Battery recharging precautions

Dark

Clear or
light yellow

White

Red

2. Be sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the
charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.

z Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
z Take care no solution gets into the
battery when washing it.
If the battery is disconnected or run
down, the moon roof may not operate
automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.
In any of these cases, you should normalize the moon roof. To normalize the moon
roof, see “Electric moon roof” on page 43
in Section 1−2.

Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.

Type B
Blue

During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.

CAUTION

D Always charge the battery in an un-

CHECKING BY INDICATOR
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
Indicator color

Condition

Type A

Type B

Green

Blue

Good

White

Charging necessary.
Have battery checked
by your Toyota
dealer.

Dark
Clear or
light
yellow

Red

Have battery checked
by your Toyota
dealer.

confined area. Do not charge the
battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.

D Only do a slow charge (5 A or

less). Charging at a quicker rate is
dangerous. The battery may explode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the
engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

561

07 04.26

Checking and replacing fuses

LS73002
Good

GN73013

Blown

Good

Type C

Type A

Good

Blown

XS73029

XS73002

Blown

If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
See “Fuse locations” on page 538 in Section 7−1 for locations of the fuses.
Turn the ignition switch and inoperative
component off. Pull the suspected fuse
straight out and check it.
Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
page 587 in Section 8 for the functions
controlled by each circuit.

Type B

562

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Adding washer fluid
Type A fuses can be pulled out by the
pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out
tool is shown in the illustration.
Type B fuses—When any of the fuses are
blown, contact your Toyota dealer.
If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,
there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as
soon as possible.

If any washer does
windshield washer
light comes on, the
empty. Add washer

You should normalize the moon roof if it
does not operate automatically or the jam
protection function does not operate correctly after replacing blown fuses. To
normalize the moon roof, see “Electric
moon roof” on page 43 in Section 1−2.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.
However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
mix with water.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.

CAUTION

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “A/C”
fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage
rating is the same.

Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.

If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close
to the rating as possible. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.

Make sure that the fuse box lid has been
closed securely after closing it.

not work or the low
fluid level warning
washer tank may be
fluid.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

563

07 04.26

Replacing light bulbs—
The following illustrations show how to
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
wattage ratings given in the table.
The side turn signal lights consist of a
number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn
out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

CAUTION

D To prevent burning yourself, do not

replace the light bulbs while they
are hot.

D Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas

inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.

564

The inside of the lens of exterior lights
such as headlights may temporarily fog up
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
in a car wash. This is not a problem
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
and inside of the lens, just like the
windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if
there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lens, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.

Bulb
No.

Type

Headlights
(high beam)

9005

Headlights
(low beam)

—

Front fog lights

9145

Parking and front
side marker lights

168

Front turn
signal/parking
lights

4157
NAK

27/8

3157A

27/8

Stop/tail and rear
side marker lights

3157

27/8

Back−up lights

921

License plate
lights

168

4.9

High mounted
stoplight and
cargo lamps

921

Interior lights

—

Light bulbs

Rear turn signal
lights

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Headlights (high beam)
Bulb
No.

Type

Front personal
lights

—

Rear personal
lights

—

Glove box light

1.2

Foot light

—

1.4

168

Light bulbs

Door courtesy
light
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:

HB3 halogen bulbs
H11 halogen bulbs
H10 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Wedge base bulbs (amber)

XS73007

XS73008

1. Open the hood. Unplug the connector
while depressing the lock release.

2. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise
and remove it.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.
If additional space is required to access
the connector, move the battery rearward
by loosening the battery hold−down clamp.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

565

07 04.26

—Headlights (low beam)

XS73009

3. Plug in a new bulb install it into the
mounting hole.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

566

XS73010

XS73003

4. Install the connector to the bulb.
If the battery has been moved, reinstall
the battery and check that the battery is
installed securely by wiggling it.

1. Open the hood. Unplug the connector
while depressing the lock release.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

XS73004

2. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise
and remove it.

XS73005

XS73006

3. Plug in a new bulb install it into the
mounting hole.

4. Install the connector to the bulb.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

567

07 04.26

—Front fog lights

XS73011a

1. Remove the bolts and cover.

XS73030

XS73031

2. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise
and remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the base. Install
a new bulb.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

568

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Parking and front side
marker lights

XS73032

4. Install the bulb base into the mounting hole by turning it clockwise.

XS73012a

XS73026a

Remove the clip and cover.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

XS73025c

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

569

07 04.26

—Front turn signal and
parking lights

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail,
rear side marker and back−up
lights
Cover

XS73015a

Bolt

XS73017d

XS73019a

Remove the covers (seal type) and bolts.

XS73016

570

a: Rear turn signal light
b: Stop/tail and rear side marker light
c: Back−up light

XS73033

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—High mounted stoplight and
cargo lamps

—License plate lights

XS73020

XS73022

XS73023

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

XS73021a

XS73024

a: High mounted stoplight
b: Cargo lamps
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

571

07 04.26

572

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION
SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle capacity weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

574
576
579
582
582
582
586
587

573

07 04.26

Dimensions
Two−wheel drive models

mm (in.)
Regular cab models

Cabin type

Double cab models

Crew Max models

Bed type

Standard bed

Long bed

Standard bed

Long bed

Short bed

Overall length

5330 (209.8)

5810 (228.7)

6290 (247.6)

5810 (228.7)

Overall width

2030 (79.9)

Overall height

1930

(75.9)∗1

1925

(75.7)∗1

1930

(75.9)∗1

1925

(75.7)∗1

1925 (75.7)∗1

1925 (75.7)∗2,∗3

1920 (75.5)∗2

1925 (75.7)∗2,∗3

1920 (75.5)∗2

1920 (75.5)∗2,∗3

Wheelbase

3220 (126.7)

3700 (145.6)

4180 (164.5)

3700 (145.6)

Front tread

1725 (67.9)

Rear tread

1725 (67.9)

∗1 :

With P255/70R18 tires

∗2 :

With P275/65R18 tires

∗3 :

With P275/55R20 tires

574

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Four−wheel drive models

mm (in.)
Regular cab models

Cabin type

Double cab models

Crew Max models

Bed type

Standard bed

Long bed

Standard bed

Long bed

Short bed

Overall length

5330 (209.8)

5810 (228.7)

6290 (247.6)

5810 (228.7)

Overall width

2030 (79.9)

Overall height

1940

(76.3)∗1

1935 (76.1)∗2,∗3

1935

(76.1)∗1

1940

(76.3)∗1

1935

(76.1)∗1

1935 (76.1)∗1

1930 (75.9)∗2

1935 (76.1)∗2,∗3

1930 (75.9)∗2

1930 (75.9)∗2,∗3

Wheelbase

3220 (126.7)

3700 (145.6)

4180 (164.5)

3700 (145.6)

Front tread

1725 (67.9)

Rear tread

1725 (67.9)

∗1 :

With P255/70R18 tires

∗2 :

With P275/65R18 tires

∗3 :

With P275/55R20 tires

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

575

07 04.26

Vehicle capacity weight
kg (lb.)
Engine

Cab type

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE)

Driving system
Two−wheel drive models

Bed type

675 (1495)

Long

710 (1575)

Standard
Two−wheel drive models
Long
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
Standard
Four−wheel drive models
Long

Regular

Standard

Long

750 (1655)∗1
830 (1830)
795 (1755)∗1
755 (1670)
720 (1595)∗1
800 (1765)
765 (1690)∗1
750 (1660)
715 (1585)∗1
860 (1900)∗1
925 (2045)∗ 2

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
Standard
Four−wheel drive models
Long

576

780 (1730)

895 (1975)

Two−wheel drive models

∗1 :
∗2 :

Vehicle capacity weight

Standard

725 (1605)
690 (1530)∗1
865 (1910)
830 (1835)∗1

With towing package
Without option

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

kg (lb.)
Engine

Cab type

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE)

Driving system

Bed type

Grade

Two−wheel drive models

Standard

SR5
SR5

Two−wheel drive models

Standard
Limited
Long

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)

SR5
SR5

Four−wheel drive models
Double

Standard
Limited
Long

SR5
SR5

Two−wheel drive models

Standard
Limited
Long

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)

SR5
SR5

Four−wheel drive models

Standard
Limited
Long

∗1 :

SR5

Vehicle capacity
weight
585 (1300)
640
605
655
620

(1415)
(1340)∗1
(1450)
(1375)∗1

590 (1305)∗1
600
565
615
580

(1330)
(1255)∗1
(1360)
(1285)∗1

550 (1220)∗1
700
665
720
685

(1550)
(1475)∗1
(1590)
(1515)∗1

655 (1455)∗1
665
630
680
645

(1470)
(1395)∗1
(1505)
(1430)∗1

615 (1365)∗1

With towing package
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

577

07 04.26

kg (lb.)
Cab type

Engine

Driving system

Bed type

Grade
SR5

Two−wheel drive models
Limited
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
SR5
Four−wheel drive models
Limited
Crew Max

Short
SR5
Two−wheel drive models
Limited
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
SR5
Four−wheel drive models
Limited

∗1 :
∗2 :

Vehicle capacity weight
605 (1335)
570 (1260)∗1
555 (1225)∗2
615 (1360)
580 (1285)∗1
565 (1250)∗2
570 (1260)
535 (1185)∗1
520 (1150)∗2
580 (1280)
545 (1205)∗1
530 (1170)∗2
665 (1470)
630 (1395)∗1
615 (1360)∗2
690 (1530)
655 (1455)∗1
640 (1420)∗2
635 (1400)
600 (1325)∗1
585 (1290)∗2
640 (1420)
610 (1345)∗1
590 (1310)∗2

With towing package or electric moon roof
With towing package and electric moon roof

578

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Towing capacity∗1
kg (lb.)
Cab type

Engine
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE)

Driving system
Two−wheel drive models

Bed type
Standard

2310

(5100)

Long

2265

(5000)

3175

(7000)

3855

(8500)∗ 2

3125

(6900)

3810

(8400)∗ 2

3035

(6700)

3715

(8200)∗ 2

2990

(6600)

3670

(8100)∗ 2

4035

(8900)

Standard
Two−wheel drive models
Long
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
Standard
Four−wheel drive models
Long
Regular
Standard
Two−wheel drive models
Long
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)

Four−wheel drive models
Long
∗2 :
∗3 :

4715 (10400)∗ 2
4490

(9900)∗ 2,3

3990

(8800)

4895 (10800)∗ 2
3945

Standard

∗1 :

Towing capacity∗1

(8700)

4580 (10100)∗ 2
4350

(9600)∗ 2,3

3900

(8600)

4760 (10500)∗ 2

Trailer weight + cargo weight
With Towing package
With P275/55R20 tires
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

579

07 04.26

kg (lb.)
Cab type

Engine
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE)

Driving system

Bed type

Grade

Two−wheel drive models

Standard

SR5
SR5

Two−wheel drive models

Standard
Limited
Long

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)

SR5
SR5

Four−wheel drive models

Standard
Limited
Long

Double

SR5
SR5

Two−wheel drive models

Standard
Limited
Long

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)

SR5
SR5

Four−wheel drive models

Standard
Limited
Long

∗1 :
∗2 :

SR5

Towing capacity∗1
2175

3035 (6700)
3670 (8100)∗ 2
2990 (6600)
3670 (8100)∗ 2
3625

(8000)∗ 2

2900 (6400)
3535 (7800)∗ 2
2855 (6300)
3535 (7800)∗ 2
3490

(7700)∗ 2

3900
4805
3900
4805

(8600)
(10600)∗ 2
(8600)
(10600)∗ 2

4760 (10500)∗ 2
3760
4670
3760
4670

(8300)
(10300)∗ 2
(8300)
(10300)∗ 2

4625 (10200)∗ 2

Trailer weight + cargo weight
With Towing package

580

(4800)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

kg (lb.)
Cab type

Engine

Driving system

Bed type

Grade
SR5

Two−wheel drive models
Limited
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
SR5
Four−wheel drive models
Limited
Crew Max

Short
SR5
Two−wheel drive models
Limited
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
SR5
Four−wheel drive models
Limited

∗1 :
∗2 :

Towing capacity∗1
2945 (6500)
3625 (8000)∗ 2
2945 (6500)
3625 (8000)∗ 2
2810 (6200)
3490 (7700)∗ 2
2810 (6200)
3490 (7700)∗ 2
3810 (8400)
4715 (10400)∗ 2
3810 (8400)
4715 (10400)∗ 2
3670 (8100)
4580 (10100)∗ 2
3670 (8100)
4580 (10100)∗ 2

Trailer weight + cargo weight
With Towing package

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

581

07 04.26

Engine

Fuel

Service specifications

Model:
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE), 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
and 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Fuel type:
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

ENGINE

Type:
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
100 (26.4, 22.0)

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
Intake
0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
Exhaust
0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
Intake
0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
Exhaust
0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Automatic adjustment

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
94.0
95.0 (3.70
3.74)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
94.0
84.0 (3.70
3.31)
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
94.0
102.0 (3.70
4.02)
Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
3956 (241.4)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
4664 (284.5)
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
5663 (345.4)

582

Spark plug type:
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
DENSO
K20HR−U11
NGK
LFR6C11
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
DENSO
SK20R11
NGK
IFR6A11
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
DENSO
SK20HR11
Spark plug gap, mm (in.):
1.1 (0.043)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

ENGINE LUBRICATION
Oil capacity (drain and refill),
L (qt., Imp. qt.):
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
With filter
5.2 (5.5, 4.6)
Without filter
4.9 (5.2, 4.3)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
With filter
6.2 (6.6, 5.5)
Without filter
5.7 (6.0, 5.0)
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
With filter
7.0 (7.4, 6.2)
Without filter
6.6 (6.9, 5.8)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.

Recommended oil viscosity:
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−
FE) engine
SAE 5W−30

OIL008

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

SOIL020
Outside temperature

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

583

07 04.26

COOLING SYSTEM

BATTERY

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Open voltage∗ at 20°C (68°F):
12.6—12.8 V
Fully charged
12.2—12.4 V
Half charged
11.8—12.0 V
Discharged

Fluid capacity (drain and refill),
L (qt., Imp. qt.):
Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
9.6 (10.1, 8.4)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
9.7 (10.3, 8.5)
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
With towing package
13.0 (13.7, 11.4)
Without towing package
12.1 (12.8, 10.6)
Coolant type:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
used in your Toyota vehicle at factory
fill. In order to avoid technical problems,
only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology.
(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.

584

∗:

Voltage that is checked 20 minutes
after the key is removed with all the
lights turned off

Charging rates:
5 A max.

Fluid type:
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
Change automatic transmission fluid only
as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change
automatic transmission fluid only if your
vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions
listed
in your
“Scheduled
Maintenance
Guide”
or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When
changing the automatic transmission fluid,
use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATF
JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring
optimum transmission performance.
Notice: Using automatic transmission
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF
WS” may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission
of your vehicle.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Double cab models

TRANSFER
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
1.12 (1.2, 1.0)

Standard bed
Long bed

Oil type:
Gear Oil API GL−4 or GL−5

Crew Max models

Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 75W−90
DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
Front differential
(four−wheel drive models)

2.10 (2.2, 1.8)

Rear differential
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) and 4.7 L V8
(2UZ−FE) engine
Regular cab models
Standard bed
Long bed

4.05 (4.3, 3.6)
4.60 (4.9, 4.0)

Double cab and Crew Max models
4.60 (4.9, 4.0)
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Regular cab models
Standard bed
Long bed

3.45 (3.6, 3.0)
3.60 (3.8, 3.2)

3.60 (3.8, 3.2)
3.75 (4.0, 3.3)

Two−wheel drive model
3.75 (4.0, 3.3)
Four−wheel drive model
3.60 (3.8, 3.2)
Oil type and viscosity:
Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT
75W−85 GL−5 or equivalent
“Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is filled in
your Toyota vehicle at factory fill. Use
Toyota approved “Genuine Differential
Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching
quality to satisfy the above specification.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
CHASSIS LUBRICATION
Front drive shaft thrust bushings:
Synthetic oil and lithium soap
chassis grease, NLGI No.1

base

Propeller shafts:
Spiders
Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
No.2

Slide yokes
Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
No.2 or Molybdenum−disulfide lithium
base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
BRAKES
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):
104 (4.1)
Pedal free play, mm (in.):
1—5 (0.04—0.20)
Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Parking brake adjustment:
Pedal type—when depressed with the
force of 300 N (30.6 kgf, 67.1 lbf)
6—9 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
STEERING
Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONrII
or III

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

585

07 04.26

Tires
Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:

Tire size

Cold tire inflation pressure
kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Temporary spare

Wheel size

Front

Rear

P255/70R18 112T

210 (2.1, 30)

230 (2.3, 33)

P275/65R18 114T

210 (2.1, 30)

230 (2.3, 33)

P275/55R20 111H

210 (2.1, 30)

230 (2.3, 33)

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):
Steel wheels
209 (21.3, 154)
Aluminum wheels
131 (13.4, 97)
NOTE: For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Wheel precautions”, pages 548 through 557, in Section 7−2.

586

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Fuses
Fuses (type A)
1. A/F 15 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system
2. HORN 10 A: Horn
3. EFI NO.1 25 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
4. IG2 MAIN 30 A: “INJ”, “MET”, “IGN”
fuses
5. DEICER 20 A: Front window deicer

XS73034

6. TOW TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights (tail
lights)
7. POWER NO.2 30 A: Power back window
8. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
9. STOP 15 A: Stop lights, high mounted
stop light, vehicle stability control system, anti−lock brake system, shift lock
system, multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, towing converter
10. TOW BRK 30 A: Trailer brake controller
11. IMB 7.5 A: Engine immobilizer system
12. AM2 7.5 A: Starting system

Engine compartment

13. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter
14. ALT−S 5 A: Charging system
2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

587

07 04.26

XS73028

21. ECU−B1 7.5 A: Multiplex communication system, Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror, power outlets, power front
drivers seat, power tilt and telescopic
system
22. DOME 7.5 A: Interior lights, personal
lights, vanity lights, ignition switch light,
foot light, door courtesy lights, accessory meter
23. HEAD LH 15 A: Left−hand headlight
(high beam)

Instrument panel

15. TURN−HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights,
emergency flashers, towing converter
16. F/PMP 15 A: No circuit
17. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/Sequential multiport fuel injection system, electric throttle control
system
18. MET−B 5 A: Gauges and meters
19. AMP 30 A: Audio system, rear view
monitor, navigation system, rear seat
entertainment system
20. RAD NO.1 15 A: Audio system, rear
view monitor, navigation system, rear
seat entertainment system

588

24. HEAD LL 15 A: Left−hand headlight
(low beam)

30. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, leak detection pump
31. DEF I/UP 5 A: No circuit
32. SPARE 5 A: Spare fuse
33. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse
34. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse
35. INVERTER 15 A: Power outlet No circuit(115 V)
36. FR P/SEAT LH 30 A: Power front drivers seat
37. DR/LCK 25 A: Multiplex communication
system
38. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis system

25. INJ 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, ignition system

39. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

26. MET 7.5 A: Gauges and meters

40. CARGO LP 7.5 A: Cargo lamp

27. IGN 10 A: SRS airbag system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system, engine
immobilizer system, cruise control system

41. AM1 7.5 A: Shift lock system, starting
system

28. HEAD RH 15 A: Right−hand headlight
(high beam)
29. HEAD RL 15 A: Right−hand headlight
(low beam)

42. A/C 7.5 A: Air conditioning system
43. MIR 15 A: Outside rear view mirror
control, outside rear view mirror heaters
44. FR P/SEAT RH 30 A: Power front passenger seat
45. TI&TE 15 A: Power tilt and power telescopic

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

46. S/ROOF 25 A: Electric moon roof
47. ECU−IG NO.1 7.5 A: Anti−lock brake
system, vehicle stability control system,
multiplex communication system, intuitive parking assist system, power front
drivers seat, power tilt and power telescopic, shift lock, tire pressure warning
system, accessory meter, trailer towing,
power outlet, electric moon roof
48. LH−IG 7.5 A: Back−up lights, charging
system, gauge and meters, turn signal
lights, air conditioning system, seat
heaters, back window defogger
49. 4WD 20 A: Four−wheel drive control
system
50. WSH 20 A: Window washer
51. WIPER 30 A: Wiper and washer
52. ECU−IG NO.2 7.5 A: Multiplex communication system
53. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, trailer lights (tail
lights), parking lights, outside rear view
mirror lights
54. A/C IG 10 A: Air conditioning system
55. SEAT−HTR 20 A: Seat heaters

56. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel lights,
glove box light, ashtray, accessory meter, audio system, rear view monitor,
navigation system, rear seat entertainment system, gauges and meters, air
conditioning system
57. ACC 7.5 A: Accessory meter, audio
system, rear seat entertainment system, rear view monitor, navigation system, back−up lights, trailer lights
(back−up lights), multiplex communication system, power outlet, outside rear
view mirror
58. BK/UP LP 10 A: Back−up light, gauges
and meters

62. ALT 180 A (3UR−FE engine with
towing package), 140 A (others):
“LH−J/B”, “HTR”, “SUB BATT”, “TOW
BRK”, “STOP”, “FOG”, “TOW TAIL”,
“DEICER” fuses
63. A/PUMP NO.1 50 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
64. A/PUMP NO.2 50 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
65. MAIN 40 A: “HEAD LL”, “HEAD RL”,
“HEAD LH”, “HEAD RH” fuses
Fuses (type C)
66. DEFOG 40 A: Back window defogger

59. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter

67. SUB BATT 40 A: Trailer towing

Fuses (type B)
60. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system
61. LH−J/B 150 A: “AM1”, “TAIL”, “PANEL”,
“ACC”,
“CIG”,
“LH−IG”,
“4WD”,
“ECU−IG
NO.1”,
“BK/UP
LP”,
“SEAT−HTR”,
“A/C
IG”,
“ECU−IG
NO.2”, “WSH”, “WIPER”, “OBD”, “A/C”,
“TI&TE”, “FR P/SEAT RH”, “MIR”,
“DR/LCK”, “FR P/SEAT LH”, “CARGO
LP”, “PWR OUTLET”, “POWER NO.1”
fuses

68. ABS1 50 A: Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system
69. ABS2 40 A: Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system
70. ST 30 A: Starting system
71. POWER NO.1 30 A: Power windows,
power back window

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

589

07 04.26

590

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

SECTION

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS AND CAMPER INFORMATION

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and camper
information
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Camper information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

591

07 04.26

Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free:
1−800−331−4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy
campaign.
However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

592

Camper information—
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll−free
at
1−888−327−4236
(TTY:
1−800−424−9153);
go
to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle
safety
from
http://www.safercar.gov.

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulation issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
of
the
U.S.
Department
of
Transportation. It provides the purchasers
and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on truck−camper
loading. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you
read this information.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Center of gravity location
Recommended
location for cargo
center of gravity for
cargo weight rating

Rear end
truck bed

XS90009

Rear end
truck bed

XS90001

Rear end
truck bed

XS90010

Regular cab models (with standard bed)

Recommended
location for cargo
center of gravity for
cargo weight rating

XS90011a

Double cab models (with standard bed)

Recommended
location for cargo
center of gravity for
cargo weight rating

Rear end
truck bed

Recommended
location for cargo
center of gravity for
cargo weight rating

Rear end
truck bed

Crew Max models

The figures given in the illustration indicate the recommended center of gravity
zone.
mm (in.)

XS90002

Regular cab
models
Double cab models

1082
(42.6)

955
(37.6)

Crew Max models

Regular cab models (with long bed)

Double cab models (with long bed)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

593

07 04.26

CAUTION
If a load is too far back, it can cause
dangerous handling. If it is too far
forward, the front axle may be overloaded.

594

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

—Cargo weight rating and
proper matching
CWR: Cargo Weight Rating

Camper center of gravity

XS90004

Engine

Drive

1GR

2WD

Recommended center of
gravity location zone

Cab

2WD

C.W.R

Passenger
number

(kg)

(lb.)

Standard

474

1045

Long

510

1125

Standard

547

1205

Long

592

1305

519

1145

Long

562

1240

Standard

515

1135

Long

658

1450

Standard

490

1080

Long

628

1385

Bed

Grade

2UZ
4WD

2WD

Regular

Standard

—

3UR
4WD

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

595

07 04.26

CWR: Cargo Weight Rating
Engine

Drive

1GR

2WD

Cab

C.W.R

Bed

Grade

Passenger
number

(kg)

(lb.)

Standard

SR5

181

400

SR5

200

440

Limited

284

625

SR5

184

405

SR5

161

355

Limited

243

535

SR5

145

320

SR5

261

575

Limited

347

765

SR5

252

555

SR5

225

495

Limited

308

680

SR5

211

465

Standard
2WD

Long
2UZ
Standard
4WD

Double
Long

2WD

Standard
Long

3UR
4WD

Standard
Long

596

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

CWR: Cargo Weight Rating
Engine

Drive

Cab

Bed

2WD

2UZ
4WD

Crew
Max
2WD

3UR
4WD

Short

C.W.R

Grade

Passenger
number

(kg)

(lb.)

SR5

147

325

Limited

227

500

SR5

113

250

Limited

191

420

SR5

209

460

304

670

SR5

177

390

Limited

254

560

Limited

When the truck is used to carry a slide−in
camper, the total cargo load of the truck
consists of the manufacturer’s camper
weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in
the manufacturer’s camper weight figure,
the weight of camper cargo, and the
weight of passengers in the camper.
The total cargo load should not exceed
the truck’s cargo weight rating and the
camper’s center of gravity should fall within the truck’s recommended center of
gravity zone when installed.

CAUTION
Be careful—overloading can cause
dangerous braking and handling problems, and can damage your vehicle
and its tires.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

597

07 04.26

—Gross axle and vehicle
weight ratings
Gross axle weight rating

XS90006
Front GAWR

Gross vehicle weight rating

XS90008

Rear GAWR
Not exceed GVWR

Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded,
drive to a scale and weigh on the front
and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
These ratings are given on the vehicle
certification label which is located on the
door latch post on the left side of the
vehicle. See “Your Toyota’s identification”
on page 449 in Section 2 for the Certification Label location. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to bring
all weights below the ratings.

598

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

GAWR, GVWR
kg (lb.)
Cab type

Engine

Driving
system

4.0 L V6
(1GR−FE)

2WD
2WD

Regular

4.7 L V8
(2UZ−FE)

4WD
2WD

5.7 L V8
(3UR−FE)

4WD

Bed type

GAWR

GVWR

Front

Rear

Standard

1765 (3900)

1675 (3700)

2810 (6200)

Long

1765 (3900)

1720 (3800)

2900 (6400)

Standard

1765 (3900)

1790 (3950)

2990 (6600)

Long

1765 (3900)

1835 (4050)

3080 (6800)

Standard

1810 (4000)

1835 (4050)

3080 (6800)

Long

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3175 (7000)

Standard

1765 (3900)

1790 (3950)

2990 (6600)

Long

1765 (3900)

1880 (4150)

3175 (7000)

Standard

1810 (4000)

1835 (4050)

3080 (6800)

Long

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3265 (7200)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

599

07 04.26

kg (lb.)
Cab type

Engine

Driving
system

Bed type

Grade

4.0 L V6
(1GR−FE)

2WD

Standard

2WD

Standard
Long

4.7 L V8
(2UZ−FE)
4WD
Double

Standard
Long

2WD

Standard
Long

5.7 L V8
(3UR−FE)
4WD

Standard
Long

600

GAWR

GVWR

Front

Rear

SR5

1765 (3900)

1720 (3800)

2900 (6400)

SR5

1765 (3900)

1810 (4000)

3035 (6700)

Limited

1765 (3900)

1810 (4000)

3035 (6700)

SR5

1765 (3900)

1835 (4050)

3080 (6800)

SR5

1810 (4000)

1855 (4100)

3125 (6900)

Limited

1810 (4000)

1855 (4100)

3125 (6900)

SR5

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3175 (7000)

SR5

1765 (3900)

1855 (4100)

3125 (6900)

Limited

1765 (3900)

1855 (4100)

3125 (6900)

SR5

1765 (3900)

1880 (4150)

3175 (7000)

SR5

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3220 (7100)

Limited

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3220 (7100)

SR5

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3265 (7200)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

kg (lb.)
Cab type

Engine

Driving
system

Bed type

2WD
4.7 L V8
(2UZ−FE)

4WD

Crew Max

Short
2WD
5.7 L V8
(3UR−FE)

4WD

Grade

GAWR

GVWR

Front

Rear

SR5

1765 (3900)

1835 (4050)

3080 (6800)

Limited

1765 (3900)

1835 (4050)

3080 (6800)

SR5

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3175 (7000)

Limited

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3175 (7000)

SR5

1765 (3900)

1880 (4150)

3175 (7000)

Limited

1765 (3900)

1880 (4150)

3175 (7000)

SR5

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3265 (7200)

Limited

1810 (4000)

1880 (4150)

3265 (7200)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

601

07 04.26

602

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

TU−3

Quick index
D If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on . . . . . . . . 197
D If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
D If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
D If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
D If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
D If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
D If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
D Tips for driving during break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
D How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
D General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

Gas station information
Fuel type:
UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher
See page 438 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 lmp. gal.)
Engine oil:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.
See page 545 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 549 through 558.
Tire inflation pressure: See page 586.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Publication No. OM34463U
Part No. 01999-34463
Printed in Japan 01−0707−00 Z

(

07 04.26

Important information about this manual
Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle damage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION
This is a
injury to
informed
order to
others.

warning against anything which may cause
people if the warning is ignored. You are
about what you must or must not do in
reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not...”;
“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this
happen”.

NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help
reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the
event of a collision. None of these systems, either individually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the
event of collision. However, the more you know about
these systems and how to use them properly, the greater
your chances become of surviving an accident without
death or serious injury.

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to
read Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In
terms of helping you understand how you can receive the
maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this
vehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual is
the most important Section for you and your family to
read.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of
the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear
seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be
secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for
their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,
and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes
for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing
the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of
the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you
should be aware of. These systems work together along
with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide
occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of
each system is enhanced when it is used properly and
together with other systems. No single occupant restraint
system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the
equal level of restraint which these systems can provide
when used together. That is why it is important for you and
your family to understand the purpose and proper use of
each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

2006 TACOMA from Sep. ’05 Prod. (OM35858U)

07 04.26

Event data recorder

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources
of death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to an
airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has
been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the
time of deployment. This is just one example of how the
instructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help
ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and
increase the safety they can provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in
driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a
system to record data in a crash or a near car crash
event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a
crash or a near car crash event, this device may record
some or all of the following information:

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section
1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time
of ownership of this vehicle.

D Engine speed
D Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
D Vehicle speed
D To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
D Position of the transmission selector lever
D Whether the driver and front passenger wore the
seat belts or not
D Driver’s seat position
D Front passenger’s occupant classification

iii

2006 TACOMA from Sep. ’05 Prod. (OM35858U)

07 04.26

D SRS airbag deployment data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a
third party except when:

D SRS airbag system diagnostic data

D An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control
(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situations
which include activating the VSC under which the VSC
EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may
record some or all of the following information:

D Officially requested by the police or other authorities
D Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
D Ordered by the court
However, if necessary Toyota will:

D Behavior of the vehicle

D Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety
performance

D Steering wheel angle
D Vehicle speed

D Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary

D To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
D To what extent the brake pedal was applied

D Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non−Toyota organization for
research purposes

D To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of
the 4 wheels
D vehicle stability control system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data
such as conversation between passengers.

2006 TACOMA from Sep. ’05 Prod. (OM35858U)

07 04.26

Important health and safety
information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited
warranties:

CAUTION

D New vehicle warranty
D Emission control systems warranty

D WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

D Others

ents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In addition,
oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as
well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.

Your responsibility for
maintenance

D Battery

posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of
these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section
6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

2006 TACOMA from Sep. ’05 Prod. (OM35858U)

07 04.26

Accessories, spare parts and
modification of your Toyota

Spark ignition system of your
Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories
for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.
You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or
adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment
Standard.

Installation of a mobile
two−way radio system

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine
Toyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota
products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the
modification may not be covered under warranty.

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in
your vehicle could affect the following electronic systems,
be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary
measures or special instructions regarding installation.
D Multiport fuel injection
fuel injection system

system/sequential multiport

D SRS airbag system
D Seat belt pretensioner system

2006 TACOMA from Sep. ’05 Prod. (OM35858U)

07 04.26

Tires and loading on your
Toyota

D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
D Vehicle stability control system
D Cruise control system

Underinflated or overinflated tire inflation pressure
and the excess load may result in the deterioration
of steering ability and braking ability, leading to
an accident. Check the tire inflation pressure
periodically and be sure to keep the load limits
given in this Owner’s Manual. For details about
tire inflation pressure and load limits, see
“Checking tire inflation pressure” on page 548 in
Section 7−2 and “Vehicle load limits” on page 463
in Section 2.

D Anti−lock brake system
D Electronic throttle control system
D Tire pressure warning system

vii

2006 TACOMA from Sep. ’05 Prod. (OM35858U)

07 04.26

Scrapping of your Toyota

On−pavement and off−road
driving tips

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is
scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they
are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to
have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service
shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your
vehicle.

This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an
ordinary passenger car because it is also designed for
off−road use. It has a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. In addition, this vehicle has a
higher ground clearance and center of gravity than that of
an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design feature
causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death or
serious injury. Be sure to read “Off−road vehicle
precautions” on page 436 in Section 2 and “Off−road
driving precautions” on page 472 in Section 3.

viii

2006 TACOMA from Sep. ’05 Prod. (OM35858U)

07 04.26

Leak detection pump
This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This
check is done approximately five hours after the engine is
turned off. So you may hear sound coming from underneath the deck for several minutes. It does not indicate a
malfunction.

Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate.
These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

2006 TACOMA from Sep. ’05 Prod. (OM35858U)

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2013:05:08 22:07:19-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:05:08 22:07:19-04:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Metadata Date                   : 2013:05:08 22:07:19-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:c00fe71e-2a7d-4e79-b71d-72373ec3008c
Instance ID                     : uuid:98289cde-9759-4746-8c16-3c9339212edd
Page Count                      : 629

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Toyota 2007 Tundra Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation